Sleeping under a camping tarp is a magical and minimalist experience. Unlike a tent, which cocoons you from the environment behind twin layers of the inner and flysheet, a tarp leaves you gloriously open to the landscape. The golden dusk light is unfiltered, stars dazzle overhead and your views are unhindered – a more intimate way to sleep wild.

It’s a must-do for those looking to get closer to nature and the mountains, but it's not the easiest activity to wing your first time. If you're just getting into the idea, check out our beginner's guide to tarping before you hit the hills this weekend.

What is a tarp? It’s a single-skin sheet of waterproof material used to create an outdoor shelter. It can be pitched in numerous layouts and shapes using pegs, walking poles, guy lines and optional groundsheets or bug nets.

This versatility allows a bespoke set-up tailored to the prevailing weather: pitch high for space and ventilation in fine conditions; pitch low for stability and protection on rainy, windy days. From the simple A-Frame and Lean-To to the more complex Tipi or C Fly Wedge, the options for tarp orientations are plentiful.

What are the best tarps of 2026?

Best in test: Nordisk Voss 5 LW

Best value: Simond Trekking tarp 1.5-person MT900

Best for versatility: MSR Thru-Hiker 70

There are three main types of tarp: flat, shaped and tarp-tents. We've covered the full range in this article. Flat tarps are square or rectangular, and generally-speaking are the simplest and cheapest option on the market.

Shaped tarps are multi-sided or have curved edges, with different shapes (e.g. hexagonal) optimised to a specific orientation. Tarp-tents – which blur the line between tarp and tent – can be pitched in different ways but include advanced features such as integrated bug nets, zippers and doors.

Whether you’re a long-term tarp aficionado or simply considering sleeping in a tarp for the first time, take a look at our picks and find the one that's just right for you. {#h-whether-you-re-a-long-term-tarp-aficionado-or-simply-considering-sleeping-in-a-tarp-for-the-first-time-take-a-look-at-our-picks-and-find-the-one-that-s-just-right-for-you}

Editor's note: This article was last updated on 10th August 2026, when we added one new tarp and checked all current options are still in stock.

How we tested the best tarps

As tarps are a very minimalist camping shelter, they get tested by those on our team who really enjoy that type of open-air camping. These team members include our photographer Tom Bailey, our lightweight backpacking specialist James Forrest, and LFTO writer Evie Nichols.

We tend to test tarps in summer when conditions are mild, taking them on some of our most remote backpacking trips when we want to get as back to basics as possible.

The best camping tarps reviewed:

What to look for in a camping tarp

Weight

Ultralight gurus will opt for the lightest possible tarp, thus helping to reduce the overall weight of their backpack. Under 300g is feasible for a high quality tarp for one person. However, a heavier, thicker tarp may provide better waterproofing, extra coverage and improved versatility.

Waterproofing

Tarps are often made from advanced and highly-technical waterproof materials, such as Dyneema DCF, siliconised nylon (sil-nylon) or siliconised polyester (sil-poly). Waterproof coatings and treatments such as Polyurethane (PU) or silicone are commonly used too. Some tarp materials are thin and ultralight, which generally comes at a price premium. Others are thicker and cheaper, but heavier.

A tarp’s hydrostatic head rating will give a good indication of how waterproof it truly is – aim for 2,000mm or higher for adventures in wet climates. Another key consideration is the status of a tarp’s seams – some products come with pre-sealed seams to ensure the shelter is water-tight, while on some you will have to apply a sealant yourself to prevent water ingress.

Types

Each different tarp type has different pros and cons. Flat tarps are cheap, simple and great for beginners, with good versatility. They work particularly well in milder conditions or in forests where a ridgeline can be hung between trees.

Shaped tarps are best for a low-profile pitch, when you need to block out the horizontal rain in the mountains. Tarp-tents are best if you require a touch more luxury and better features, such as integrated zips, doors, groundsheets or bug mesh inners.

Can I use a tarp as a ground cover?

A larger tarp will be more versatile and capable of being pitched in a broader range of shapes and designs. A particular benefit of larger tarps is the ability to use part of the tarp as a groundsheet, thus protecting your sleeping bag from the wet ground (and potentially negating the need to carry an extra bivvy bag).

You should also have space to store your backpack and kit under the tarp. But remember that larger tarps will be heavier and bulkier.

How do I secure a tarp?

A good tarp will have several attachment points for guy lines and pegs, which attach to the ground or nearby objects ensuring greater versatility and stability when it comes to pitching. A good tarp should also have ‘prop points’, which are integrated grommets that house a trekking pole’s tip, thus helping to improve the stability of your tarp’s skeletal structure.

Are camping tarps worth it?

Our testers love their camping tarps. They're very lightweight, but help to protect you and your sleeping bag from the elements. Combined with a bivvy bag, a tarp can be handy for those summer nights where you're not sure whether the weather will hold. And you can always keep it in your backpack to use just in case.

You might be more open to the elements under a tarp, but this means that you can enjoy the view from the comfort of your sleeping bag. Of course, tarps aren't as weather-resistant as a high-quality tent, but this is the trade-off for a lighter weight.

It's best to use a camping tarp on warm nights, where you need a little more protection than just a bivvy, but a whole tent isn't needed.

Is a tarp better than a tent?

The main advantage of a tarp over a tent is that it's lighter and more compact, which makes it better-suited to ultralight backpacking. There's also improved airflow, so it's less likely for condensation to build up, and it's quick to dry. Tarps also tent to be more versatile: you can make them into a rain barrier, or enclose yourself inside them.

In some cases, though – high winds, heavy rain, cold, mosquitoes – you'd be better off using a tent, as they offer far better protection.

How big of a tarp do you need for camping?

The size of tarp depends on how many people you want to fit under. We found that the Robens Trail Wing had ample room for two, and it measures 300 x 280 cm. The Terra Nova Competition, on the other hand, is designed for strictly 1 person and is sized 245 x 148cm.

Bigger tarps probably provide better weather protection, as you're more likely to be able to enclose yourself inside them.

Looking to sleep out under the stars? Take a look at our full guide to wild camping.

Camping accessories to go with your tarp

About the author

James Forrest is LFTO's lightweight backpacking fanatic. From cold soaked meals (the majority of the LFTO team aren't on board with this) to a halved toothbrush, James goes to great lengths to keep the contents of his rucksack as low as possible, as is therefore a big fan of tarps. James is also an avid trail runner and is based in the Lake District.

It’s been said that ultramarathons are just an eating and drinking competition with some running thrown in. And never do these words ring more true than when you’re tackling a multi-day ultra.

Taking in the right amount of fuel, fluids and electrolytes is – along with a well-executed pacing strategy – fundamental to finishing in good shape and enjoying the experience.

What to do before the event

Starting well fuelled

Fuelling starts well in advance of an ultramarathon. Two days out, your priority should be to load up with carbs to maximise stored glycogen in muscles and the liver.

Carb-loading involves tapering training volume whilst increasing carb intake in your diet. Something in the region of 10g of carbs per kg of body weight per day (e.g., 700g of carbs per day for a 70kg runner) for two days is around the recommended dose.

This essentially means eating an extra portion of carbs with each main meal, and potentially adding some carb-rich snacks between meals during the final 48 hours before the start. Keeping your diet low in fibre during this phase is also a good idea to help you avoid too much “bulk” in your diet and keep your digestive system clear for the race.

Starting well hydrated

Drinking a little extra water in the final 48 hours is a sensible precaution, but a key pre-hydration routine to follow is drinking around 500ml of a very strong electrolyte drink the night before and again on the morning of the start. The high level of sodium helps your body to absorb and retain some additional fluid.

During the stages

Once the event is under way, a useful mindset to adopt is that you’re not just eating and drinking for today but also for tomorrow’s stage. Tucking in within the first hour and topping up frequently is the best approach.

Carbs per hour

Carbs should form the backbone of what you take in on the move. Recommendations on dose vary from 60–90g per hour (two or three standard energy gels) depending on your pace and, to a lesser extent, your body size.

Using tried and tested sports nutrition products such as energy gels, chews and bars for the bulk of your carb intake is convenient, as you can test these out in training and know exactly what levels of carbs you’re taking in.

Depending on your preference, you’re also likely to supplement your baseline carb intake with additional “real foods” at aid stations. There’s nothing wrong with listening to your body and taking a little bit of what you feel like eating as you pass through these stops.

However, aid station calories are best viewed as additional calories and should not form the core of your fuelling plan – you don’t want to be reliant on the checkpoints for all of your energy and hydration needs.

Staying hydrated

Fluids and electrolytes are clearly also very important, but the amount you’ll need is going to vary dramatically based on the climate and your individual rates of sweat and sodium loss.

In cooler conditions and for those who have low sweat rates, as little as 250–300ml of fluid and negligible sodium intake can be enough. But in the heat, athletes with heavy sweat and sodium losses can drink over a litre of water per hour and take in as much as 1,500mg of sodium with that.

You can use the free Precision Hydration planning tool to give you a ballpark idea of what your fluid and sodium needs are likely to be, then refine your intake with some organised trial and error during long training sessions in the build-up.

After each stage

Immediately after finishing a stage, your number one priority is to kickstart your recovery. You have a limited window between finishing and being back on the start line again the next morning, so rehydrating and replenishing glycogen stores should begin as soon as possible.

A sodium-rich drink and a carb-and-protein-based energy bar is one way to start that as soon as you cross the line.

Soon after, sitting down to a proper meal with large amounts of carbs, some protein and plenty of vegetables and fruit is step two.

Don’t be shy with the salt shaker – it will help replace your sodium losses, especially if it’s been a hot, sweaty day. It’ll also assist with the retention of any fluids you drink with the meal.

Depending on how late in the day you finish, it may be worth adding another carb- and protein-rich snack before bedtime to further top up your tanks. You definitely don’t want to go to sleep hungry. Have a bottle of water by your bedside in case you wake up thirsty, and try to get as much sleep as you can to give the body some rest and time to process all of the calories you’ve taken on board.

Whilst it is something of a generalisation, it’s fair to say that vastly more athletes suffer from under-fuelling and, to a lesser extent, under-hydrating during multi-day ultras. As such, being quite ambitious with regards to how much you aim to eat and drink is likely to stand you in better stead than taking an overly conservative approach.

What does it take?

Here’s a fuelling and hydration plan for before, during and after each stage, taken from a colleague of Andy’s who was training for the Asics Coast Ultra Xtreme.

Before

Precision Hydration 1500: A neutral tasting energy gel with 30g of carbohydrate per serving and 2:1 glucose: fructose ratio for easy absorption in the gut. One to three per hour depending on individual need.

During

Precision Fuel PF 30 Gel: A neutral-tasting energy gel with 30g of carbohydrate per serving and a 2:1 glucose: fructose ratio for easy absorption in the gut. Take one to three per hour depending on individual need (use the quick carb calculator at precisionhydration.com).

Precision Hydration Electrolyte Capsules (swallowed with water from aid stations): Contains 250mg sodium per capsule for simple and accurate replacement of electrolytes lost in sweat.

Clif Bar Shot Bloks: Simple, digestible carbs in chewable format. Carb content varies by flavour.

After

Precision Hydration 1500: Also useful for rapid rehydration after each stage. One or two bottles (one tablet or packet in 500ml) in the hours immediately after finishing.

Clif Bar Builder’s Bar: Energy bar including 20g of protein to kickstart the recovery process immediately post-stage, before getting a proper meal inside you.

For more expert advice check out how to run your first ultramarathon.

Meet the expert

Andy Blow is a sports scientist and expert in hydration. He was once the team sports scientist for the Benetton and Renault Formula 1 teams and remains an adviser to the Porsche Human Performance Centre at Silverstone. He has raced a number of trail events and owns Precision Hydration.

Let’s play a game... Picture this scene and imagine where it is: a narrow, snaking trail, slightly rocky underfoot, lined with trees. It bends left, then right, travels up, then down. The air is a fresh as cut grass, the ground soft underfoot, and birdsong fills the air. You think you’re in the middle of the countryside, don’t you? A huge, spacious chunk of hillside full of wild flowers and bunny rabbits, at least two hours drive from the city.

But, no. This type of tranquility doesn’t only exist in vast tracts of remote Scotland, but right under your nose, within running distance of even the biggest, most densely-populated cities.

Say you wish to run from the centre of Birmingham, on trails to a traily place. Yes, it is very much possible. Starting from the urban hubbub of New Street Station there are not one, not two, but three – yes three – canal-side paths that will ferry you speedily out to the north, south, east and west of this smelly, bustling conurbation and deposit you in fresh, breezy nature reserves like Sutton Park, country parks like Sandwell and Cannon Hill and the leafy suburbs of Solihull, criss-crossed with charming (ie, muddy) footpaths.

Behold! In just a few miles, colourful graffiti is replaced with a rainbow of wildflowers, drab grey buildings give way to huge trees with fine branches swaying in the breeze, and the roar of the mighty M6 is drowned out by the delightful chirruping of birds. However, you can’t fully relax; do always be on the watch for dog poo – we can’t have everything, guys.

Finding local trail running routes

Excitingly, all cities and towns have these footpaths and bridleways radiating from them like escape routes. Many follow rivers and canals, others disused railway tracks, others are on roads that gradually disintegrate into tracks – you know, the ones lorries used to get stuck down before satnav improved.

Maps

All you need to do is find these trails on a map, and that’s easier than you might think. Many runners use an app to plan their runs – we like the OS maps app, as you can see the terrain in detail, although you do need to pay for a subscription for offline maps. It’s a great idea to buy the OS maps of your local area either in the paper version (very fun to pore over on a big table) or the digital version. Check out how to read a map and compass for more info.

Hunting for footpaths

Find your house, or town/city centre on the map, then start hunting for footpaths and bridleways that lead you to greener, less populated areas. To see how paths are shown on the map, take a look at the legend (found on one edge of the paper map, or Google ‘1:25,000 OS map legend’ if you’re digital) and familiarise yourself with all the different types.

Mostly they are green dashes, but sometimes there are black dashes and orange dashes, and sometimes diamonds and circles along the dashes, too. And sometimes lines you think are paths are actually county boundaries or lines of pylons, so look out for that also...

Plotting a route

Once you’ve found a path leading to some green space, see if you can link it to another to plot a circular route of a distance you’re comfortable with, using as many paths as you can find. Or, if you’re less comfortable with navigation, plot an out-and-back route so you’ll be covering familiar ground to get home. The blue grid squares will help you estimate distance – each is 1km across, and diagonally about 1.5km. Count how many your route crosses for a quick distance estimate.

To be more accurate, place a piece of string along your route if you’re using a paper map. If you’re a new-school digital wünderkind, simply click your route on to the screen and the computer will automatically total up the stats as you go (ahem, lazy). This goes for ascent, too. To work out the ascent the old fashioned way, you need a very tiny amount of brain power (namely maths, sorry) and the ability to distinguish the colour brown.

Contour lines

The more observant amongst you will have noticed slim, brown lines curving around the map. These are contour lines and they show hills and valleys. You’ll see numbers on them like ‘50m’ and ‘120m’ which correspond to their height above sea level. On OS maps they are either five or 10 metres apart. The closer they are together, the steeper the gradient, so if your path crosses a lot of contours over a short distance it will be very steep!

Keep an eye on how many contour lines your paths cross and how close together they are. If it looks intimidatingly steep, see if you can go round the hill instead (or at least it will give you a good excuse to walk that section). For total ascent, count all the uphill contours that your route crosses. If you go up a few significant hills you can use a bit of maths to note the lowest and highest contours on each climb and tot it up that way rather than painstakingly counting every single one.

A quick trick to tell if your path runs up or down hill when you can’t see any contour line numbers nearby is to look for a river near your path, as these start high and flow downhill, getting larger as they go. Or, look for a spot height, trig point or cairn, ringed with contours. This is the top of a hill.

Not getting lost

So, now you have your route at a distance and hilliness designed to thrill rather than kill, it’s time to go exploring from your doorstep! Leave a bit more time than usual in case you need to stop a few times to look at your map.

If you’ve decided on an out-and-back route, keep looking back to familiarise yourself with the views you should be expecting on your return. Take photos on your phone and make stone or stick arrows beside the path to jog your memory. Remember, church spires, tall buildings and communication towers can also be useful directional aids. Mentally tick these features off as you run so you always know where you are.

And take an extra layer, waterproof and snack just in case you’re out for longer than planned. A headtorch, too, if you’ve a prior history of, er, navigation-related adventure...

Find fresh trails locally

Explore more

Go exploring wherever you see a footpath sign. Just dive off and see where it goes, turning round when you’ve had enough. Discovering a new trail so nearby is thrilling.

Talk to others

If you’re in a local running club, Facebook group or even an online gathering, ask about the trails nearby to see if there are local woods, country parks or paths that you haven’t discovered yet.

Use running apps

See where others are running on social sports apps like Map my Run, Strava and Komoot. If they run into areas with no roads or through green bits, copy them and have your own adventure!

Look at race routes

If there are trail races locally, look at their routes on the organiser’s website and see if you can find your way round. Just make sure the organiser hasn’t had to gain special permission from a landowner to run through certain areas on the day of the planned event.

Vlogs and blogs

Google ‘trail runs’ in your area and see if any bloggers or YouTubers have covered any routes near you. You might be surprised with the hidden gems you find.

Top 5 city trails

Manchester

Try Chorlton Water Park a few miles south-west of the city centre, a hidden gem of tranquility between Sale and Whalley Range, with woodland, wildlife and the Trans-Pennine Trail along the River Mersey.

Glasgow

From the centre, head northwest along River Kelvin on the Kelvin Walkway path, through ancient woodland to old Roman forts and camps and a Wilderness Plantation with views of Blairskaith Muir hill and pine forest to the north.

Birmingham

Follow the canal north-west to Sandwell then strike out north for a couple of kilometres to be rewarded with Sandwell Valley Country Park, full of trees, lakes, swans and paths east of the M5.

London

Our capital has loads of fantastic parks for trail running but surely the best is Wimbledon Common, riddled with wide to skinny paths through the woods, you could get lost for hours discovering hidden pools and chasing squirrels.

Cardiff

Easy! The Taff Trail alongside the Afon (river) Taf simply begs to be run right from Cardiff city centre, through mixed woodland and out into the hills to climb for great views across the bay like Garth Hill (307m).

About the author

Paul Larkins is the former editor of Trail Running magazine and one of the most respected names in British athletics. As well as being a former sub four-minute miler, he’s also represented Great Britain at World and European level, and twice been British champion indoors over 3000m. This list goes on… Paul also won the American Collegiate mile title, ran for GB at the World Indoor Champs in Seville, and was a member of the bronze medal-winning team at the World Road Relays.

Beyond essential pieces of equipment, there are the few luxuries and gadgets we allow ourselves, such as camping chairs. What is a simple amenity of home life becomes an expendable luxury on a camping trip or at a festival, and the task of the humble chair is usually relegated to a log or patch of ground.

In line with outdoor gear brands' ability to make camping equipment ever lighter and compact, some camping chairs have now reached the point where they can quite happily fit inside your big rucksack without ejecting your backpacking stove and camping cutlery.

Thanks to developments, it's also a lot easier to pack camping chairs into your boot alongside your family tent or luxuriously comfy camping mattress.

But how do you pick the right one? Well, we've been testing camping kit for decades and on this page you'll find our pick of the best camping chairs on the market right now – with all of them having gone through extensive testing by our review team.

Best camping chairs at a glance:

Best in test: Kelty Low Loveseat

Best value camping chair: Robens Pathfinder

Best lightweight camping chair: Helinox Chair Zero LT

Best for wild camping and backpacking: Crazy Creek Hex 2.0 Longback Chair

How we test

The camping chairs recommended here have all been tried and tested by various members of the LFTO team over several months – years in some cases. The humble camping chair may seem a bit, well, humdrum but it's a camping staple so it's important to get right.

Our team is made up of people who venture on camping trips with their families and wild camping trips, during which time the chairs in this list have been put through thorough testing. Both types of camping bring their own type of intensity and also demand different types of camping chairs.

So, what we've done here is recommend the very best camping chairs from across the spectrum – from lightweight folding stools to reclining luxury chairs.

Each chair has been tested against four key criteria: comfort, durability, portability and value for money.

Find out more on how we test here.

Editor's note: This article was last updated on 25 June 2026, when we checked our picks were still relevant and removed any products that are no longer available.

The best camping chairs reviewed:

Table: Compare camping chairs

What type of camping chair is best for me?

Camping chairs come in many different designs, so what could suit one person might not suit another. Much of this will come down to whether or not you want something to sit on while backpacking, car camping or at a festival.

If you're wild camping you'll want something as light and compact as possible, given the limitations on space in your backpacking rucksack.

How much you're willing to carry is entirely up to personal preferences, but you certainly wouldn't want to go over 1kg. Sub-500g would be more feasible, but at this weight you're probably going to be looking at a frameless option.

If you're car camping, you've got a lot more space to play with, especially if you're not road tripping as a family. If there's just one or two of you, then you can really go for comfort, as space is of limited concern (depending on car size!).

However, if you're packing the family tent, camping mattresses, kids and everything else, you're once again limited on space (unless you have a roof tent).

In these circumstances you'll need to prioritise what's most important to your trip and how much space you're prepared to hand over to camping chairs. My advice? If you're going for more than a couple of nights, consider investing the money and space in something that's going to increase your comfort.

And then there's festival camping (see our list of the best festival tents here). This can be particularly brutal on kit, so I recommend picking something robust or something that's not so expensive that you'll cry if it breaks.

What to look for in a camping chair

Packed size

Rucksacks still have a finite amount of space, and what sounds like compact may turn out to be not compact enough for you. Rather than simply checking whether a certain chair will fit in your pack, check to see if it'll fit after your rucksack is packed with all your gear. Though, you may be happy attaching the folded chair to the daisy chains on your pack.

If you're car camping, think about how packed your boot was the last time you went camping and consider how much space is going spare – or what you'd be prepared to sacrifice to fit in your fancy new chair.

Weight

As mentioned, we recommend keeping the weight of your chair to less than 1kg (ideally 500g) if you're on a multi-day hike.

If you're car camping then the weight isn't really so important, but consider whether or not you have to park up away from your pitch and carry kit over to it.

Materials

Some lightweight camping chairs still have reasonably durable fabrics and frames. It's important to stick to these because there are plenty of models out there that are lightweight but very flimsy.

The denier of the fabric (written as 400D, for example) denotes how thick a fabric is. The higher the number the more durable it should be, but also the heavier and warmer it becomes.

A lot of brands are now using recycled fabrics in their camping chairs, which is always nice to see, but read the small print to check it's not just a brand's attempt at greenwashing by including 5% recycled materials.

When it comes to frames, you'll typically find steel and aluminium options, both of which can be very strong and durable.

Comfort

This is an important one. After all, it's why you're buying a camping chair in the first place, right? When you're camping there's no sofa to relax on, yet you do a lot of hanging around.

Given that, pick an option that will let you chill out in comfort. There's a bit of a tradeoff between weight and comfort, but try to pick something that's roomy, supportive and cushioned enough for you.

Tight seams can cause pressure points, while thick fabrics can make for a sweaty sit down in the height of summer, so keep your eyes peeled for sections of mesh, which boost ventilation.

Stability

What good is a camping chair if you keep falling off of it? That shouldn't really happen if you're sat still, but options lacking in stability can spit you out into the dirt when reaching for items.

A stable platform helps avoid this from happening and will also deal better with sloping ground.

Pay attention to the feet on the bottom of the frame, too, as narrow ones can sink into soft ground, which you really want to avoid.

Weight limit

All of the camping chairs featured here have a stated weight limit, which gives you an idea of what they can handle.

Most have plenty of capacity, but some cheaper options can have less, so be sure to check. It's probably wise not to push it too close to the limit, either.

About the authors

Deputy editor Rob Slade (above) and former senior writer Chris Williams did the majority of testing and reviewing of the camping chairs featured in this test.

Rob has been spending all of his spare time outdoors for over half of his life, which has seen him camp everywhere from New Zealand (for four weeks) and the Lake District to the Wadi Rum desert in Jordan. Before joining LFTO, he was content editor at 220 Triathlon and editor at Adventure Travel magazine.

Chris spent his childhood doing almost every outdoor sport under the sun. He grew up and trained as a journalist in New Zealand, and was LFTO's senior writer between 2021 and 2024.

The category of ‘backpacking rucksacks’ covers a whole spectrum of different packs. The Gregory Baltoro sits very much at one end of that spectrum, where the engineering is unapologetically elaborate, the feature list is unapologetically long, and the gram count is unapologetically high. It’s a premium trekking pack, in every sense.

The 2026 version has been substantially reworked with a new FreeFloat A3 suspension system, revised AirCushion back panel and updated harness construction. All these upgrades and alterations seem to have been made to ensure that when it comes to outright carrying comfort, it makes a compelling case to be considered the number one pick in the Gregory range, and amongst the most comfortable choices on the market.

This is not a pack for gram-counters. If you’re wedded to the ultralight philosophy, the Baltoro will strike you as too heavy and over-engineered. There’s nothing wrong with that judgement. But ultralight packs only really make sense if the rest of your kit is similarly ultralight.

If that’s not the case, and you’re carrying bulkier, heavier kit (either out of choice or necessity), then it’s worth prioritising carrying comfort for big loads – especially if you’re planning long days or know you will be tackling technical terrain. Similarly, if you like a pack with plenty of organised storage across multiple pockets, or something that can handle high temps and warm climates without turning your back into a damp and sticky sweatfest, the Baltoro 65 is about as good as it gets.

Back system, frame and suspension

The “FreeFloat A3 suspension system” is marketing speak for a combination of flexible mesh panels and rotating shoulder straps that are designed to move with your body rather than working against it. The one-piece hipbelt and lower lumbar panel conform to your individual body shape, with the result that the pack feels less like something strapped to you and more like an extension of your torso.

In practice, this makes a perceptible difference on longer days where more rigid, structured harnesses typically start to rub, creating pressure points and hot spots. Unlike a lot of packs, it isn’t squeaky either. The wraparound mesh fabrics eliminate bulky seams and stitching, while the ComfortGrip lumbar pad does a good job of keeping the pack positioned high on the hips without the need to over-cinch the hipbelt. As a bonus, it also stops your baselayer from riding up under the hipbelt.

The pack’s internal perimeter frame is made from steel tube, with a fibreglass anti-barrelling cross-stay – the same system that forms of the basis of most of Gregory’s serious load-carriers. It provides plenty of structure, prevents the pack from deforming under heavy loads and channels weight efficiently onto the hips. Gregory quotes a mega maximum load capacity of 27.2kg (60lbs), which is substantially more than most rivals will comfortably handle.

I didn’t test it to its rated limit – there’s no way I’d want to be lugging that much weight uphill – but my hanging luggage scales showed that, fully loaded, my test pack was just over 14kg including a couple of days’ food and water, and some wild camping luxuries (such as my Crazy Creek Hex 2.0 Longback chair, which fits neatly in the side pocket).

The AirCushion backpanel is an excellent design. It is made from proprietary mesh with a 3D structure consisting of over 90% open-air, providing cooling ventilation and good breathability (moisture management). Unlike fully suspended trampoline-style back systems that can feel unstable and lever away from your back on more technical terrain, the AirCushion system keeps the pack sitting close and stable while still delivering decent airflow. On warm-weather trails with technical sections – think the incredible GR20 in high summer or a long trekking route in the Alps – that balance between airflow and stability is a big plus.

Fit and adjustability

The Baltoro 65 comes in three torso sizes – S, M and L – with overlapping fit ranges that allow you to size up or down depending on your body shape. You also get about four inches of additional back length adjustment, thanks to movable shoulder straps, which are fixed to a Velcro panel.

The hipbelt padding is also fully adjustable on all pack sizes, with extending hip fins and very generous webbing straps (downside: if you don’t need the full length, you may want to cut these down or at least tuck them out of the way).

Getting a good fit is straightforward and, once dialled in, the pack feels remarkably secure for its size and load capacity. The rotating harness means you can achieve a better fit whether you have broader or narrower shoulders compared to older fixed-position systems with fixed, stitched shoulder straps.

The sternum strap includes an integrated safety whistle – a small but useful detail – along with a hydration clip. It slides up and down so it can be positioned as desired, but (unlike some rivals, looking at you, Highlander Ben Nevis) stays put where you want it.

Features, pockets and organisation

The Baltoro’s feature set is extensive, and this is one area where in terms of practicality I think it even outdoes deluxe rivals like the Osprey Atmos/Aura AG 65. The floating top lid has a large main zippered compartment, a smaller quick-access pocket and an underside zippered pocket with a raincover and a key clip. The main compartment is accessed via a quick-pull drawcord and top webbing compression, with a separate zippered compartment at the base (with a removable divider) for your sleeping bag.

On the front there’s an oversized stretch-mesh pocket with a secure buckle closure – good for wet gear or items you need fast access to, such as a waterproof jacket. Two front zippered pockets sit behind it with a floating divider wall, giving you organised vertical storage for smaller items.

A U-Zip opening on the front of the main compartment allows full ‘suitcase-style’ access to the contents without having to dig from the top – a feature borrowed from previous Baltoro generations and one that remains genuinely useful in the confines of a tent porch.

The SideWinder bottle holster deserves a special mention. It allows one-handed on-the-go water bottle access and tucks away when not in use – a small quality-of-life detail that the Osprey Atmos AG lacks, and one that makes a real difference on long days when staying hydrated means not stopping to wrestle a hiking water bottle out of a side pocket.

I use it to stash my Grayl GeoPress, so I can instantly filter water from any spring, stream or lake I pass rather than having to carry multiple litres in a hydration bladder. There’s a second elasticated fabric pocket on the other side of the pack too, which is deep enough to take a big 1.5-litre Nalgene, but sturdy enough not to snag or tear (unlike mesh pockets).

The oversized hipbelt pockets are large enough for a big smartphone and a share-size bag of Haribo. There’s also Gregory’s Sunglasses QuickStow system on one shoulder strap, which is actually a thoughtful detail that feels less gimmicky than it sounds in practice.

Weight and sustainability

You can probably sense what’s coming. The Baltoro’s main drawback is weight. At 2.13kg to 2.38kg depending on which size you need (S, M or L), it’s among the heavier options in the 65L backpacking pack category. The chunky steel frame, plush harness and plethora of pockets/other features all add up. For ultralight-minded backpackers, this will make it a non-starter.

On the sustainability front, the main body and base both use 210D High Density 40% Recycled Nylon with a PFC-free DWR. The lining is also made from 40% post-consumer recycled polyester – a meaningful eco-conscious update compared to previous generations.

Hardware consists of Bluesign-approved buckles throughout. It’s still not the most eco-friendly pack on the market (some rivals are now using 100%% recycled materials), but it’s certainly a step in the right direction. And in terms of build quality, it feels like an extremely robust, well-made pack.

Price and competition

At £300, the Baltoro 65 sits in the premium bracket alongside competitors like the Osprey Atmos AG 65. The comparison between the two is inevitable but illuminating. If you’re gonna drop this much cash on a backpack, which should you pick? Tough call.

The Osprey’s Anti-Gravity harness/hipbelt and trampoline-style back system produces slightly better airflow, while the Baltoro counters with superior load stability. It also has some extra features like that SideWinder bottle holster, ComfortGrip lumbar pad and the U-Zip main access (the Atmos only has a curved side-zipper).

In terms of overall carrying comfort there’s not much to split them. The FreeFloat A3 harness offers better load transfer than Osprey’s AG system, but with more flex and less rigidity – a difference that some users will strongly prefer, unless you like that hip-hugging, locked-in feel. However, the Osprey undoubtedly wins on the scales, as the Baltoro comes in a little heavier (the Atmos AG 65 is 2.18kg in the L/XL size, compared to the Baltoro’s 2.38kg).

Still, for extended trekking trips, heavily loaded multi-day routes or upland adventures where you might be crossing technical or tricky terrain, I think the Baltoro is the more capable tool thanks to its balance of comfort, ventilation and stability.

The women’s equivalent – the Deva 60 or Deva 70 – shares the same suspension system and feature set in a women’s-specific fit.

Final verdict

A great choice for extended trekking trips, this deluxe gear-hauler is well-adapted to warm climates, big days and heavy loads. The redesigned FreeFloat suspension is a genuine step forward – more adaptive, more comfortable and more stable than its predecessor. The weight penalty is a drawback, but for those who prioritise carrying comfort over pack weight, the Baltoro 65 is superb.

In the market for more backpacking kit? Take a look at our list of the best one-person tents.

About the author

Matt Jones is a freelance journalist based in the heart of Eryri National Park (Snowdonia). He’s a vastly experienced gear tester and self-confessed outdoor kit geek. Matt’s been one of our main gear testers for the last couple of years and is the first person we call with any complicated kit queries that need in-depth and forensic analysis. He was previously editor of Walk and Scouting magazines.

Everything in the hills – past, present and future – comes back to the rock.

Get to know this and you can read into a history of ancient seabeds and giant fuming volcanoes, or look forward to predict the habitat that will grow there and the animals that will roam it. On a rainy day, you can guess whether it will be slick as ice or grippy as sandpaper.

Here’s our guide to the rock that makes the mountains.

Schist Metamorphic

Past: Silt, mud and sand that was laid down on a seabed 500-700 million years ago. Around 400 million years ago, two tectonic plates collided and these sandy beds were squashed, pressured into folds, and transformed into metamorphic rocks such as mica. This created a characteristic wavy look and mixed mineral composition.

Looks like: Grey or greenish rock with wavy foliation (banding), fine cracks and flakes. It tends to sparkle with grains of mica and develop large bands of quartz.

Where can you find it? Across Scotland (Ben A’an pictured above), Anglesey and Northern Ireland.

Slate Metamorphic

Past: Mud and clay laid down on an ancient seabed, and then morphed under great pressure and heat to form slates. Because of the way the minerals align, it fractures easily into plates in one direction but is hard and impermeable to water in the other. This means that while it is very slippery when wet, it also
dries fast.

Looks like: Greyish green walls of rock often looking quite featureless, or otherwise showing matchstick flakes and edges.

Where can you find it? North Wales, Cornwall and Honister.

Rhyolite Igneous

Past: Made from the lava flows and exploded molten rock of a past eruption. Rhyolite has a similar chemical composition to granite except that, exposed to the Earth’s surface, the new-formed rhyolite cooled quickly, resulting in a fine grain size, smooth to the touch. It does, however, tend to form very hard, erosion-resistant rock.

Looks like: Pale grey or pinkish rock with angular ledges and solid holds that can, however, become polished.

Where can you find it? Across Eryri (Crib Goch pictured), the Lakes and Scotland, especially Glen Coe.

Gabbro Igneous

Past: Magma, which cooled very slowly deep beneath the Earth’s surface. Due to the slowness of its formation and chemical composition, it tends to be very coarse, with large, visible mineral grains. Often most noticeable are the pale rectangular feldspar fragments standing proud of the rock’s
surface.

Looks like: Dark-coloured rock which is exceptionally rough to the touch and provides very high friction, even when wet.

Where can you find it? West coast of Scotland especially Skye (pictured), Rum and Ardnamurchan.

Basalt Igneous

Past: Like gabbro, a rock formed from magma, and which has a similar chemical composition. In this case though, rapid cooling led to a much smaller grain size and a smoother surface. It can take a variety of forms: when erupted into the sea it can cool into blob-shaped ‘pillows’. In other cases, as the basalt-lava cools it contracts, forming cracks and columns.

Looks like: Dark grey, black or brown rock that is smooth to the touch and devilishly slippy
when wet.

Where can you find it? Skye, Mull (Staffa, near Mull, pictured), the Central Belt and Northern Ireland, famously the Giant's Causeway.

Granite Igneous

Past: Very thick magma which cooled slowly beneath the Earth’s surface, resulting in a large-grained rock. The three minerals which make up granite are usually visible to the eye: quartz which is white or pale grey; feldspar, usually white or pink; and a darker mineral such as shiny mica or amphibole.

Looks like: A quite recognisable rock due to its colouring, especially when the feldspar is pink. It is very hard and erosion-resistant, sometimes weathering away to leave rounded tors on hill tops.

Where can you find it? Cairngorms and Dartmoor.

Gritstone Sedimentary

Past: Gritstone is formed in the shallows, made up of sands and stones carried down from mountain tops to a shallow basin by ancient rivers. Unlike more regular sandstone, its composition is varied, with different sizes and shapes of mineral grains, including small smooth pebbles – an indication of past storm surges.

Looks like: Brown rock with a very rough surface, and which tends to be fairly weathered, with deep cracks, rounded edges and small circular holes.

Where can you find it? Northern England, principally the Peak District (pictured).

Limestone Sedimentary

Past: Tiny fragments of corals and shells deposited in shallow tropical seas. Limestone is water soluble, eroding the rock where it flows through cracks and weaknesses, eventually forming caves and underground streams and waterfalls. Above ground, it can fracture into limestone pavements made up of clints (blocks) and grykes (fissures).

Looks like: Pale grey or cream coloured rock, eroded by water to form hollows and runnels, cleaved blocks and areas of pavement.

Where can you find it? The southern Peak District and the Yorkshire Dales (pictured).

About the author

Sarah Ryan is a qualified Mountain Leader, nature expert and lifelong hiker who leads walks and expeditions all over the UK. She's worked for Trail magazine and Trail Running magazine and is a long-time contributor to Live for the Outdoors.

Imagine you’re threading your way through the high passes above Chamonix during one of the iconic UTMB races.

Maybe you're tackling the rugged Lake District fells on the legendary Montane Lakeland 50. Or perhaps you're weaving your way along the exposed Cornish coastline during the Arc of Attrition, with Atlantic waves crashing below and another marathon's worth of climbing still ahead.

These are the moments trail runners train for. The moments when determination takes over and you discover what you're truly capable of. They're also the moments when your equipment has to deliver.

Because imagine getting 10 hours into the biggest race of your life only for your GPS watch battery to flash red. Or making a costly navigational mistake because the screen becomes difficult to read in fading light. Perhaps GPS accuracy starts drifting beneath dense woodland, leaving your pacing and distance calculations increasingly unreliable just when you're trying to stick to a carefully planned race strategy.

In trail running, a watch isn't simply recording your adventure. It becomes your map, your navigator, your coach, your safety net and your constant companion. That's exactly the challenge Amazfit has set out to solve with its new Cheetah 2 Ultra.

Amazfit: The Brand

Although Amazfit has long established itself as one of the world's leading smartwatch brands, trusted by millions of users across more than 90 countries, the company has slowly been building its expertise in trail running and performance for several years. A previous trail running model, the T-Rex 3 Pro, was a big hit and the brand has been working with top trail running athletes including Ruth Croft, Rod Farvard and Rosa Lara Feliu.

Building on this foundation of trust and credibility, Amazfit is now making an even more ambitious push into the world of trail running. It’s investing heavily in performance, endurance and outdoor adventure, with exciting plans already building momentum ahead of the 2026 UTMB Finals in Chamonix and beyond.

A watch isn't simply recording your adventure. It becomes your map, your navigator, your coach, your safety net and your constant companion.

The aim is simple: offer serious trail runners premium features traditionally associated with flagship outdoor watches, while delivering affordability not often seen in this space. It's an approach that's beginning to turn heads and positions Amazfit alongside some of the biggest names in outdoor GPS technology, offering athletes another compelling option without necessarily paying flagship prices.

Built specifically for prolonged adventures in remote, unpredictable terrain, the new Amazfit Cheetah 2 Ultra has been designed around one simple philosophy: Train. Recover. Evolve. From multi-day mountain adventures to 100-mile ultra-marathons, every element is intended to help runners push further with greater confidence.

7 reasons the Cheetah 2 Ultra is perfect for trail runners

1. Battery life built for ultras

Battery anxiety is one concern no trail runner needs. The Cheetah 2 Ultra offers up to 33 hours in dedicated Trail Running mode, providing enough endurance for everything from all-day mountain epics to many of the world's toughest ultra-marathons. Away from racing, typical everyday usage stretches to an impressive 30 days, meaning less time charging and more time training.

2. Navigation you can trust

Whether you're racing on unfamiliar trails or exploring new mountain ranges, navigation is one of the watch's biggest strengths. Full-colour contour mapping combines with ultra-fast route guidance, making it far easier to understand the terrain around you than simple breadcrumb navigation. When paths divide, visibility drops or fatigue clouds your judgement, having clear mapping available directly on your wrist could prove invaluable.

3. Display that's easy to read anywhere

Mountain weather changes in minutes. One moment you're running beneath blazing sunshine; the next you're descending into mist or forest. The Cheetah 2 Ultra's vibrant 1.5-inch AMOLED display delivers an exceptional 3,000 nits of brightness, making workout data and navigation easy to read in virtually any conditions. Sapphire glass also provides outstanding scratch resistance, helping protect the screen from the inevitable rough and tumble of your trail antics.

4. GPS accuracy when precision matters

Trail runners know GPS signals can quickly become unreliable beneath dense woodland, steep valleys or towering cliff faces. To combat this, Amazfit combines dual-band positioning with support for six satellite systems, helping maintain accurate tracking even when conditions become challenging. Whether you're monitoring pace, recording elevation gain or following a GPX route, greater positional accuracy means greater confidence throughout your run.

5. Enough storage for serious adventures

With 64GB of onboard storage, the Cheetah 2 Ultra has ample space for detailed contour maps and offline navigation, allowing you to leave mobile signal worries behind. Whether you're tackling remote Scottish Munros, Alpine traverses or multi-day adventures overseas, mapping remains available even when your phone doesn't.

6. Lightweight strength

Despite its premium specification, the Cheetah 2 Ultra is chunky but not excessively so. It avoids unnecessary bulk with a Grade 5 titanium frame, which provides outstanding durability while keeping overall weight impressively low. Combined with military-grade toughness, the watch is built to withstand harsh weather, rocky scrambles and countless hours speeding along technical trails without compromising comfort on long runs.

7. Smarter training and recovery

Training doesn't stop when the run finishes. The Cheetah 2 Ultra also helps athletes understand how their bodies are adapting over time. BioCharge monitoring, heart rate variability (HRV), training load analysis and dedicated Trail Running workout modes all work together to provide deeper insight into effort, fatigue and recovery. Trail-specific load settings also account for the additional demands of carrying mandatory kit during mountain races, creating a more accurate picture of your true training stress and helping you make smarter decisions before your next big adventure.

For more information visit uk.amazfit.com/products/cheetah-2-ultra

As the first rays of sunshine glint across the Atlantic, runners are already ticking off easy miles along the palm-lined promenade at Maspalomas.

Inland, road cyclists weave through endless mountain switchbacks towards volcanic summits, while triathletes emerge from crystal-clear water before heading out onto smooth coastal roads.

Those on rest days are hiking up to Roque Nublo, the island’s iconic summit with far-reaching views. By lunchtime, temperatures are still comfortably warm, cafés are full of athletes refuelling after training, and another perfect day outdoors is only just getting started.

Nicknamed the 'miniature continent', it's an island where you can experience desert-like dunes, pine forests and rugged mountain scenery

Gran Canaria has long been one of Europe's favourite sunshine escapes, but over the past decade it has quietly established itself as one of the continent's premier destinations for endurance sport. Sitting in the Atlantic Ocean just off the north-west coast of Africa, the Spanish island combines dramatic volcanic mountains, golden beaches, deep ravines and lush green valleys in an astonishingly varied landscape.

Nicknamed the 'miniature continent', it's an island where you can experience desert-like dunes, pine forests and rugged mountain scenery all in a day – plus it’s easily accessible with cheap, direct flights from across the UK.

That geographical diversity is exactly what makes Gran Canaria such an outstanding destination for runners, cyclists, triathletes and hikers. Coastal promenades provide flat recovery runs, challenging mountain roads offer thousands of metres of climbing, and an extensive network of trails winds through spectacular volcanic landscapes.

Throw in warm temperatures throughout the year and it's easy to see why professional teams and amateur athletes alike regularly choose the island for winter training camps and pre-season preparation.

But Gran Canaria isn't simply somewhere with good weather and impressive scenery. It's an island that has built an entire sporting ecosystem around active travel. World-class events fill the calendar throughout the year, specialist accommodation caters specifically for endurance athletes, bike hire and guiding companies make travelling with minimal kit effortless, while sports medicine and recovery facilities help visitors train harder and recover faster.

Whether you're preparing for your first marathon, building fitness for a cycling sportive, looking for a hiking adventure or chasing a new triathlon personal best, everything you need is right here.

Why Gran Canaria is your perfect sunshine training camp

1. Incredible landscapes that inspire every session

One of Gran Canaria's biggest strengths is the sheer variety of terrain packed into such a compact island. One day you can be running beside the Atlantic Ocean, the next climbing through fragrant pine forests towards the monolith of Roque Nublo, before finishing the week tackling spectacular volcanic roads that snake high above the coastline.

Cyclists are particularly spoiled, with quiet mountain roads delivering long, sustained climbs and thrilling descents through ever-changing scenery. Trail runners and hikers have hundreds of kilometres of paths to explore, while road runners can enjoy everything from seafront promenades to rolling inland routes. Whatever your sport, every session comes with a spectacular backdrop.

2. Reliable sunshine all year

Few places in Europe offer such dependable training conditions. Thanks to its subtropical climate, Gran Canaria enjoys warm temperatures and abundant sunshine across all four seasons, making it especially attractive when much of northern Europe is battling rain, snow and icy roads.

That consistency allows athletes to maintain uninterrupted training blocks, whether they're escaping winter for a week or spending several weeks preparing for a major race. Instead of constantly checking weather forecasts, visitors can focus on what matters most: getting quality training done.

3. Packed calendar of world-class sporting events

Gran Canaria isn't just somewhere to train - it's somewhere to race. The island hosts an impressive programme of endurance events throughout the year, catering for everyone from first-time competitors to seasoned athletes.

Triathletes can take on the internationally recognised Challenge Mogán Gran Canaria, while cyclists can tackle demanding mountain sportives including the Gran Fondo Pico de las Nieves, the fearsome Desafío La Titánica or EPIC Gran Canaria, which is part of the iconic Gran Fondo World Tour.

Elsewhere, the Vuelta Ciclista al Norte showcases the island's spectacular northern roads, Gran Canaria Bike Week combines organised rides with a festival atmosphere, the Binter NightRun Las Palmas de Gran Canaria is an atmospheric celebration of running, and the Gran Canaria SwimRun offers a unique multi-discipline challenge that blends open-water swimming with coastal trail running. Together, they create a sporting calendar that keeps the island buzzing throughout the year.

4. Sports medicine and recovery on your doorstep

Training hard only works if you recover well, and Gran Canaria has invested heavily in supporting athletes beyond the finish line. Hospitales Universitarios San Roque offers specialist sports medicine, including advanced diagnostics, sports cardiology, orthopaedics and performance testing, helping athletes monitor their health and optimise training.

Meanwhile, Privo Nordic specialises in performance enhancement and injury prevention, combining physiotherapy, movement analysis, strength work and cutting-edge recovery techniques such as cryotherapy and red-light therapy. It's the sort of support normally associated with elite sport, but increasingly accessible to visiting athletes too.

5. Hotels that understand what athletes need

Gran Canaria's accommodation has evolved alongside its sporting reputation, with many hotels now specifically designed around the needs of active travellers. For post-training recovery, the Gloria Palace Amadores Thalasso & Hotel and Gloria Palace San Agustín Thalasso & Hotel pair impressive wellness facilities with renowned thalassotherapy centres.

Cyclists are particularly well served by Hotel Cordial Mogán Playa, Apartamentos Cordial Mogán Valle, Seaside Sandy Beach, Hotel Suites & Villas by Dunas, Radisson Blu Resort Gran Canaria, H10 Playa Meloneras Horizons Collection and Salobre Hotel Resort & Serenity, all of which offer facilities tailored towards riders.

Triathletes often favour Marina Suites or the Anfi Emerald Club, thanks to excellent training facilities including swimming pools, while Seaside Palm Beach and Lopesan Costa Meloneras Resort & Spa combine luxurious recovery with easy access to beaches and running routes. Across the island, whichever hotel you choose, it's increasingly common to find secure bike storage, workshops, gyms, swimming pools and dedicated recovery facilities built into the accommodation itself.

Other options are plentiful. The Resort Cordial Santa Águeda combines spacious villas with seaside facilities. The Amadores View offers tranquility in an adults-only format with a gym and ocean views, while the Radisson Blu Resort Gran Canaria is excellently equipped for cyclists. Meanwhile, Hotel La Aldea Suites and Hotel Rural Las Calas bring training into quieter inland environments.

Also noteworthy are the Sercotel Playa Canteras, which has a strategic urban location, and the Monte Feliz powered by Playitas, which is focused on high performance. Completing the offer are the Viviendas Vacacionales ART, featuring an urban bike center, and Sholeo Lodges Maspalomas, which boasts a modern concept aimed at the active athlete.

6. Everything you need to ride

Flying abroad with an expensive bike isn't always practical, but Gran Canaria makes things refreshingly straightforward. Companies such as Banana Bike Canarias offer bike hire with convenient delivery direct to your accommodation, while Free Motion combines premium bike rental with workshops, guided rides and retail stores across the island.

For riders wanting a more personalised experience, I'm Pedal creates bespoke cycling holidays, guided routes and tailored training experiences. It means you can arrive with little more than your riding kit and still enjoy world-class cycling from day one.

7. World-class hiking on your doorstep

Even if your main focus is running, cycling or triathlon, it would be a shame not to lace up your walking boots while you're here. Gran Canaria boasts hundreds of kilometres of waymarked trails through volcanic landscapes, beautiful pine forests and dramatic mountain scenery.

Highlights include the classic hike to the iconic monolith of Roque Nublo, the spectacular summit of Pico de las Nieves (the island's highest point at 1,949m), the breathtaking Caldera de Bandama volcanic crater and the remote ravines and reservoirs of the island's rugged interior. A gentle hike makes the perfect active recovery day between harder training sessions, but with such an extensive network of trails, Gran Canaria is equally capable of delivering a dedicated hiking holiday in its own right.

Gran Canaria boasts hundreds of kilometres of waymarked trails through volcanic landscapes, beautiful pine forests and dramatic mountain scenery

For more information and to plan your sports stay in Gran Canaria visit www.grancanariatribikerun.com

Scottish mountains are often tucked away, miles up a glen, meaning that just getting to them can be an epic walk in itself.

Luckily, glens are often serviced by well-made tracks courtesy of the estates that own them. Cars aren’t allowed – but bicycles are. This means that if you’ve got the use of a mountain bike you can cover those long approach miles quickly and make pretty much any peak doable in a day, without the need for a wild camp or a night in a bothy. If you’ve never tried this exotic combination, I think I have the perfect trip for you.

Mount Keen isn’t, as its name suggests, eager to express itself. This mountain likes to take things easy; in fact its Gaelic name of Monadh Caoin means ‘smooth or pleasant hill’.

It hides its light as far away from public view as possible, hoping its easy-angled flanks will deter the adrenaline junkies whose idea of time away in the mountains is to scare themselves silly then tell everyone about it. If the likes of Ben Nevis and Quinag are rock music, the relaxed slopes of Mount Keen represent the reggae of the walking world.

Mount Keen: a mountain for all

Mount Keen is a Munro, one of the 282 Scottish mountains over 3000ft. Even more enticingly, it’s
a member of what I call the Cardinal Club: the four Munros at the extremities of the four cardinal points of the compass.

Sitting way out to the right of your map of Scotland, at the farthest eastern edge of the Cairngorms National Park, Mount Keen is – by a long way – the most easterly Munro. That ‘long way’ is due to the fact it’s so remarkably remote. Yes, it’s surrounded by other smaller hills, but the next nearest Munro is Cac Carn Beag, part of the Lochnagar massif, some 10½ miles to the west. So it’s an outlier in every way – and I do love an outlier.

Mount Keen is a member of the Cardinal Club: the four Munros at the extremities of the four cardinal points of the compass.

Also, unlike many of its Munro siblings, Mount Keen is a gentle giant. At 3081ft (939m) it is the 48th highest of the group, and it’s also regarded as one of the most straightforward to climb. Some might call it a beginner’s Munro. Not me, though: I think that belittles it somewhat. Let’s compromise and call it a mountain for all.

Long northern approach

There are two main approaches to Mount Keen: from Glen Mark in the south, or the slightly longer way in from Glen Tanar in the north. This is the one I opt for. From the village at Tanar to the foot of the mountain it’s nearly 7 miles. That’s a long walk in; so don’t.

The length of the approach, the quality of the track and its very gradual incline make it ideal for a mountain bike. There’s nothing technical about this track; even an average hybrid bike would cope perfectly well with it. I’m no mountain bike expert, but the day that unfolds for me is a genuine delight; the cycling is simple, easy, even fun.

I’ve brought my own bike up with me; both wheels off and stored inside the car. If you don’t have a suitable bike or don’t want to cart one a long distance there are friendly businesses in the nearby towns of Ballater and Banchory waiting to rent you one.

Two-wheel approach

Glen Tanar is quite a place. A spacious car park near the end of the public road hints at the fact that it sees plenty of visitors. The first half of the journey to Mount Keen passes through the Forest of Glen Tanar, a vast tract of Caledonian pine forest. It’s also a National Nature Reserve, home to the rich wildlife for which this native and now relatively rare habitat is renowned.

A great many of the visitors will be here for the nature reserve and its network of gentle paths and tracks. Many others will be here to ‘bag’ Mount Keen; the Munros are a popular thing to collect. You won’t be the only one using a bike; it’s a popular way to the mountain purely because it’s such a no-brainer.

I put my bike back together with a degree of excitement, but also with a hint of guilt. I’m a walker; is this cheating? Am I cheating on walking? Should I feel grubby? Do I need a Traitor’s cloak? The first few hundred metres soon put paid to these thoughts as I settle into the routine of moving through the countryside at a faster pace than normal.

Over a long distance, through unchanging surroundings (in this case a truly wonderful forest), I don’t feel like I’m missing out on anything. The gradual incline stops me going too fast for one thing. Some other riders come pelting past in way more of a hurry than me, but as the track is wide enough for a Land Rover, there’s plenty of room for me, for them, and for walkers too.

It’s also important to stop and look around. The route follows the glistening serpent that is the Water of Tanar, a broad, shallow, rock-strewn rive, that rushes away from the mountains towards the east coast with a summer holiday eagerness. Alder trees fringe its banks. The great thing about being on a bike is that when you want to pause, you have a ready-made seat to perch upon; this I do, a lot, especially by the river. The peaty-brown waters froth and foam; I’m reminded of looking through the glass door of my washing machine shortly after it has started a particularly dirty wash.

I realise, just before I start on my way again, that no part of me is touching the ground. I’m perched on my saddle, feet on the pedals, shoulder against a tree. There’s no denying it: cycling detaches you both metaphorically and physically from the much more grounded world of the walker. But only a little. It’s a healthy thing to take yourself out of your usual activity; get a new perspective and see the benefits.

Open country

Close to the end of the forest is the Halfway Hut (above). This humble wooden structure is there for the use of walkers and cyclists, particularly those on the pilgrimage to Mount Keen.

I’m also noticing occasional signs declaring that this track is a public right of way ‘to Glen Esk by the Mounth’. Ancient routes like this criss‑cross this mountainous eastern area of Scotland, connecting Aberdeenshire with Angus. Known as Mounth Roads, they were used by cattle drovers, traders and soldiers and facilitated efficient movement over inhospitable terrain.

Mount Keen becomes obvious now; a graceful, conical mountain pushed almost reluctantly into the sky

Today these routes are popular with cyclists. Some of the people I see on the route aren’t heading for Mount Keen but will continue along the Mounth Road as it passes to the west of the mountain, cycling the full length of the road, collecting ancient roads instead of mountain tops. I can see the appeal.

Open country blossoms before me now, as the cover of the forest canopy is left behind. The enlarged scale makes it easier to sense that I am moving through a landscape. The final few miles involve grassy heather-clad hills, while the occasional bridge allows for a moment’s reflection. A house, with only a few trees for neighbours, sits in splendid isolation, with the whole of upper Glen Tanar as its garden.

Mount Keen becomes obvious now; a graceful, conical mountain pushed almost reluctantly into the sky. The track points insistently towards it, doing away with the need for any complicated navigation. Simplicity is good.

At a footbridge, the Water of Tanar bends sharply to the west. It’s here that most people dump their bikes, locking them to the bridge itself. I choose to fasten mine to a nearby tree a little way off the track. As I do so, I ponder how odd it seems, locking up my bike while so deep into the hills. But I do it anyway. At least I can climb the hill in reasonable certainty that it will stay there, safe and sound, even if it didn’t say much for my faith in humanity.

Hike up, fly down

Walking after getting off my bike is a strangely familiar feeling. Different muscles, glad of the work. And the climb begins: never too steep, this path may be the politest I’ve ever walked. I’m startled at one point to be overtaken by a couple cycling up hill. The going is steeper, the track narrower, with stone culverts to be negotiated. I marvel at their fortitude, then swiftly realise they’re on e-bikes.

I manage a good half hour of climbing before I properly turn round. When I do, I wish I had my bike to sit on, because the depth of the view nearly floors me. I can see the path snaking back down to where my bike is, then the river draw my gaze, back almost as far as the edge of the forest. Not being able to see the whole of the way back makes it seem like a huge distance.

Walking after getting off my bike is a strangely familiar feeling. Different muscles, glad of the work.

At this point I become fully converted to this walking/biking lark. And I haven’t even summited my mountain yet. The path splits at just over the 500m contour. Straight on is the easiest way to the summit, but using the bike has bought me time, so I hatch a different plan. I take the right-hand branch, which is the continuation of the Mounth Road. I follow this round the contours to the far side of the mountain, then, when I meet the junction with the path coming up from Glen Mark, I join it. This gives me the chance to explore the upper sections of both sides of the mountain.

Mount Keen being in the Cairngorms, I’m never very far away from the pink hue of granite. The summit is typical of peaks in the area, a nest of granite boulders sitting spraint-like on the highest point. A trig point has been added for good measure.

At the top I feel restless. After a day of movement, it feels strange to come to a dead stop. The views are huge, yet I fel the urge to keep moving into them. So I don’t linger too long at the summit; instead I set off on the path down the northern ridge. And as I walk back into that sprawling vista, I realise I’m really looking forward to getting back on the bike.

Sure enough, once I’ve rescued it from the sticky fingers of absolutely no one, my suspicions about the ride out are almost immediately confirmed. Those six or so miles fly by as I trundle down the gradual incline I’d cycled up. For 20 minutes, I fly. I barely even need to pedal; the slope is just enough to keep me moving. I’ve not felt such a rewarding and fun experience in many a year.

I’m slightly in shock when I get back to the car. A matter of minutes ago I’d been deep in mountain country, now I’m trying to remember where the car keys are. I’ve loved every minute of this journey.

Obviously I’m not a total Traitor. Walking is what I love most, and I’m not about to defect to a world that talks about ‘hardtails’ and ‘berms’. But in this one specific part of the world, a bike can not just facilitate a great walk; it can enhance it.

Why not make it a wild camp?

And one final tip. If the weather plays balls and you don't fancy starting the long journey home straight away, Glen Tanar makes a beautiful spot for a wild camp. This bike-and-hike adventure makes a perfect single-day outing, but if you pack a small tent, a stove and fancy a night outdoors in this beautiful part of Scotland, I can fully recommend it, because that's exactly what I did.

Labelled as a bit faddy in the past, successful runners enjoying a vegan diet were regarded as an exception – with success seen as in spite of rather than because of the way they ate. But today’s evidence tells a different story.

For many, veganism represents one of the healthiest lifestyles around, with an ever-increasing number of top athletes swearing by a whole food plant-based diet. This group includes the likes of Fiona Oakes, who holds the world record for being the fastest woman to run a marathon on all seven continents, and the North Pole. Equally, Vegan Runners is one of the largest and fastest-growing athletics clubs in the UK, whose motto ‘eat plants, run faster’ certainly seems to be working.

So, what makes the vegan diet beneficial for runners? Philip Woodbridge, sports nutritionist and author of Plant-based 4 Running, explains in his book how avoiding meat, animal products and dairy, while increasing consumption of whole plant-based foods, helps to protect against “coronary heart disease, high blood pressure, certain cancers, obesity and type 2 diabetes.”

He explains this is because animal products tend to be high in saturated fats, cholesterol and protein, and low in fibre, antioxidants, phytochemicals and micronutrients.

There are plenty of athletes who praise the vegan diet for optimising recovery and preventing illness. Pro cyclist Christine Vardaros noticed she recovered quicker after a race or workout: “I broke my leg and recovered in three weeks. I was also full of energy and never sick.”

There are plenty of athletes who praise the vegan diet for optimising recovery and preventing illness

In particular, Christine noticed that giving up dairy improved her chronic asthma to such a degree that she no longer requires medication. Fellow triathletes Kate Strong and Dave Sheahan both agree that cutting out dairy is beneficial for respiratory issues. Dave explained that consuming dairy products builds mucus in the body, which aggravates respiratory problems.

In terms of recovery, animal protein, when digested, builds sulphurous amino acids as a by-product. The body must then neutralise those acids, which makes recovery less efficient when compared to consuming plant-based proteins.

Optimising recovery

As for the benefits of a plant-based diet, YouTube star and expert nutritionist Paul Kerton explains: “Eating more nitrate-rich foods such as beetroot and dark leafy greens causes vasodilation of the blood vessels, which improves oxygen flow to the muscles. Animal products cause vasoconstriction, which has the opposite effect.”

Put simply, eating more nitrate-rich vegetables will improve recovery time, allowing athletes to train more often and at a higher intensity. Beetroot burgers and falafels from brands like Gosh, which are completely vegan and free from preservatives, are a good place to start.

Along with eating more vegetables, eating less animal products can also improve recovery. Powerlifter Stephen Coote explains: “Animal products often contain lots of saturated fat, which equates to a high amount of cholesterol. This causes arteries to narrow, which reduces blood flow. Animal products also increase blood viscosity, which restricts blood flow to muscles.”

As a consequence, less oxygen reaches the muscles, which increases recovery time after a workout or run. In comparison, vegetables contain zero cholesterol and 16 times more nutrients than meat, and are 64 times more anti-aging and antioxygen-rich. The anti-inflammatory quality of plant-based foods is essential in aiding recovery. Stephen says: “Meat-based diets are naturally inflammatory due to high levels of proinflammatory blood marker C-reactive protein, which causes systemic inflammation on top of regular muscle soreness.”

Instead of bacon baps or chocolate milk, try incorporating simple foods such as berries, ginger and turmeric into your post-run snack to naturally soothe inflamed muscles. Strength isn’t always built out on the trail – muscles are broken down during exercise and built back up through proper nutrition and rest.

The protein myth

A common misconception surrounding veganism is that vegans are protein deficient because they don’t eat meat. This isn’t true, as Christine Vardaros explains: “There’s animal protein and vegetable protein.” Animal protein has a more complete amino acid profile, containing the nine essential amino acids that the body can’t produce itself and must consume through the diet. Plant proteins are considered incomplete protein as they contain many but not all of the essential amino acids. However, eating a range of vegan proteins allows all of the essential amino acids to be consumed in the diet.

A common misconception surrounding veganism is that vegans are protein deficient because they don’t eat meat. This isn’t true

Christine continues: “Animal protein is harder for the liver to digest, which takes up a lot of energy, producing by-products of urea and ammonia.” Most animal proteins are cooked before being eaten, meaning the protein is denatured by the high heats and is less nutritionally valuable. A vegetable protein, however, is already in its constituent amino acids, which means that the body doesn’t have to use as much energy to break it down.

Stephen Coote mentions a recent study by The American Journal of Clinical Nutrition, which found that both plant-based protein and meat build muscle equally well. However, because plant protein comes with less “baggage” in the form of harmful components, it’s the more beneficial protein source to use.

Debunking the myth that we must eat meat to reach our protein needs, Philip Woodridge believes almost all foods contain protein in varying amounts. The healthiest sources of protein are grains, nuts, seeds, pulses and plant-based products, which can be easily added to your morning porridge, lunchtime soup or dinnertime salad.

Fuelling training

A plant-based diet is rich in unrefined carbohydrate sources such as sweet potatoes and fruits, which keep you energised for longer than more processed options like pastries and bread. A typical day of eating for elite triathlete Kate Strong looks like this: breakfast starts with beetroot juice, hot water and lemon, and a big bowl of muesli with chia seeds for calcium, with linseeds for amino acids.

Lunch while training needs to pack an energy punch, so Kate fuels up with homemade energy balls of dates, apricots and sesame seeds, or rice balls for something more savoury. Dinner is green leafy veg, quinoa and couscous. Kate recommends massaging the spinach and kale before eating to release the nutrients.

Give it a go

While a vegan diet can be indispensable to improving fitness, keeping you in shape and optimising performance, it’s also possible to be an unhealthy vegan. With the amount of “vegan junk food” on the market, it’s easy to fall into the trap of replacing animal products with their equally processed alternatives. Vegan spreads and cheeses will still have a high amount of saturated fat and can be detrimental to athletic performance.

While a vegan diet can be indispensable to improving fitness, it’s also possible to be an unhealthy vegan

Dave Sheahan advises: “For those transitioning, vegan substitute foods are useful, so try swapping out one thing at a time.” You can start by substituting cow’s milk for plant milk. Just make sure that most of your diet consists of plant-based whole foods, as they will improve your running performance and overall health. For lasting health and performance benefits, Dave emphasises the importance of a long-term perspective for fast results in a healthy way, treating veganism as more of a lifestyle choice than another fad diet.

If all of this sounds a little tough to get used to and you’d miss your lunchtime sausage sandwich too much, give “flexitarianism” a go. This is part-time vegetarianism or veganism and is becoming more and more popular. According to a YouGov poll, 1 in 10 UK adults were predicted to participate in Veganuary in 2026. What are you waiting for?

Simple vegan alternatives

STEAK is full of saturated fats and cholesterol. Instead, try seitan, which is made from wheat gluten and provides similar amounts of protein for fewer calories per gram.

EGGS are high in protein but also in cholesterol. For a healthier protein source, try scrambled tofu, which will hold the same consistency for a fraction of the fat and calorie content.

SALMON is high in omega-3, yet the fish are often bred with chemicals and full of cholesterol and fat. Instead, try tempeh, a protein-rich soy product packed with omega-3 ALA. Alternatively, add chia seeds and ground flaxseeds to your cereal.

MILK is full of saturated fat. Instead, try one of the many plant milks available, including cashew milk, oat milk, almond milk and soya milk.

YOGURT is often full of fats and added sugars. Instead, try a soy-based yogurt that is fortified with calcium for lower fat.

ICE CREAM is a treat that’s easily substituted with a sorbet or vegan ice cream, like the vegan Ben & Jerry’s range.

This article was originally published in Trail Running Magazine in 2018. It has been published here with amendments.

About the author

Kate Milsom is a former Digital Content Writer for Live For The Outdoors, within which she specialised in trail running content. In her career as a specialist sports journalist, Kate has worked with industry-leading titles including 220Triathlon, Cycling Plus, Road.cc and Cyclist.

I truly believe that the British coastline is a national treasure, especially for trail runners. I spent ten months running a lap of the UK, covering around 5000 miles of coast paths, so that I could tell you which are the best ones. It was a tough job, but somebody had to do it…

Here are my recommendations for the best places to get some coastal miles in your legs and top up your Vitamin Sea. There’s something for everyone, from wild, technical stretches where you can run all day without seeing another soul, to more sedate routes speckled with civilisation and well serviced by public transport.

1: Dale to Marloes, Pembrokeshire (19km)

Some of my fondest memories of my trip around the coast are from Pembrokeshire. Perhaps it was all the incredible people I ran with, or the fact that it was here where winter became spring and I finally had dry feet for the first time in months. Or maybe it was just because Pembrokeshire is really fantastic. All of the above, I’m sure.

If you’re a wildlife lover, then the adjoined antler shaped Marloes and Dale peninsulas are the place for you, with opportunities to spot seals, seabirds and porpoises. You’ll see great expanses of ocean from numerous angles at all times, making for a change from the normal ‘sea on one side, land on the other’ visual of coastal running. For a special add-on to your trip, visit between May and July and take the ferry over to Skomer island to see the puffins.

2: Eastbourne to Seaford via The Seven Sisters, East Sussex (22.5km)

I’ve run over the Seven Sisters twice, once in blazing sunshine during an August heatwave and once while a storm named Barney raged in mid-November. Both times were pretty majestic (albeit in very different ways) which surely shows that this route is worth a go whatever the weather. The route over these dramatic chalk cliffs isn’t too technical underfoot, but its undulating nature makes for a challenging day out.

If you fancy stepping things up, the infamous Beachy Head Marathon runs every October and takes in this stretch of coast. While you’re in the area, I can also highly recommend staying at Belle Tout for a treat. It’s a disused lighthouse converted into a B&B that sits right atop Beachy Head, with the best breakfast views you’ll find. The Seven Sisters also happens to be one of the best walks near London.

3: Bude to Westward Ho!, Cornwall/North Devon (60km)

Trying to choose just one part of the South West Coast Path, which runs for 630 miles from Dorset around to Somerset, was a bigger challenge than running the thing! If the British coast is a national treasure, this is the jewel in the crown. But I think this section, which takes you over the north Devon/Cornwall border, might be my favourite. It’s rugged and remote and said to be the toughest part of the whole South West Coast Path, but so worth it for the sense of solitude and the unspoiled views that await.

You’ll traverse the Hartland Cornwall Heritage Coast, around Hartland Point and down into the ancient village of Clovelly. Look out for Ronald Duncan’s writing hut which is the perfect place to shelter and eat your sandwiches on a wet or windy day. At 37 miles, this would make for a pretty mega single-day run, but you can break it up over a few days or just choose one part to get a taste of the wilderness.

4: Bamburgh To Craster, Northumberland (21km)

The Northumberland Coast is a designated Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty and I’m confident you could choose any part of it to run and not be disappointed. It’s got all the beauty of other areas, but for the most part is less technical underfoot, making it a great ‘runnable’ option.

This section takes in two castles (Bamburgh at the start, then Dunstanburgh towards the end) and feels steeped in history the entire way. If you plan to extend your run, the Northumberland Coast Path trail pretty much hugs the coast travelling south, but does head inland a little to the north up to Berwick-upon-Tweed. I got ridiculously lost in a swamp here, so I’d really recommend paying close attention to your map! Bamburgh beach is also one of the best beaches for winter walking.

5: Wells-Next-the-Sea To Sheringham, Norfolk (32km)

In my video diary from this day, I told the camera that ‘I could cry at how perfect Norfolk is’ so thought this section deserved a mention. We were in the midst of a hot August full of cloudless days, so I’m sure that helped, but I stand by the Norfolk Coast Path being a great place to run. It’s another AONB full of lovely trails, plenty of places to stop for snacks, and a great birdwatching area, if that’s your cup of tea.

The Norfolk Coast Path is 84 miles in total, and this 20-mile stretch from Wells to Sheringham offers a perfect mixture of marshes teeming with wildlife, idyllic beach stretches and gentle clifftop trails. There’s a handy Coasthopper bus which means you can do an A to B run of any length and easily make it back to where you started.

6: Rhossili Bay, Gower Peninsula (10km)

In Coasting I make the fairly bold claim that Rhossili is one of my favourite beaches in the world, and every return visit I make just reconfirms that opinion. The bay itself consists of three miles of perfect, soft sand but for the most part the coast path takes you over a flat clifftop, with sheep and wild horses roaming everywhere. It gives you all the views with none of the sand in your shoes (which can, undoubtedly, be one of the worst parts of coastal running).

From Worm’s Head car park it’s three miles each way around Rhossili Bay but there are lots of options for extending your run. If you carry on around for an extra mile, you’ll get to Blue Pool, one of my favourite places for a dip, or you can head around Worm’s Head itself (just make sure you check the tides!). And for some mid-run refreshment head to Eddy’s Cafe at Llangennith beach for the best Glamorgan sausages (a traditional Welsh veggie dish made from leeks and cheese).

7: Burghead To Lossiemouth, Moray (14km)

I love Scotland (and not just because you can buy macaroni cheese pies) but it doesn’t have the same network of coast paths all around it as England and Wales, and I ended up doing a lot of road running. But where coast paths do exist they’re absolutely fantastic, and the 50-mile Moray Coastal Trail is a prime example of this.

The section from Burghead to Lossiemouth (often described as ‘the jewel of the Moray Firth’) gives you a sampler of all the best bits of the trail, including a dreamy clifftop track taking you past hidden coves, sea stacks and expanses of clean, golden sand. If you fancy a longer run, you can carry on around to Spey Bay (another nine miles) where there are ample dolphin-spotting opportunities.

8: Swanage To Worth Matravers, Dorset (13km)

I felt like the Jurassic Coast, made up of 95 miles from Dorset into Devon, was my introduction to ‘proper’ coast paths. It’s a rollercoaster of descents and ascents into and out of valleys, with the hundreds of steps being real leg burners. This won’t be a fast one but the views more than make up for it. This stretch from Swanage to Worth Matravers is one of the best, and you can head down to Chapman’s Pool right at the end for a cool-off in the sea.

Don’t miss out on the Square and Compass pub in Worth Matravers (think tankards of local ales, a menu that consists solely of pasties and a resident dog that often sits on the roof). The coastal stretch is about eight miles, but you can loop back to Swanage via inland tracks to round it up to a half marathon.

About the author

Elise Downing was the first woman – and the youngest person – to run the coast of Britain. Her book about her epic adventure, Coasting: Life, Love, and Loose Plans, was published by Summersdale.

For years, the outdoor industry has been telling us that our next adventure begins with our next gadget. We're encouraged to buy a smarter smartwatch to monitor every heartbeat, a more powerful smartphone to navigate every footpath, a camera that captures every second in cinematic quality, or even AI-powered sunglasses capable of answering questions while we walk.

The message is clear: more technology equals a better experience outdoors. But does it?

For many walkers, hikers and weekend adventurers, spending time outside has never been about becoming more connected. Quite the opposite. A day on the trails is one of the few opportunities to leave notifications behind, stop staring at screens and escape the relentless demands of modern digital life. The mountains don't care about your inbox. The woods don't ask for updates. The coastline certainly isn't interested in your social media feed. AI is – thankfully – not part of these wild places. Let’s keep it that way.

In fact, there seems to be a growing movement of people deliberately choosing to disconnect. Rather than documenting every summit for Instagram or consulting AI for every decision, they're embracing a slower, simpler way of experiencing nature. They want to hear birdsong instead of notification pings. They'd rather pause to watch a buzzard circling overhead than worry about filming the perfect Instagram Reel. They're happy to leave the algorithms behind and simply enjoy being present.

Ironically, that doesn't necessarily mean rejecting technology altogether. Some pieces of outdoor kit don't distract from nature - they help you notice it more deeply. A good paper map encourages exploration. A compass builds confidence. And a quality pair of binoculars can transform what you see without demanding your attention every few seconds.

There's something refreshingly honest about binoculars. They don't interrupt your walk with alerts or ask you to create content. They simply allow you to look closer. A distant red deer suddenly comes into sharp focus. A peregrine perched high on a crag becomes more than a tiny silhouette. Wildflowers, butterflies and dragonflies reveal intricate details that would otherwise go unnoticed. Rather than pulling you away from the landscape, binoculars encourage you to become more immersed in it.

It's perhaps no surprise, therefore, that one of the world's most respected optics companies has built its reputation around helping people see more of the natural world.

Founded in California in 1960 by pioneer Tom Johnson, Celestron first earned global recognition through its innovative telescopes, helping generations of amateur astronomers explore the night sky. More than six decades later, the company remains one of the world's leading optics specialists, applying the same engineering expertise to a wide range of binoculars designed for wildlife watching, hiking, travel and outdoor adventure.

While astronomy may have been its first passion, Celestron's outdoor binocular range has become an increasingly popular companion for walkers looking to add another dimension to their days on the hill. Lightweight, waterproof, rugged and built to withstand life outdoors, they're designed to travel easily in a rucksack while revealing details that might otherwise pass unnoticed.

Whether you're crossing open moorland in the Pennines, following a coastal path in Cornwall or taking a break atop a summit in Glen Coe, a pair of binoculars has the remarkable ability to slow you down in all the right ways.

5 reasons hikers should carry binoculars

1. Spot wildlife without disturbing it

From red squirrels and mountain hares to soaring birds of prey, binoculars allow you to observe wildlife from a respectful distance. You'll enjoy far better views while leaving animals undisturbed in their natural habitat.

2. Discover details you've always walked past

A familiar route can suddenly feel new again. Binoculars reveal the intricate patterns of butterflies, the colours of wildflowers, insects among the grasses and distant geological features that are impossible to appreciate with the naked eye.

3. Read the landscape more effectively

Before committing to a route, binoculars can help identify distant paths, cairns, trail markers, valleys, villages and other landmarks. They're a useful navigation aid, helping you assess terrain and plan your onward route with greater confidence.

4. Get more from every outdoor adventure

Whether you're scanning seabirds along a coastal path, visiting a bird hide, watching red deer rut at dawn or enjoying some casual stargazing from a campsite after dark, binoculars add another layer to countless outdoor activities without weighing your pack down.

5. Built for life outdoors

Modern outdoor binoculars are far removed from the heavy models of old. Many, including Celestron's hiking-focused ranges, are waterproof, rugged and compact enough to carry comfortably all day, whatever the weather throws at you.

3 of the best: Celestron’s binoculars for hikers

1. Celestron Outland X 8x42mm Roof Binoculars – £99.99

The Outland X series is designed to meet the needs of every outdoor enthusiast, from birders to hikers. The rubberised coating allows for fantastic grip, and all models are waterproof. All optical elements are glass and are multi-coated for truer colour.

Twist up eyecups allow for adjustment for eyeglass wearers and you also get an easy-to-use large single focus wheel. Dioptre adjustment allows for differences in sight in each eye – a great feature for many users. With these binoculars, you can focus on objects from as little as 4 meters away. Case and neck strap included.

Find out more here.

2. Celestron Nature DX ED 8x42mm Roof Binoculars – £199.99

The Nature DX ED series offers unbelievable performance as a mid-range option. In addition to the specifications of the Outland X series, they include extra-low dispersion optical glass, a feature usually found at higher price points. In simple terms, ED glass produces outstanding true-to-life colour.

All glass surfaces are fully multi-coated, and the prisms are phase coated for excellent contrast. With these binoculars, you can focus on objects from as little as two meters away. For added value, a case and neck strap are also included.

Click here to find out why it might be the one for you.

3. Celestron TrailSeeker ED 8x42mm Roof Binoculars – £369.99

The Trailseeker ED series builds on the specification of the Nature DX ED and is the pinnacle of the Celestron binocular range. All glass optics are fully multi-coated, plus the prisms are treated with phase and dielectric coatings for the brightest image. The body of the binocular gets an upgrade to magnesium alloy construction for maximum durability. Alongside a standard neck strap, a harness is included for additional comfort.

Discover more here.

Snowdon – or Yr Wyddfa – is often treated as a single summit tick for hikers. But look closer at this masterpiece of a mountain and you’ll find something far more compelling: a labyrinth of ridges.

Some are friendly and suitable for all ages. Some are wild and exciting enough to set your pulse racing. And some are so steep-sided and exposed that they demand skill, experience, composure and confidence in equal measure.

This three-day weekend links the best of them – building from a quiet ridge warm-up to one of the most famous mountain scrambles in the UK. It’s a progression through the levels of Snowdon’s ridges, not just a simple peak-bag. This is your chance to experience Yr Wyddfa properly – not by its busiest path, but along its most characterful lines.

Three days. Three ridges. One magnificent mountain, which also happens to be the highest point in both Wales and England.

Before you go

This route covers serious mountain terrain, so make sure you come with suitable clothing and kit, plus the skills to use it when needed.

Day 1 is a long route with short stretches of exposed ridge walking.

Day 2 involves sustained scrambling on a quiet route where you'll need good route-finding skills on rock.

Day 3 (Crib Goch) is a long and epic Grade 1 scramble with significant exposure.

These routes are unsuitable in high winds, heavy rain or winter conditions without appropriate skills and equipment. Escape options are limited once committed to the ridges; good footwear and mountain experience are essential; and you need to choose your weather window carefully.

Day 1: South Ridge via Bwlch Main

A quieter way to begin your three days on Snowdon, the South Ridge is often overlooked and that’s exactly why it works so well as the opening act to this weekend.

There’s space to settle into the mountain here as the terrain sharpens gradually, the views expand with height, and the exposure builds just enough to prepare you for what’s coming over the next two days. This route is the perfect confidence builder.

Difficulty: Medium

Distance: 12km

Time: 7-8 hours

Total ascent: 950 metres

Scrambling: Small section of Grade 1 scrambling. The hardest part can be avoided.

Fitness: It’s a hard day with constant ascent over a long period.

Terrain: Mostly on well-made and obvious paths and tracks. The ridge section is pretty exposed at Bwlch Main and not to be underestimated.

Navigation: Is straightforward, though you need to be awake near any quarry workings.

1. The gate is at the far left end of the car park. Cross the tracks and follow the path for a few kilometres, passing a quarry hole on your right and a barn on your left. Pass the gate for the Rhyd Ddu path and keep walking east on a massive path, aiming for Yr Aran. You do need to take care around the quarry workings as there are some quite serious holes. A stile appears to the right of a slate tip. Ignore it and follow the faint track left, up the slope, through a ruined structure. A long walkway then curves left and appears to go uphill steeply. Ignore this and turn right to cross the grass. This leads you to the wall at Bwlch Cwm Llan.

2. The wall bounds the descent into Cwm Llan. Turn left and start uphill towards Allt Maenderyn. This is where the route changes pace. It gets steeper and a little more hands-on in places, up a slate path, which is slippery when wet. After crossing a fence, you’re faced with a slanting, smooth slab. You can go up it directly, keeping to the corner, though it will be slippery and potentially dangerous in the wet. There are easier 'steps' to the left. This is the same red rock as found on Crib Goch. This small section is probably the most technically difficult part of the route. It’s not exposed and is over quickly. The route soon returns to walking. You’re essentially walking in a straight line northward, all the way to the summit of Snowdon – the right-hand side has steep drops.

3. The ridge becomes narrow and steep as you cross Bwlch Main. Keeping to the crest can be pretty hairy if you’re not used to it. It is also grassy, which can be lethal when wet and really isn’t the place to take a slide. If you aren’t keen on the exposure, a path runs below and to the left of the first section. This is the one you’ll take on the return. It then crosses to the right and weaves through rocky ground along the ridge in dramatic fashion. There is no scrambling as technical as the earlier slab section, but it can be scary, particularly for beginners. The ridge opens to wider and less drastic terrain. It is a little loose in places. Pass the marker stone for the Watkin Path to the summit.

4. Return south from the summit. The area immediately after leaving the steps near the cafe entrance is a bit awkward and loose. Retrace your steps back across Bwlch Main. As you cross the ridge, keep your eyes out for the path that splits off to the right, below a large lump.

5. This is the path that takes you down to Llechog and the Rhyd Ddu Path. The path curves downhill and is protected by a row of fence posts, which probably had a fence connecting them at one point. Cross a wall via a gate at the end of Llechog and the route starts to descend through a cairn field, which then leads you to a gate.

6. The terrain changes after the gate and becomes more open. The path briefly becomes a bit of a broken track which is tricky to remain on as it descends through some muddy and rocky steps. It does soon become a constructed and dry path again, crossing through a gate then a second, which leads you back onto the main path you started the day on. A signpost should tell you to turn right back to Rhyd Ddu. Enter cruise mode and enjoy the views.

Day 2: Y Gribyn and Y Lliwedd

If Day 1 was about easing into the mountain, Day 2 turns up the drama. Y Gribyn is narrower, rougher and far less forgiving than the South Ridge, so the line of the ridge feels wilder and more committing.

By the time you reach Y Lliwedd, you’ll have done some proper scrambling through some of the most spectacular terrain on the Snowdon range. This is where the weekend shifts from exciting ridge walking to something that demands real focus.

Difficulty: Hard

Distance: 11km

Time: 6 hours

Total ascent: 1000m

Scrambling: Grade 1

Fitness: Tough. There is a sustained amount of scrambling and good amount of height gain.

Terrain: The route passes through some very steep and consequential terrain. It would be difficult to turn round in certain parts of the first scramble. Not for inexperienced or unconfident scramblers.

Navigation: Nav is reasonably straightforward around the scrambling and the actual route-finding through the scrambling is moderate.

1. To gain the start of Y Gribyn, follow the Miners’ Path around Llyn Llydaw, past the old mill and up the first steep section, where a waterfall and the base of the spur come into sight. A faint track from an old tramline cuts off the main path just as it levels out at the bend. Contour to the base of the waterfall. Cross the stream here and sniff out the scrambling up to the next level, where the spur changes direction. If you miss the cheeky turn-off, just continue to the Glaslyn outflow and join from there by crossing the river. Both river crossings could be difficult after heavy rain.

2. The spur starts off reasonably chilled but then the ground drops away on both sides very sharply and you need to switch on. The scrambling isn’t technically very demanding apart from one or two places where you really have to think about where you move and be very conscious of the terrain below you. I can’t overstate the consequences of a fall. It’s Crib Goch serious.

3. About a third of the way up, there is a shallow gully to cross to the left. I have a vivid recollection of doing this when I first started walking in the mountains and thinking it was death on a stick! It was less dramatic this time but still a section to be wary of. There are a few more tricky moves higher up. A good mindset is to keep as central to the spur as possible. Avoid getting pulled too far to the sides and the steep ground. Before you know it, you’ll find yourself at the top, elated. Enjoy the views!

4. The section from the top to Bwlch Ciliau is straightforward and enjoyable. Either temporarily join the Watkin Path or hug the cliff-top to make it more interesting. There is a bit of a track that weaves over the rocky ground. It is incredibly steep on the left-hand side so move with care.

5. You can take the same attitude from Bwlch Ciliau to the summit of Y Lliwedd. There is a scrambly path about 10–20 metres from the left-hand edge, which will take you up to the summit. This is the stress-free option if you found Y Gribyn tough. You can increase the scrambling and the adventure by keeping closer to the left edge. As with the rest of the route, it is very steep and consequential. You do not want to fall down that steep ground. Take your time, move slowly and test for loose rock, keeping a couple of metres away from the drop.

6. Once you reach the steep and dramatic summit of Y Lliwedd, the scrambling is pretty much done for the day, though that steep left-hand drop gets even bigger. Keep to the path on the right or nearer the ridgeline, depending on your constitution. Continue over the summit to Lliwedd Bach and the descent point. As the ground levels out, the path leads off the side of the mountain, descending to Llyn Llydaw.

7. You can see that the ground below the descent is safe. If you reach a small pool of water, you have probably gone too far. If you are unsure if it’s the descent, it probably isn’t. It should be obvious and in a NE direction. There are a few more awkward scrambly steps before you reach a solid path which leads to the Llyn and the Miners’ Path.

Day 3: Crib Goch

And then there’s Crib Goch. Arguably the most famous mountain ridge in Britain, it’s the adventurous line up Yr Wyddfa that everyone talks about. And for good reason.

Narrow, dramatic and unapologetically exposed, this is a Grade 1 mountain scramble and most definitely not just a hillwalk. Tackling the crest of the ridge is a test of skill and composure while faced with extreme exposure, and should really only be reserved for experienced scramblers with a lot of confidence on this kind of terrain.

By saving it for Day 3, you arrive warmed up with legs tuned to the ascent, head steady after a day on the South Ridge and hopefully more of an idea of what Yr Wyddfa’s terrain has in store for you. This is the headline act, so hope for good weather so you can fully enjoy the challenge.

Difficulty: Hard

Distance: 11.5km

Time: 6-8 hours

Total ascent: 950 metres

Scrambling: Grade 1

Fitness: Hard. Big mountain day, where you’re likely to burn nervous energy too.

Terrain: Very exposed arête, as well as the usual mountain trails.

Navigation: Straightforward, though good route finding on rock is required.

1. From Pen-y-Pass, take the right-hand path up the Pyg Track until you get to Bwlch y Moch, which is denoted by a short section of wall and a double stile. The wall has been rebuilt to make accidental ascents of Crib Goch a little harder and is made into something of a doorway to the Crib Goch track, which climbs westward and is marked by the ‘Crib Goch’ stone. Pick your way uphill, crossing a stile and a few short scrambly sections until you reach the foot of the East Ridge at grid reference SH628552.

2. The foot of the ridge is marked by a cairn and a rising scree path along its base. Walk up the scree until you reach the rock and scramble initially leftward, then take a more direct line upward, following the easiest terrain. Straying too far left leads to steep ground. A ledge with a wide groove/hollow in the face is either passed via a steep corner to the right or a more steppy section to its left. Either way, the route should be well polished. The top section of the East Ridge morphs into a series of angled, slabby steps. Keep to the centre of the ridge as much as possible, passing an obvious slab which can be treacherous when wet. You will soon reach the main traverse at grid reference SH625552.

3. Crossing the arête for the first time is a memorable experience. Avoid walking directly along the crest by keeping slightly left and using your hands for extra security. In summer and on weekends, it can get especially busy. Apart from the dizzying exposure, the main section of ridge is quite straightforward until you reach the three pinnacles. The first two can be taken directly, with some exposed scrambling, or avoided altogether on the left. The last one is best taken head-on. Immediately after a notch, scramble out via a rising, right-trending platform before exiting onto a comfortingly large slab. This is one of the most serious sections of the route. From here, a short section of tricky down-climbing leads to a rest at Bwlch Coch.

4. From Bwlch Coch, continue along the path, where a short section of blocky scrambling leads to some more ridge walking. You can tackle the initial section head-on as you meet it or by a weakness on the left. The scrambling is not sustained. You can then follow a path slightly below the expansive ridge, on its right, or scramble a direct line across the ridge on some delicate, jagged rock. Beware the deceiving false summit on the approach to the summit of Garnedd Ugain. From a crumbling trig point, descend SW to join the Llanberis Path to the summit of Snowdon, passing the finger stone which marks the descent.

5. From the summit of Yr Wyddfa, return the way you came, back to the finger stone, and turn right, descending towards Llyn Llydaw. The route back is rather straightforward from here, with the option of sticking on the Pyg Track back to Bwlch y Moch or heading down to Glaslyn and taking the flatter option on the Miners’ Track. The split is marked by a second finger stone.

Planning your weekend

Where to base yourself

Llanberis and Nant Peris both make practical bases for a long weekend around the Snowdon range, with access to multiple approaches and accommodation options. Pen-y-Pass is convenient but parking is limited and must be booked in advance.

Transport

The Sherpa bus network links key route starting and finishing points, making point-to-point days easier if you don’t want to loop back to your start.

Timing

Aim for stable, low-wind forecasts. These ridges are dramatically different in calm conditions versus gusty ones. You’ll also feel more comfortable on the rocky terrain if it’s dry, but that’s not easy to guarantee in North Wales.

When to go

Late spring and early autumn often provide the best balance of daylight, weather stability and fewer crowds. High summer brings heavy footfall, especially on Crib Goch.

About the author

Jamie Rooke is an experienced Mountain Leader based in North Wales who's been writing articles and route guides for Trail magazine and LFTO for years. Jamie's also one of our go-to experts for navigation tips and advice.

Ask 10 keen hikers to name the best trail in Europe and you’ll get 10 different answers, and probably a small argument about whether Türkiye counts (it does in our book, as it gave us valid justification to include the epic Lycian Way).

But that’s the trouble with a continent this varied: within a few hours’ flight of any UK airport you can be traversing a sub-Arctic plateau, an Alpine ridge, a Mediterranean gorge, or walking a pilgrim’s road that’s been walked for over a thousand years.

This list doesn’t pretend to be definitive – any such claim would be nonsense – but every trail here has been walked, researched, or is firmly on the to-do list of the Live for the Outdoors teams. Scenery and views come first in the selection, but so do solitude, satisfaction and the simple pleasure of well-earned refreshment at the end of a long day.

Within a few hours’ flight of any UK airport you can be traversing a sub-Arctic plateau, an Alpine ridge, a Mediterranean gorge, or walking a pilgrim’s road.

We’ve deliberately mixed things up: short, sharp day hikes sit alongside multi-week epics, so whether you’ve got a weekend or a month to spare, there’s something here. Difficulty varies wildly too, from boardwalk strolls to routes that demand serious mountain experience. We’ve flagged which is which as we go.

So here are 20 of the best hikes Europe has to offer, in no particular order except loosely north to south. Pack accordingly.

1. Laugavegur Trail, Iceland

Distance: 55km (34 miles)
Duration: 3-4 days
Start point: Landmannalaugar
End point: Þórsmörk

Iceland’s unique landscapes are world-renowned, but even so, few of the country’s trails cram as much geological variety into so few days. The Laugavegur takes walkers from rhyolite mountains striped orange and green, through geothermal fields that hiss and steam underfoot, black volcanic deserts and glacial rivers, before dropping into the birch-lined valley of Þórsmörk.

Most hikers walk south from Landmannalaugar, since the route loses more height that way, though plenty do it in reverse too. A network of huts (book well ahead) and designated campsites means you’re rarely far from shelter. The walking itself isn’t technically difficult – good paths, moderate ascents – which is precisely why the weather catches people out. Iceland’s mountains generate their own conditions, and a bright morning can turn to horizontal sleet within the hour, so reliable waterproofs aren’t optional extras here, they’re essential.

2. Trolltunga, Norway

Distance: 27km (17 miles)
Duration: 10-12 hours
Start and end point: Skjeggedal

That iconic photograph – the flat tongue of rock jutting 700 metres above Lake Ringedalsvatnet, one tiny hiker balanced on the end – has done more for Norwegian tourism than anything else. What it doesn’t show is the effort involved: an out-and-back day of 27km with 800m of ascent, most of it front-loaded into a brutal first kilometre of steps.

It’s graded “very demanding” locally, less for technical difficulty than for sheer duration – allow a full 10 to 12 hours and start very early if you want any hope of a queue-free photo. The trail is well marked and doesn’t require ropes or scrambling, but this is proper mountain terrain: wet and exposed in equal measure, and the weather in the Hardanger region is famously changeable.

3. Besseggen Ridge, Norway

Distance: 14km (9 miles)
Duration: 6-8 hours
Start and end point: Gjendesheim or Memurubu, Jotunheimen

Routinely described as Norway’s best ridge walk, Besseggen is spectacular in every sense. The route threads between two lakes of wildly different colour: the milky turquoise Bessvatnet on one side, the deep glacial green of Gjende on the other, with barely a rock’s width separating them at the narrowest point. A short scramble near the top is the only real technical demand, and most people combine the hike with the ferry across Lake Gjende to make a one-way route between Gjendesheim and Memurubu.

It’s a full day rather than a stroll – reckon on 6 to 8 hours – but the path is well trodden and doesn’t require mountaineering experience, just decent fitness, sturdy boots and a head for exposed ground.

4. Kungsleden (Abisko–Nikkaluokta), Sweden

Distance: 107km (67 miles)
Duration: 5-7 days
Start point: Abisko
End point: Nikkaluokta

The full Kungsleden runs 450km from Abisko to Hemavan, but it’s the northern stretch to Nikkaluokta that draws most walkers, and for good reason. Five to seven days takes you from the birch forests of Abisko National Park up over the 1,150m Tjäktja Pass – the trail’s high point – and down past Kebnekaise, Sweden’s tallest mountain, before a final valley walk to the road at Nikkaluokta.

Staffed mountain huts spaced a day’s walk apart split up the route nicely, and the path itself is gentle by Scandinavian standards: boardwalks over the boggy sections, well-graded climbs, few technical surprises. The real challenge is the Arctic weather and the sheer scale of the wilderness – this is reindeer-herding country, and you won’t get wi-fi for days. For most people, that’s entirely the point.

5. Cape Wrath Trail, Scotland

Distance: 370km (230 miles)
Duration: 10-21 days
Start point: Fort William
End point: Cape Wrath

If you think of the West Highland Way as Scotland’s best introduction to backpacking, the Cape Wrath Trail is the other end of the spectrum – difficult and demanding but also beautiful. There’s no official waymarked path – route-finding across bog, river and pathless moor is part of the deal – and resupply points are few and far between, so most walkers carry a few days’ food at a time and wild camp most nights.

What you get in return is genuine solitude through some of the remotest country left in the UK, from Knoydart’s rough peninsulas to the empty quarters of Sutherland, ending at a lighthouse perched on mainland Britain’s most north-westerly point. This is widely considered the hardest single long-distance trail in the UK, and it’s not for beginners. Navigation skills, river-crossing know-how and a tolerance for midges are all prerequisites.

6. Wainwright’s Coast to Coast, UK

Distance: 293km (182 miles)
Duration: 12-14 days
Start point: St Bees Head, Cumbria
End point: Robin Hood’s Bay, North Yorkshire

Devised by the great fellwalker Alfred Wainwright in 1973, this crossing of northern England finally earned official National Trail status in March 2026, more than fifty years after he first put pen to paper. It’s hard to fathom why it took so long for the Coast to Coast to get official recognition: you get three national parks in one route, from the rocky fells of the Lake District through the limestone dales of Yorkshire to the heather moors above Robin Hood’s Bay.

Tradition dictates you dip your boots in the sea at St Bees and again in the North Sea at the finish, by which time you’ll have crossed a great swathe of northern England. Difficulty is moderate rather than severe, but the distance and the number of consecutive days demand proper planning, especially over Lakeland’s steeper early stages.

7. Cambrian Way, Wales

Distance: 480km (298 miles)
Duration: 19-21 days
Start point: Cardiff Castle, Cardiff
End point: Conwy Castle, Conwy

Billed as the mountain connoisseur’s route through Wales, the Cambrian Way links two castles via almost every significant upland range the country has to offer: the Brecon Beacons, the Cambrian Mountains and most of the major mountain massifs in Eryri, including Snowdon itself. It stitches together high ground rather than skirting it, which makes for a route with a serious amount of ascent packed into three weeks.

Although now waymarked end-to-end, some sections cross genuinely remote and pathless terrain, so this sits toward the harder end of UK long-distance trails – navigation and hillwalking experience matter here. The reward is a route that captures Wales at its wildest, rarely dropping into valleys for long before climbing straight back into the clouds.

8. South West Coast Path, England

Distance: 1,014km (630 miles)
Duration: 6-8 weeks (full); 2-7 days (sections)
Start point: Minehead, Somerset
End point: Poole Harbour, Dorset

This much-celebrated National Trail follows every headland, cove and cliff edge from Somerset round to Dorset, and the cumulative ascent over its full length exceeds Everest several times over. Only the most committed walkers attempt the whole thing in one go; most pick a section, and the coastline obliges with everything from the wild cliffs of North Cornwall to the fossil-rich Jurassic Coast.

Terrain and difficulty vary enormously by stretch, from gentle strolls to relentless up-and-down “coast path miles” that take far longer than a look at the map might suggest. Good footwear and realistic daily targets matter as much as raw fitness on the South West Coast Path.

9. Alta Via 1 (Dolomites), Italy

Distance: 120km (75 miles)
Duration: 8-10 days
Start point: Lago di Braies
End point: Belluno

The most accessible of the Dolomites’ ten Alte Vie trails, Alta Via 1 starts at the near-impossibly turquoise Lago di Braies and threads south through limestone towers, high passes and hut-to-hut alpine landscapes to Belluno. Unlike some of its sister routes, it avoids via ferrata sections, so no specialist climbing gear is needed. Just a head for the odd exposed stretch and reasonable fitness for consecutive days above 2,000m.

The trail passes beneath some of the range’s biggest names, including Tofana, Civetta and Pelmo, with a well-spaced network of rifugios serving hearty food each evening. It’s graded as moderate for the Alps: no technical climbing, but long days and real elevation gain add up over more than a week.

10. GR20 (Corsica), France

Distance: 180km (112 miles)
Duration: 10-16 days
Start point: Calenzana
End point: Conca

Regularly ranked among Europe’s toughest long-distance trails, the GR20 runs the length of Corsica’s mountainous spine, crossing granite ridgelines and sections requiring hands-on scrambling. The northern half, from Calenzana, is generally considered harder than the gentler southern stretch down to Conca, and many walkers split the route accordingly if short on time.

Refuges and campsites are spaced along the way, though beds fill fast in peak season. This is not a trail for a first long-distance hike: good fitness, sure-footedness and comfort with exposure are all required, but the reward is Mediterranean mountain scenery – granite, maquis scrub and sea views – found almost nowhere else in Europe.

11. Tour du Mont Blanc, France/Italy/Switzerland

Distance: 170km (106 miles)
Duration: 7-12 days
Start and end point: Les Houches, Chamonix

The classic circuit of the Alps’ highest peak crosses three countries in a loop that never strays far from Mont Blanc’s glaciated flanks, taking in high passes, alpine meadows and the odd cowbell-punctuated silence. It’s a trail runners’ route too – the UTMB race follows much the same line in considerably less time – but walked at a normal pace over a week or more, it’s one of the more approachable multi-day routes in the high Alps.

Waymarking is excellent, huts and gîtes are plentiful (book ahead in summer), and while there’s serious daily ascent and descent, none of it demands technical skill. Weather and altitude are the main considerations; the walking itself is graded moderate throughout.

12. Camino de Santiago (Francés), Spain

Distance: 780km (485 miles)
Duration: 28-35 days
Start point: Saint-Jean-Pied-de-Port, France
End point: Santiago de Compostela

The best-known of the many Camino routes crosses the Pyrenees from France before threading west across northern Spain – taking in the wine country of La Rioja, the flat expanse of the meseta, and the green hills of Galicia – to the pilgrim city of Santiago. It’s walked for every reason imaginable: faith, fitness, heartbreak, curiosity, or simply the appeal of a month with nothing to do but walk day after day.

Physically it’s forgiving by long-distance standards: well waymarked, gentle gradients for the most part, and an entire hospitality infrastructure of albergues built around exactly this journey. The one real obstacle is crowds in peak season, particularly on the popular final 100km from Sarria, which is the minimum distance required to earn a Compostela certificate.

13. Rota Vicentina (Fishermen’s Trail), Portugal

Distance: 226km (140 miles)
Duration: 11-13 days
Start point: Porto Covo
End point: Odeceixe

This is Atlantic coastal walking at its best: clifftop paths hugging the wild western edge of Portugal’s Alentejo and Algarve coasts, with storks nesting on sea stacks and empty beaches appearing round almost every headland. The classic Fishermen’s Trail from Porto Covo to Odeceixe – part of the wider Rota Vicentina network, which also includes an inland Historical Way – can be walked in four to five days, though the extended route continuing south adds another week and more spectacular cliff scenery.

Difficulty is generally easy to moderate: no major climbs, but plenty of soft sand underfoot in places, which slows progress and tires legs in a different way to hills. Shade is virtually non-existent, so early starts and sensible sun protection are vital.

14. Caminito del Rey, Spain

Distance: 8km (5 miles)
Duration: Half day
Start point: Ardales
End point: El Chorro

A boardwalk clinging to the cliffs of the Gaitanes Gorge near Málaga, up to 100m above the Guadalhorce River at its most dramatic – once condemned as the world’s most dangerous path after a string of fatal accidents, and closed for over a decade before its 2015 restoration.

It’s now one of the most popular short walks in Spain, and deservedly so: sheer limestone walls, a swaying suspension bridge and views straight down to turquoise water below, all achieved on flat, well-maintained boardwalks with sturdy handrails throughout. Physically it’s easy – anyone reasonably fit can manage it – though the exposure will test anyone uneasy with heights, and the one-way route means factoring in the shuttle bus back to your car.

15. Haute Randonnée Pyrénéenne (HRP), France/Andorra/Spain

Distance: 800km (500 miles)
Duration: 45-50 days
Start point: Hendaye
End point: Banyuls-sur-Mer

Where the GR10 and GR11 keep mostly to valleys on the French and Spanish sides respectively, the HRP takes the high road – literally – following the Pyrenean watershed as closely as the terrain allows, crossing the border repeatedly and passing through Andorra along the way. It’s largely unmarked, often requires off-trail navigation, and demands a level of self-sufficiency and mountain experience well beyond the GR routes it parallels.

In return you get genuine wilderness: passes above 2,500m, unstaffed refuges, and days without seeing another soul in the central massif. Most walk west to east, from the Atlantic surf at Hendaye to the Mediterranean vineyards of Banyuls-sur-Mer, over six to seven weeks. This is strictly for experienced, self-reliant mountain walkers.

16. Hardergrat, Switzerland

Distance: 24km (15 miles)
Duration: 6-10 hours
Start point: Interlaken
End point: Brienzer Rothorn Station

There aren’t many ridgelines in the Alps you can walk in a single (very long) day, and fewer still with views this good: Hardergrat runs high above Interlaken with the glaciated Jungfrau massif on one side and turquoise Lake Brienz on the other, all the way to the Brienzer Rothorn.

Long stretches are narrow and exposed, with a 1,500m drop in places and one unprotected scramble near the steepest section. Some fixed cables help on the trickiest ground, but this is firmly a route for experienced, sure-footed hikers with a head for heights, best avoided entirely in wet conditions when the rock turns treacherously slick.

17. Via Francigena (Lucca to Rome), Italy

Distance: 410km (255 miles)
Duration: 18-24 days
Start point: Lucca
End point: Rome

Long before the Camino de Santiago became a hiking rite of passage, medieval pilgrims were walking the Via Francigena to Rome, and this southern stretch from Lucca captures the route at its most rewarding. The path winds through cypress-lined Tuscan hill towns and the UNESCO-listed landscapes of the Val d’Orcia before descending into Lazio and finally the outskirts of Rome itself, with St Peter’s as the ultimate reward.

Waymarking and pilgrim accommodation (many convents and guesthouses offer beds) have improved significantly in recent years, making this an increasingly manageable multi-week walk. Terrain is gentle to moderate throughout – rolling countryside rather than mountains – though the cumulative distance and summer heat are the real tests of endurance.

18. Mount Olympus from Litochoro, Greece

Distance: 60km (37 miles)
Duration: 4 days
Start and end point: Litochoro

Home to the gods, according to the ancients, and it’s easy to understand why: the highest peak in Greece rises abruptly from near sea level to over 2,900m, cloaked in beech and black pine forest at lower altitudes before giving way to bare limestone crags near the summit.

The standard route from Litochoro climbs through Enipeas Gorge to mountain refuges at altitude, with the final push to Mytikas peak involving genuine scrambling on exposed rock – enough that a head for heights and some hands-on-rock confidence are essential, even though no technical climbing gear is required. Lower down, the walking is straightforward and well-marked; it’s only the final approach that shifts this from moderate to properly serious.

19. Lycian Way, Türkiye

Distance: 540km (336 miles)
Duration: Around 30 days
Start point: Ölüdeniz
End point: Geyikbayırı

One of the great coastal long walks of the Mediterranean, the Lycian Way follows ancient Roman and Byzantine paths along Türkiye’s turquoise coast, past clifftop ruins, hidden coves and sarcophagi scattered incongruously among olive groves. The full route from Ölüdeniz to Geyikbayırı takes around a month, though the path suits shorter sections just as well, with regular villages offering food and accommodation along the way.

Waymarking is decent by international standards, if occasionally patchy in remoter stretches, and the terrain ranges from easy coastal strolls to steep, rocky climbs that demand proper boots and serious stamina. Summer heat is the main hazard rather than technical difficulty – spring and autumn are far kinder seasons to attempt it.

20. Peaks of the Balkans, Kosovo/Albania/Montenegro

Distance: 192km (119 miles)
Duration: 10-12 days
Start and end point: Theth, Albania

A circular route through the so-called Accursed Mountains, linking remote villages across three countries that spent decades cut off from casual visitors and still feel wonderfully undiscovered as a result. From Theth, the trail crosses into Kosovo’s Rugova valley and Montenegro’s high pastures before looping back through the Valbona valley, requiring cross-border permits, but offering homestay hospitality and mountain scenery that rivals anywhere in the Alps at a fraction of the crowds.

Difficulty is moderate rather than technical – no climbing skills required – but daily distances and altitude add up over the full circuit, and logistics require more planning than most European trails. For a genuinely wild, still-quiet corner of the continent, this is hard to beat.

About the author

Matt Jones is a freelance journalist based in the heart of Eryri National Park (Snowdonia). He’s a prolific long-distance walker who's hiked all over the world, a vastly experienced gear tester and self-confessed outdoor kit geek. Matt’s been one of our main gear testers for the last couple of years and is the first person we call with any complicated kit queries that need in-depth and forensic analysis. He was previously editor of Walk and Scouting magazines.

What do you picture when you think about going wild camping? If you’re anything like me, it’s a dreamy mountain sunset, maybe a sip of something strong from a hip flask before crawling into bed… and a whole lot of hassle.

I’ve got a wild camping kit list saved on my phone that grows longer every time I come back from an overnighter and remember something I wish I’d taken.

Tent, sleeping bag, headtorch, stove, sleeping mat, warm layers, first aid kit, food, extra water for cooking, hat, gloves, portable charger, book, inflatable pillow, sleeping bag liner, bug spray, multitool, bowl, mug, cutlery, seat… the list can go on forever if you’re not careful.

Then there’s the cooking. Cleaning up afterwards. Sorting breakfast. Keeping one eye on the weather in case you need to pack up quickly and abort. Not to mention the long walk to and from whatever remote patch of hillside you’ve decided to call home for the night. It’s enough to make plenty of people sack it off and book a hotel instead.

I love wild camping, and I’ve never had a big issue with embracing the chaos. But I’m also a big fan of keeping things simple when possible. And since it’s high summer and the weather has been very kind to us recently, I decided to see just how simple we could make a wild camping trip.

The kind of night out I’ve only really dreamt of before

The kind of night out I’ve only really dreamt of before – one where I carry a light pack, spend as little time as possible setting up, don’t have to cook meals or clean pots, and can just quietly watch the sun sink behind the mountains before a peaceful night somewhere wild and quiet.

And the craziest thing is, we actually made it happen. Much more easily than we expected. Here’s how…

Location, location, location

These were the requirements when choosing our wild camp spot:

• Somewhere that stuck to the wild camping code of being high on open hills, away from main tracks, houses or farms

• Good, grassy ground for pitching tents

• Less than a two-hour walk to reach

• Big mountain views

• Crucially, near somewhere we could buy our evening meal and breakfast, so we didn’t have to carry them

The answer arrived fairly easily. I climbed Wansfell Pike in the southern Lake District a couple of winters ago during the Keswick Mountain Festival, emerging out of the mist onto its long, knobbly summit to one of the best cloud inversions I’ve ever seen.

It’s a wonderful little hill, just 482m high, and doesn’t get anywhere near as much attention as it deserves. The views down the length of Lake Windermere are seriously special, but it’s the window it gives you into the southern and western Lakeland fells that really took me by surprise.

There’s a lot on display from the top of Wansfell – and you almost feel like you can reach out and touch the Langdale Pikes. Even better for the purposes of this trip, it’s just a short walk uphill from Ambleside. Around 2.5km in distance and about 1.5 hours from town centre to summit.

Ambleside is a brilliant place to kick off a trip like this too. Plenty of parking. Plenty of places to buy supplies. Good pubs (if you fancy a swift half to settle the nerves before your ascent). And a solid choice of chippies.

Fish and chips were always high on our evening agenda, so we grabbed a couple of takeaway portions and ate them in the sun in Rothay Park while golden light bathed Wansfell Pike behind us.

Short, sharp, spectacular ascent

I won’t lie – the first half an hour of walking wasn’t the easiest with a stomach full of fish and chips. But this is a fairly short and simple ascent, without too much long, steep stuff

We quickly left behind the tourist-packed beer gardens, swapping them for the sounds and smells of summer as we followed the track towards Stockghyll Force.

It was the height of summer, bracken lining the path and birdsong filling the air

Ignoring the signposts for the popular beauty spots, we turned right over a stile for the fairly short but sharp climb to Wansfell Pike, passing beneath hawthorn, cedar and ash trees.

It was the height of summer, bracken lining the path and birdsong filling the air, but the fell was blissfully quiet. We met four or five runners pounding their local trails after work, but no walkers.

It was pure bliss.

Special summit

The summit of Wansfell Pike is a brilliant spot. Rocky and impressive, with a rolling ridge behind it heading towards nearby Red Screes and Kirkstone Pass.

To the north and west, the mountains line up like a rogue’s gallery of Lakeland icons – Fairfield, the Langdale Pikes, Bow Fell, Crinkle Crags and the Coniston Fells, with the Scafells just visible beyond.

The star of the show, though, is Lake Windermere, tapering away to the south, dotted with islands and lined by trees. We watched dozens of boats silently cutting through the water late into the night, with the lights of Ambleside twinkling beneath us as darkness crept across the fells.

We found a couple of flat(ish) grassy spots just south of the summit to pitch our two tents, with enough space between them that we couldn’t hear each other snoring. Despite setting off from Ambleside in the evening, the simplicity of the location meant we were set up with plenty of time to stretch out on the spongy grass and enjoy the night.

It was a very special place to be. Skylarks filled the air at sundown, then burst back into life the second the sun returned just a few hours later at dawn. We heard a cuckoo calling in the trees below, waved at a couple of other wild campers who arrived just before nightfall and then vanished from view, and drank whisky outside our tents until sleep arrived.

Early getaway

The plan for this trip was always a smash-and-grab. We only had one night to play with, and we both live a couple of hundred miles from the Lakes, so we wanted to get on the road quickly the next morning.

Breaking camp was quick and simple, with ribbons of cloud and mist drifting around us. The atmosphere had completely changed overnight – one of the many joys of falling asleep and waking up in the mountains.

Two hours later we were back in Ambleside, drinking coffee and eating breakfast in one of the town’s many excellent cafés, congratulating ourselves on the wild camping heist we’d just pulled off.

Planning a quick, low and very basic camp like this keeps things simple for several reasons. You can wait for a near-perfect weather window. You can leave the heavy cooking kit at home. And you can pack only what you need for around 12 hours in the hills.

And you can pretty much guarantee you'll have an awesome time while you're doing it.

My very simple wild camping kit list:

- 2-person tent
- Lightweight 3-season sleeping bag
- Lightweight inflatable sleeping mat
- Inflatable pillow
- Headtorch
- Waterproof jacket
- Insulated jacket
- Hat and gloves
- Snacks
- 2 litres of water (wish I’d taken more — it was hot and I got through it quickly)
- Hip flask
- Small first aid kit

Fears are growing for high-altitude mountaineer Nirmal Purja and nine other climbers after an avalanche hit the party during an expedition on Broad Peak (8,051m) in Pakistan.

The avalanche is reported to have struck on Thursday and there has been no contact with any team members since then. Major General Irfan Arshad, HI(M), President of the Alpine Club of Pakistan, has been giving updates via his Instagram account and has written that "four bodies have been found by the ground rescue teams so far".

The missing team includes a climber from Oman, one from Pakistan, one from China, one from the United States and six from Nepal. Search and rescue operations are underway both on the ground and from the air.

Despite the lack of contact with any team members, BBC News is reporting that at least four GPS trackers have been located, and that Purja's tracker has been showing some changes of position.

A change of plan

"This was never the plan," Purja wrote three days ago in a post on his Instagram page, explaining that his initial intention was just to climb Gasherbrum II (8,035m) as part of his attempt to climb the world's 14 highest peaks three times over. But just before starting the trip, he decided to add Broad Peak to his objectives, too. If he managed to summit both, he'd be one summit (Cho Oyu, 8,188m) away from climbing all 14 8,000m peaks twice without supplemental oxygen.

"This wasn’t planned," he added. "The Hattrick project was the focus because it carried a bigger mission. But opportunities don’t scream: they whisper to those already working in silence."

Who is Nirmal Purja?

Purja, also known as Nims or Nimsdai, is a Nepal-born British citizen that served in the British armed forces. He hit mainstream news in 2019 when he set a new world record for climbing the world's 14 highest mountains (all over 8,000m) in the quickest time. He completed them in six months and six days, with his exploits made famous in the Netflix documentary, 14 Peaks: Nothing Is Impossible.

Purja has gone on to set further records since then, including being part of a team to climb K2 (8,611m) in winter for the first time. He subsequently set a new record for the fastest time to summit the 14 highest peaks without supplemental oxygen, with a time of two years and five months.

Earlier this week he achieved his 57th summit of an 8,000m peak after summiting Gasherbrum II in Pakistan, a sign of his vast experience and skill.

What and where is Broad Peak?

Broad Peak is the 12th highest mountain in the world and the summit sits at an altitude of 8,051m. It's located in Pakistan's Karakoram range and, while it's not considered a very technical climb, it's still a serious undertaking, as is any peak at this altitude, and the risk of avalanche is ever-present.

Dusk is falling and I’m high in the hills, at the point where most of the sheep stop grazing and the heather, bilberry and bracken thin out. Pitching my tent in the last of the light, I gaze out at the darkening landscape. I haven’t seen anyone for hours. In fact, it seems as though there’s no one else for miles around. It’s a typical night out in the mountains of North Wales.

But even this quiet hillside belongs to somebody, which means that by the letter of the law, I’m trespassing. Of course, by the wild camping code that every backpacker in Britain learns – arrive late, leave early, leave no trace – I’m just doing exactly what generations of hillwalkers before me have done, on these very same slopes. That gap, between what the law says and what actually happens almost every weekend in our hills and mountains, is the whole story of wild camping in England and Wales. And it’s a gap that continues to spark plenty of debate.

A patchwork, not a policy

Let’s start with what’s actually legal – which varies by nation. Scotland settled the question more than two decades ago, passing the most permissive and progressive access legislation in the UK. The Land Reform (Scotland) Act 2003 gave everyone a statutory right of access to most land and inland water for recreation – wild camping included – provided you stick to the Scottish Outdoor Access Code: camp in small groups, short stays only, no fires that scar the ground, no trace left behind.

In England and Wales, the situation is different. There has been progress down the decades. The landmark Countryside and Rights of Way (CRoW) Act of 2000 finally gave access to ‘mountain, moor, heath and down’ in addition to registered common land. This opened up around three million acres to the general public, giving us the right to walk, run, climb, bird-watch and sightsee on it – though not to wild camp.

Access land is marked on Ordnance Survey maps with a yellow wash (and on the ground with a round brown sign bearing a walker). You can roam across it as you please, regardless of whether you’re on a public right of way. But technically you can’t pitch up overnight.

Public access and private land

Even today, around 89% of England remains off limits for walking, camping or otherwise. Writer and campaigner Guy Shrubsole, author of Who Owns England? has said: “My calculations using DEFRA and Land Registry data show that 1% of the population own half the land in England. The aristocracy and landed gentry still own around 30% of England, while the country’s homeowners own just 5% of the land. The public sector owns around 8% of England; the country’s 24 non-Royal Dukes own a million acres of Britain”. Meanwhile, the Crown Estate actively manages about 185,000 acres of rural land, alongside roughly half of the coastline. The Ministry of Defence (MoD) owns and manages 679,045 acres of land in England and Wales.

If you pitch a tent without permission on private land, you’re trespassing (with one exception – see below). This is a civil matter rather than a criminal one; a landowner can turf you off, but the police have no general power to arrest you simply for being there – unless you have caused damage or refuse to move on.

The Dartmoor debate

There’s one exception. The only place in England and Wales where you can legally camp without permission from the landowner is Dartmoor. But even this right has been argued in the courts. In January 2023, landowners Alexander and Diana Darwall – owners of the 4,000-acre Blachford Estate on Dartmoor – won a High Court case that stripped away the long-assumed right to camp on much of the Commons.

In turn, this triggered a mass protest and a national row over who gets to use the countryside. The Court of Appeal restored the right that July. The Darwalls kept fighting, and it was only in May 2025 that the Supreme Court settled it for good, ruling that the Dartmoor Commons Act 1985’s public right to ‘open-air recreation’ does include camping.

Reacting to the ruling, Dartmoor National Park Authority CEO Dr Kevin Bishop called it “a really good day for Dartmoor”. The Darwalls, through a spokesperson, said their role as custodians of the land felt “greatly diminished”. Dartmoor now remains the only place in England where wild camping is an enshrined legal right rather than a tolerated habit (although it doesn’t apply everywhere – use the national park authority’s interactive map to find out where you can wild camp on Dartmoor).

Outside Dartmoor and Scotland, wild campers are simply relying on goodwill. In practice, that goodwill has quietly held up for decades in national parks like Eryri (Snowdonia), Bannau Brycheiniog (Brecon Beacons) and the Lake District. Landowners have tended to look the other way as long as campers follow the accepted code: pitch high, pitch late, strike camp before the first dog walkers are out, leave no trace. It’s a sort of unofficial tacit permission that works because nobody abuses or exploits it. Whether this situation survives another decade of Instagram geotagging and viral, clickbait-focused ‘best wild camping spots’ listicles is a separate, and increasingly urgent, question.

It’s also worth remembering that ‘wild camping’ was barely a recognised activity in its own right until relatively recently. For most of the 20th century, it was simply a matter of logistics, a way of turning a good long walk into an even longer one, and frequently the only realistic way to cross ground too remote to cover between dawn and dusk. That’s why it’s important to be clear on what wild camping is. It’s quiet, small-scale, dispersed and unobtrusive. It’s basically backpacking, but overnight.

What it isn’t: parking up in a campervan or setting up your roof tent beside a busy road, nor pitching a massive family tent near a popular path or lakeside, in full view of the general public. That’s just ‘fly camping’ – the anti-social, ignorant, litter-strewn end of the spectrum that has nothing to do with wild camping at all, and which is already an increasing eyesore in national parks across Britain during the busiest summer weekends.

The case for opening things up

Following the final Dartmoor ruling, outdoor organisations like the British Mountaineering Council (BMC), the Open Spaces Society, the Campaign for National Parks, the Right to Roam campaign and others issued statements asking for the principle to be extended: a legal right to wild camp responsibly in more areas of England and Wales. The BMC has said that access to “a night under the stars shouldn’t be a privilege, but a right”.

The wider argument for this isn’t just sentimental. Increased access to wild places is consistently linked to better physical and mental health, and Britain’s outdoor infrastructure is already there to support it: we have 15 National Parks, 17 National Trails and around 140,000 miles of public rights of way in England and Wales alone. What’s missing isn’t places to go or paths to explore. It’s permission.

Scottish and Scandinavian solutions

Scotland already offers a working example. The line in the sand that was the Land Reform (Scotland) Act of 2003 hasn’t caused the free-for-all that critics predicted. By and large, it works well.

That’s not to say there haven’t been issues in honeypot locations. Loch Lomond is the prime example, being in such easy reach of Glasgow and the Central Belt. Over time, there were creeping problems: antisocial behaviour, litter, abandoned camping gear, fire damage. The ‘fix’ was a set of byelaws requiring a permit across designated zones along the loch shore.

The permit system is a headache for backpackers on the West Highland Way. To me, we’ve legislated away a universal right because a minority couldn’t be trusted with it, rather than properly resourcing the wardens and rangers who could have moved on the small number of people causing the damage.

Still, since the byelaws came in during summer 2017, the park authority points to the fact that camping complaints have dropped from 324 a year to just 40, satisfaction has stayed above 90%, and around 300,000 people have camped within the managed zones without incident. But correlation isn’t the same as proof that byelaws were the only route to that outcome, and the park authority’s own 10-year review and consultation (currently ongoing) offers us an opportunity to revisit.

I’d argue that the improvement has as much to do with the wardens, the education and the infrastructure that came bundled in with the byelaws, as with the restriction itself. Investment matters. And if you want proof that embedding an outdoor culture in society pays dividends, look at the Nordic nations like Sweden, Norway and Finland. Their shared principle of allemansrätten (meaning ‘everyone’s right’) extends to hiking, foraging, swimming and wild camping on land regardless of ownership, provided you cause no disturbance.

It sits alongside friluftsliv, the idea of an outdoor-orientated way of life coined by the Norwegian playwright Henrik Ibsen in the 1850s, and it’s backed by genuine cultural investment: Norwegian universities offer degree courses in it, and over 5% of the population belong to the DNT, the national trekking association.

Neighbouring Sweden is equally enamoured with outdoor living. A recent national survey revealed that around a third of Swedes get outdoors at least once a week. Meanwhile, Finland has an estimated 13,000 trees for every citizen, plus 35 national parks and over 7,000km of marked trails, as well as thousands of accessible lakes and islands. We need a similar level of long-term outdoor investment and education here in Britain, for kids and adults alike.

Why it isn’t that simple

Population density is the practical crunch. Scotland has around 71 people per square kilometre, the sparsest in the UK; Norway sits at roughly 15, Finland 19, Sweden 26. England is a sardine tin by comparison, packed in at around 450, with Wales at about 153. What works in a Highland glen doesn’t automatically translate to the Lake District on a bank holiday weekend.

It’s a tension that LFTO readers feel keenly. When we put the ‘should wild camping be legal?’ question to you recently via Facebook, the response was mixed. There was widespread support for a general right to roam and conditional support for wild camping specifically: in other words, a qualified yes, but only with a proper code of conduct, and in certain areas. Others were keen to maintain the status quo, concerned that increased access would simply encourage “idiots”, as well as “instagrammers and youtubers”.

Set those arguments next to the people who actually live and work on the land, and it gets harder still to wave through as an easy yes. The National Farmers’ Union (NFU) agrees that public access brings real benefits but says it has to sit alongside the needs of farmers managing livestock and land day to day. Issues like litter, wildfires and livestock worrying are a genuine, growing headache. An NFU spokesperson put it plainly: wild campers must treat “the environment, livestock and the people who live and work there with respect”.

The Country Land and Business Association (CLA) goes further, arguing that the phrase ‘right to roam’ itself misleads people into thinking it already exists, and that expanding it risks damage to crops, boundaries and biosecurity on working farms. CLA president Mark Tufnell has said that a full right to roam would be “disastrous for farming, wildlife and the environment”.

Then there’s the public safety element. If people are going to go wild camping, they need to do so with the knowledge, skills and equipment to keep themselves safe. This is critical, because if they get into trouble, the burden falls primarily on volunteer-run services like Mountain Rescue, many of whose teams are already stretched to capacity, especially in peak hiking and camping season.

Where I stand

My heart says yes. Ultimately, the case for making wild camping legal ties in with the right to roam and the fundamental principle of outdoor access, which has so many public benefits for health, our shared heritage and social justice in a country where so much land sits in so few hands. But my head probably says not yet, at least not as a single switch flipped overnight across the whole of England and Wales. Realistically, a blanket right to wild camp, imposed overnight onto a country 20 times more densely populated than the Highlands, would strain goodwill on both sides before it built any.

Luckily, we no longer have to imagine what the middle ground looks like. It’s Dartmoor: a defined right, on defined land, backed by a park authority with the powers and (imperfect, but real) resourcing to manage it. Extend that model, national park by national park, common by common, with the same level of investment in infrastructure and education, and you get most of what the right to roam movement wants without the free-for-all that farmers and landowners fear. This is exactly what the Campaign for National Parks has called for, via a pilot scheme to demonstrate the case for a rights-based approach to wild camping.

An overarching, progressive policy extended thoughtfully, zone by zone, is a solution that England and Wales could actually make work. Some might call it a compromise. Increasingly, it looks like the answer.

Wild camping is currently a legal right in Scotland and on parts of the Dartmoor Commons only. Everywhere else in England and Wales it requires landowner permission. For guidance on how to camp responsibly and minimise your impact, see our Leave No Trace and wild camping how-to guides.

Planning a wild camping trip? See our list of the best wild camping tents for some product inspiration.

About the author

As the former editor of Walk magazine and Scouting magazine, Matt Jones is one of the most respected names in the UK outdoor industry. Now a freelance journalist based in the heart of Eryri (Snowdonia) National Park, he’s a vastly experienced gear tester and self-confessed outdoor kit geek. When he's not typing away at his laptop, he can usually be found backpacking in his local mountains or on a long-distance trail.

On the south bank of the Thames, in the shadow of the towers of Canary Wharf, hundreds of people are waiting in front of a stage. Many ran to get a good position after a last-minute stage change. There’s expectation in the air, like a pop star is about to come on.

Then Alex Honnold appears. The man from the screen, who the crowd has watched in disbelief and amazement, is now in front of them. Most know Honnold for the Oscar-winning 2018 documentary Free Solo, which followed his ropeless climb of El Capitan in Yosemite, as well as this year's Netflix livestream of him scaling Taipei 101 without a rope in front of 6.2 million viewers.

After the applause subsides, the one watching in disbelief is Honnold. He’s here in London for the The North Face Climb Festival, a two-day celebration of climbing, music and film, and Steve Scott, Director of Kendal Mountain Festival, is on stage to interview him. “Is this a common thing for you these days, this sort of crowd?” Scott asks.

“None of this feels common,” Honnold responds. Scott tries to get the interview on track, suggesting that they go back to childhood, but Honnold’s gaze keeps wandering back to the crowd. “He's just blown away by the number of people,” Scott offers. Honnold nods. “I’m just like this is…”, he trails off.

It’s as if he can’t quite get his head around the crowd, but he’s trying to take it in nonetheless, experiencing it like he would a view at the top of a climb. The all too common ‘fearless daredevil’ characterisation of Honnold shatters within minutes – and what emerges is a lot more interesting.

“It was too much”

Honnold is a gracious interviewee, but you’d be forgiven for assuming he’d prefer to be climbing right now. There’s a particularity to the fame of elite athletes; they haven’t necessarily sought it out, instead it’s a byproduct of them being exceptional at doing what they love. But unlike footballers, whose base salaries are largely guaranteed, or tennis players, who at least compete for substantial prize money, climbers exist in a more precarious ecosystem – one that depends on sponsors. That means visibility is important: it’s what sustains the climbing.

But after his free solo of Taipei 101, Honnold says the attention was overwhelming. “Everybody saw this,” he admits. “It was too much. More than I expected.” He’s more positive talking about the Free Solo film, which portrays his free solo of El Cap, saying it opened up “incredible life experiences”. “I’d gone from living in a van to coming to the BAFTAs in London and meeting the future king,” he says. There’s a sense of incredulity to how he speaks about his fame, as if he’s thinking ‘I’m just a guy who loves climbing, but I’ve ended up here somehow’.

An ordinary human doing extraordinary things

"Let’s talk about buildings”, Scott says, pre-empting a shift in the conversation towards Taipei 101. "There are plenty around", Honnold responds wryly. There’s a brief pause where he leans forwards to peer at the skyscrapers of Canary Wharf. It doesn’t seem like he’s pretending for comic effect; he genuinely appears to be scoping out future projects.

There’s this ‘fearless’ mythology around Alex Honnold. Before the Taipei 101 climb, Netflix described him as having "no fear”, and The New York Post called him a "daredevil climber”. An often-cited fMRI study of his brain found an unusually low activation in his amygdala, part of the brain that responds to threats, when represented with fear-provoking imagery. The implication, always, is that he’s wired differently from the rest of us – that what he does isn’t really available to ordinary humans, because ordinary humans would be terrified.

Honnold pushes back against this. On the Rich Roll podcast, he said: "With enough exposure to a certain stimulus, you desensitise yourself to it. It's not that my amygdala doesn't fire, it's that my amygdala wasn't firing for that level of stimulus [during the scan].” Rather than showing that he’s fearless, the study revealed a response shaped by decades of exposure to scary situations. "I've spent 29 years, five days a week, training at that thing," he added.

Practice, practice and more practice

When the conversation back at The North Face Climb Festival turns to his partnership with fellow pro-climber Tommy Caldwell, he echoes this desire to shake himself from the daredevil image: "The films always try to contrast between us, where he's the safe guy and I'm the sketchy guy or whatever. But the reality is that we're basically both the same." The "or whatever" is the verbal equivalent of a shrug; the mild weariness of someone who has heard a story told about themselves enough times to find it mildly boring.

He only took on Taipei 101 because he was absolutely sure he could do it. Back in 2013, he’d scouted the building for a TV show that ultimately fell apart. Rather than relying on his earlier impressions, he says: “We went back and scouted again as I wanted to make sure that I actually could climb it.” Honnold describes free soloing entirely in terms of process, something he speaks of refining and dialing in. “ I'll practise, I'll train, I'll go through the process I need, and then I'll do the thing,” he says. “And then it’s just repetition”.

“I think people find me annoying”

Throughout the interview, Honnold wins the crowd over through his disarming honesty and self-deprecation. When asked what his tent mate would say is his most annoying habit, he says dryly “I think people find me annoying”, and again, when asked about his role in expeditions, he says: “I basically don’t really bring any of the real skills to the team other than rock climbing.”

This self-deprecation doesn’t seem to stem from a place of negativity, rather a realistic assessment of his skills. He describes himself as a “terrible boulderer” and a “terrible competition climber”. “I've spent 20 years as a professional climber, aspiring to be stronger,” he says. But he’s realised, as he’s got older, that the reality is that he’s drawn to big experiences, solos and adventures. The kind of thing that “makes you a bad rock climber, basically”.

Now that he’s 40 years-old, with a wife and two kids, he’s less performance-oriented. "Maybe this is the essence of getting middle-aged,” he says. “I'm just sort of accepting, you know, I do have certain weaknesses, and realistically, I'm probably not gonna improve them that much.”

Eating cookies in nature

Both interviewer and interviewee are fathers, so Scott is hoping to find some common ground to close the interview. “How would [your wife] Sanni describe you as a father to the girls? Are you hands-on?” Maybe worried that the question is too personal, he then softens it into a more practical question. “Presumably they've climbed already with you in some way?”

Honnold answers the latter part of the question with enthusiasm, but swerves from the personal. He says that for his eldest, climbing is an "excuse for her to eat snacks outside”. “It’s funny because realistically I think that’s part of the reason that adults exercise outside is basically to eat sugary snacks too,” he adds. Then, turning to the crowd, he asks: “Is this why I’ve been into this for so long, basically because I like eating cookies in nature?”

Nobody is expecting to hear this from the pro climber they’ve watched dangle from his knee hundreds of metres above the ground. When the interview is over many swarm towards him to get a signature or a selfie, a piece of his fame to share. But this interview has reinforced an important point. He’s not some curiosity that needs to be studied – he’s just a person who's totally in love with climbing, and the extraordinary things he’s achieved stem from that one fact.

When it comes to backpacks, Osprey’s reputation is so well established that the brand is usually one of the first recommendations walkers make if they’re asked for an opinion on outdoor kit. “Get an Osprey,” they’ll assert confidently: “I love mine”. Fair enough, and we'd agree that the brand makes some of the best backpacking packs around.

But for novice backpackers studying the Osprey range, two things soon become apparent: (1) Osprey packs aren’t cheap and (2) there are loads of different models. So, how do you decide which to buy and how much to spend?

Well, if you want a deluxe trekking pack with all the bells and whistles plus a body-hugging yet supremely airy carrying experience, the answer has long been the Atmos or Aura AG packs. Problem: they’re big, heavy and they cost nearly £300.

Then there’s the Exos and Eja (plus the latest Pro versions), which are also expensive, but for different reasons. These are the lightest backpacking rucksacks Osprey currently offers, designed to appeal to experienced weight-conscious backpackers with a full gamut of featherweight, low-bulk kit. They’re brilliant – an LFTO best in test, in fact – but clearly, they won’t be for everyone either.

Go another rung down and you start to get into the consummate all-rounders: the men’s Kestrel and women’s Kyte, which have long been among the brand’s most popular and well-known lines. Formerly, they came in 38, 48, 58 and 68-litre volumes, priced between £190 and £240. But as of 2026, to add to your confusion, Osprey has now started offering ‘LT’ versions of them, in 28, 45 and 65-litre options.

The question worth asking before you spend £240 on the Osprey Kestrel 68 is this: is the standard model actually worth £60 more than the LT version? Having tested both, my honest answer is that for most backpackers, it probably isn’t. The Kestrel LT 65 saves between 240g and 320g over the standard pack, loses just three litres of capacity, costs significantly less and delivers broadly equivalent carrying performance. That’s a compelling set of trade-offs in the LT’s favour.

The LT designation stands for 'lightweight' and the concept is straightforward: take the proven design DNA of the standard Kestrel, strip out some of the heavier components, simplify the feature set slightly and deliver a cleaner pack at a lower price.

What you don’t lose – and this matters – is the fundamental comfort and practicality that makes Osprey worth considering in the first place. The AirScape back panel, perimeter wire frame and contoured hipbelt are all present, the sliding harness gives you five inches of back length adjustment, and the overall construction still feels thoroughly Osprey. This is not a budget compromise. It’s just a more focused version of a good pack.

Back system, frame and suspension

The AirScape back panel is found on many Osprey packs throughout the US brand’s extensive range. It is a foam-and-mesh design that sits close to the back rather than standing off from it as with a fully suspended system (like the AirSpeed or AG systems). It’s comfortable, offers a bit of airflow and keeps the load feeling stable and planted – particularly on uneven or technical ground where fully suspended trampoline-style systems can feel like they’re levering away from your back.

In my testing ground of North Wales, where classic long-distance walks like the Snowdonia Way, Slate Trail or Cambrian Way move between boggy moorland, rocky paths and loose scree, that stability is genuinely useful.

However, the AirScape system doesn’t match the ventilation of Osprey’s Anti-Gravity system (as found on the Atmos/Aura range) or the Airspeed suspended mesh panels of the Exos/Eja and even the entry-level Rook/Renn models. On warm days with a full load, your back will know the pack is there. If ventilation is your primary concern, the Exos/Eja or the Atmos/Aura are the better choices – at higher price points and, in the case of the Atmos/Aura, considerably more weight.

The frame is a perimeter wire design with a frame sheet, and it makes for a pretty capable load-lugger. It will handle loads up to 18kg according to Osprey. On test I carried around 14kg of camping kit for a few wild camp overnighters without any issues. Interestingly, the LT’s wire frame is actually 0.5mm thicker than the standard Kestrel’s – making it fractionally more robust structurally, even though the surrounding materials are lighter. In use the frame provides enough structure to channel weight onto the hips efficiently without feeling rigid or unforgiving on the move.

Fit and adjustability

The Kestrel LT 65 only comes in a single size, but the sliding harness adjustment system gives you five inches of back length fine-tuning – enough to achieve a good fit across a wide range of torso lengths. The women’s version, the Kyte, is more than just a smaller version of the men’s pack too – it’s purposefully designed for the female frame, with narrower shoulders and contoured pack straps.

Osprey also uses a simple but effective buckle-and-webbing mechanism for its torso length adjustment rather than the Velcro panels that some rivals employ, which is worth noting: it’s considerably easier on the knuckles and less prone to slippage over time.

On test, the hipbelt felt supportive and well-contoured, with enough padding to alleviate any potential pressure points. Shoulder straps offered ample cushioning for the shoulders and collarbone, and the load lifters made it easy to fine-tune the carry once moving.

The sliding chest strap adjusts across a good range and, unlike some rivals, stays securely where you set it. Osprey’s integrated emergency whistle on the chest buckle is present – a small detail, but one that’s earned its place on the spec sheet.

Features, pockets and organisation

Despite the LT’s leaner specification, the feature count here is solid. The floating top lid has inner and outer zippered compartments, with the underside mesh pocket a useful place for items you want to keep accessible. One design quirk worth flagging: the lid buckles are reversed compared to most packs, which makes adjusting the lid height – to accommodate a fuller main compartment, or to lash gear on top via the red compression strap – noticeably fiddlier than it ought to be. It’s manageable, but it’s the kind of thing that nags over a multi-day trip.

The extended J-zip on the front of the main compartment is one differentiator from the standard Kestrel, which has a separate bottom compartment instead (more like a conventional trekking pack, which comes down to personal preference, but to me feels a bit old-school).

The J-zip also gives you quick access to the full depth of the pack without unpacking from the top, which is particularly useful when you need to retrieve something from the bottom without decanting the entire contents onto the ground. It’s a practical trade-off that works well in the real world, e.g. when you’ve found a good pitch for a wild camp and want to get your one-person tent up pronto.

Dual stretch side pockets retain the useful dual-access design – meaning you can reach around and pull out your hiking water bottle without removing the pack – which is a quality-of-life detail that makes a small but important difference over a long day. The front shove pocket and two hipbelt pockets round out the external storage.

Some other reviewers have criticised the LT’s front shove-it pocket and side bottle pockets for lacking stretch. While this is valid, something’s gotta give – super stretchy mesh pockets are liable to snagging and tearing, and on balance I’m glad Osprey has beefed them up with heavier-duty materials. They’re still useable and they’re now more robust.

The hipbelt pockets proved comfortably large enough for a phone and hiking snacks on test, without feeling overstuffed. Dual accessory straps at the base are good for lashing a wet tent fly, a foam mat or even a camping chair without fuss (this matters more now I’ve hit 40 and carry my Crazy Creek Hex 2.0 everywhere). A raincover is included in the base pocket as standard too, which is not always a given these days.

What the LT doesn’t have, compared to the standard Kestrel, is the ‘stow on the go’ trekking pole attachments and some of the external daisy chain loops. For most users this is unlikely to be a dealbreaker, but it’s worth knowing if you regularly carry hiking poles and want a hands-free way to stash them on the move, or if you like to lash a lot of gear to the front of your pack like some sort of Victorian travelling tinker.

One note for hydration system users too: the internal sleeve and exit port work well, but the hanging strap is designed specifically for Osprey’s own reservoirs. Users of CamelBak, Platypus or other brands will find attachment annoying – a persistent quirk across the Osprey range that I wish they’d fix. And I’ll keep pointing it out in my reviews until they do...

Weight and sustainability

At 1.93kg, the Kestrel LT 65 offers a meaningful weight saving compared to the standard Kestrel 68 (2.17kg or 2.25kg depending on size) and a substantial improvement on more deluxe packs like the Gregory Baltoro 65 and Osprey Atmos AG 65. It’s heavier than the brand’s Airspeed-equipped Rook 65 (1.68kg) and Exos 58 (1.29 or 1.33kg depending on size), but brings more durability and features than either of those models in return.

The weight saving over the standard Kestrel is achieved primarily through lighter main body fabric – 210D recycled nylon rather than the Kestrel’s 420D – and a simplified construction overall.

That lighter fabric does represent a potential long-term durability trade-off, and it’s worth being honest about: the Kestrel LT is a robust and well-made pack, but it may benefit from a little more care and attention on rough terrain than Osprey’s heavier-duty models. The 600D polyester base mitigates this somewhat, offering solid abrasion resistance where it’s needed most.

When it comes to sustainability, both the main body and base fabrics are 100% recycled – a genuine plus, and better than many rivals at this price point who use only partial recycled content, if at all.

Price and competition

At £180, the Kestrel LT 65 undercuts the standard Kestrel 68 by £60 while delivering broadly equivalent carry performance and only marginally fewer features. It’s hard to justify the extra outlay, and I reckon the LT is the better value purchase for most backpackers. It also looks and feels like a more modern pack overall.

The more interesting internal comparison is with Osprey’s own Rook 65, released a couple of years ago at a similar £185 RRP. Perhaps surprisingly, the Rook is lighter (1.68kg) and has a better-ventilated back system even though it costs roughly the same.

Against those advantages, the Kestrel LT counters with a floating lid (the Rook only has a fixed lid), a front shove pocket which the Rook lacks, and a more durable nylon ripstop construction compared to the Rook’s predominantly polyester build. For serious multi-day use in rough conditions, the Kestrel LT will probably stand up a bit better.

Against external rivals at this price point, the Gregory Stout (55 or 70) or Paragon 60 are two worthy competitors – both offering solid carry comfort at similar weights and prices. The Stout closely matches the Kestrel LT’s feature count, and there’s little to split them in terms of build quality either. The Paragon is a bit more stripped back and more expensive at RRP but saves a fair bit of weight. You might also want to look at options like the Kelty Glendale 65, the Exped Ridgeline 65 and the Deuter Aircontact Core, which have all been extensively tested here at LFTO.

Verdict

Neither a deluxe trekking pack nor a minimalist ultralight pack, the Kestrel LT 65 is an excellent, well-balanced all-rounder that delivers solid performance and genuine practicality for its price. It doesn’t have the outright carrying comfort of the Atmos AG 65 with a heavy load, the streamlined ventilation of the Exos 55, or the feature count of the Baltoro 65 – but it costs considerably less than all three and does most of what they do rather well. For backpackers who want a capable, comfortable, well-featured pack without paying over £200, it’s a smart way into the Osprey range.

Don't need a pack with so much space? Take a look at our list of the best hiking daypacks.

About the author

Matt Jones is a freelance journalist based in the heart of Eryri National Park (Snowdonia). He’s a vastly experienced gear tester and self-confessed outdoor kit geek. Matt’s been one of our main gear testers for the last couple of years and is the first person we call with any complicated kit queries that need in-depth and forensic analysis. He was previously editor of Walk and Scouting magazines.

The Vivobarefoot Tracker Ora Sandal is an open-toe barefoot hiking sandal with a secure triple-Velcro fit, fast-drying synthetic upper and the same low-profile All Terrain outsole concept used across Vivo’s Tracker hiking range.

It won’t give you the toe protection of a closed hiking shoe, and sizing is worth getting right. But once the fit is dialled in, this is one of the most secure and natural-feeling hiking sandals I’ve worn.

Barefoot sandals make a lot of sense. Most hiking sandals already sit fairly low to the ground unless you’re looking at something unusually chunky and maximalist, like the Teva Grandview Max. If the point of wearing sandals over hiking shoes or boots is to feel closer to the trail, then starting from a barefoot platform feels like the logical endpoint.

That’s exactly what the Tracker Ora brings. It’s light, flexible, grippy and wonderfully unobtrusive. There’s enough structure to keep your foot secure, but not so much that it ruins the whole point of wearing sandals in the first place.

Design and features

The Tracker Ora Sandal is built around Vivobarefoot’s usual barefoot formula: wide fit, thin sole and lots of flexibility. Vivo tends to describe this through its “fit, feel, flex” approach, which means giving your toes room to spread, letting your feet receive more sensory feedback from the ground and allowing the foot to move more naturally.

Here, that approach makes even more sense than it does in a shoe. The Tracker Ora has no insole, a 2.5 mm sole base and 4 mm tread, so there’s very little between your foot and the ground. For barefoot fans, that’s the appeal. For sandal fans, it’s also the point.

The upper is fully synthetic, using recycled polyester, spandex and polyurethane rather than leather. Vivobarefoot describes the sandal as vegan, though the brand is careful to say that it can’t yet fully guarantee every smaller component, such as adhesives and dyes, meets vegan best practice.

The sandal uses three Velcro adjustment points: one across the forefoot, one over the top of the foot and one around the heel. This makes it easy to tune the fit across your toes and instep, which is a huge part of why the sandal feels so secure.

There’s also a slight raised lip around the bottom of the footbed. I found this surprisingly useful because it gives your toes a clear physical boundary. If the sandal catches underfoot or you’re moving over rocky ground, you can feel whether your toes are tucked safely behind the front of the sole rather than overextending into trouble.

Protection and performance

The Tracker Ora is not protective in the same way as something like the Teva Grandview Max. There’s no chunky midsole, no closed-toe box and no high-sided protective shell around the foot. This is a much more minimal sandal, and that brings obvious advantages and obvious risks.

The advantage is feedback. You feel the trail beneath you in a way that chunkier sandals often dull or distort. The sole flexes, bends and moves naturally, giving you a precise sense of what’s happening underfoot.

I’ve already praised this outsole style on the Vivobarefoot Tracker Leather AT Low II shoe and Tracker Leather AT II boot, and it works brilliantly here too. The 4 mm tread might not sound especially deep, but the rubber feels tacky and confidence-inspiring across a surprising range of surfaces.

It outclasses plenty of other hiking sandals for grip. The Merrell Kahuna 3, for example, has a very outdoorsy-looking sole and plenty of visible lug action, but when the terrain gets tougher, it doesn’t offer the same bite or confidence. The Tracker Ora feels far more composed on rock, trail and wet ground.

River crossings are where the outsole really impressed me. The rubber felt tacky on wet rock and even underwater, rather than turning vague and slidey the second things got properly soaked. That’s a big deal for a hiking sandal, because if it can’t handle water, it’s basically just casual summer footwear with better marketing.

The upper also dries quickly. Some of that may be down to the fact I’ve been testing these during a UK heatwave, which is a rare and suspicious meteorological event. But the synthetic, low-absorption construction clearly helps. After river crossings and wet sections, the sandal didn’t stay heavy, soggy or unpleasant for long.

Fit and comfort

These are the best-fitting sandals I’ve ever worn, with one important caveat: you need to get the sizing right. For me, that meant going down a full size from my usual shoe size. Vivobarefoot’s fit can feel generous anyway, and in a sandal, that extra space matters even more. Too much length at the front means more chance of catching the sole on rocks, roots or awkward trail furniture. Get the size right, and the Tracker Ora feels superb.

The fit is snug and secure without pinching anywhere. It doesn’t feel tight in the usual strappy sandal sense. Instead, it wraps the foot with a precise, almost invisible hold. The sandal stays with the foot well enough that, after a while, you stop noticing the straps altogether.

That feeling is compounded by the barefoot sole. There’s no cushioning wedge and no big platform separating you from the trail. You get a very direct connection to the ground, but because the fit is so secure, it doesn’t feel sloppy or unstable.

The toe adjustment is especially useful. Being able to secure the front of the sandal properly makes a big difference to technical walking, because it reduces the sliding and foot movement that can make some sandals feel sketchy on uneven ground.

The only area where I’d caution walkers is rocky descending. The fit is precise, and the sole is grippy, but your toes are still exposed. Some hiking sandals give you more of a buffer between your bare toes and the hazards of the trail. The Tracker Ora asks you to pay more attention.

That front lip helps, because you can feel whether your toes are safely behind it. But on steep, loose or rocky descents, you’ll still want to stay switched on. This is not a sandal for charging downhill as if toenails are renewable trail currency.

Price and competition

At £120, the Vivobarefoot Tracker Ora Sandal sits at the pricier end of the hiking sandal market. It’s more expensive than many classic warm-weather walking sandals and more specialised than everyday Teva-style options.

Against the Teva Grandview Max, it offers a completely different experience. The Teva is plush, chunky and highly cushioned, almost like a more breathable hiking trainer. The Tracker Ora is lower, thinner, more flexible and far more trail-connected.

Compared with something like the Merrell Kahuna 3, the Vivo feels more precise and more grippy on demanding terrain, especially around wet rock and river crossings. It doesn’t provide the same casual sense of underfoot padding, but it gives you better ground feel and a more confident barefoot-style platform.

The value question depends on whether you’ve already bought into barefoot footwear. If you want lots of cushioning and toe protection, £120 may feel steep for something this minimal. If you want a genuinely capable barefoot hiking sandal with excellent fit, strong grip and fast-drying materials, it feels much easier to justify.

Verdict

The Vivobarefoot Tracker Ora Sandal is a superb barefoot hiking sandal with outstanding fit, excellent ground feel and far better grip than many chunkier-looking alternatives. Once I sized down, it felt extraordinarily secure without pinching, squeezing or doing that horrible sandal thing where one rogue strap slowly cuts across the same bit of skin all day.

Its biggest strengths are fit and traction. The triple Velcro adjustment makes it easy to dial in the hold, while the All Terrain outsole grips confidently on dry trails, wet rock and river crossings. The synthetic upper also dries quickly, making it a very strong option for warm-weather hikes, coastal walks and water-based trail faffing.

The obvious limitation is protection. Your toes are exposed, and on rocky descents, you need to be careful. This isn’t a sandal for people who want the reassurance of a closed toe, thick cushioning or a big protective platform.

But if you like the idea of barefoot hiking, the Tracker Ora makes sense. It’s close to the ground, secure underfoot, impressively grippy and genuinely fun to walk in. It feels less like a compromised hiking shoe with holes in it, and more like what a hiking sandal probably should have been all along.

About the author

Milo Wilson is a digital writer and gear tester for Live For The Outdoors. He specialises in trail running, hiking and camping gear, with a particular interest in footwear, mountain kit and the fine art of getting irrationally excited about outsole patterns.

Travel backpacks, designed specifically for lugging your gear to and from planes, trains, buses and cars, come in all shapes and sizes. Surprisingly, they can be trickier for brands to get right than hiking packs, which simply need to balance weight, durability and comfort.

That's because the best travel backpacks have some additional parameters to hit before they can be classed as effective.

Before we get into that, if you're planning on carrying large loads on your back for long periods (including a lot of hiking), you may be better off with a larger backpacking rucksack. These often come with a comfortable, more sophisticated back system. You can then supplement this with a smaller bag for your valuables.

However, if you're heading off on a shorter trip (and don't want to lug a suitcase around), such as a city break or long weekend, a dedicated travel backpack is a good idea. Unlike a suitcase, they allow you to organise your belongings, are easier to walk around with and can squeeze into luggage racks more readily.

Luggage size restrictions vary from airline to airline, but the following bags should all work as cabin luggage (you just might have to pay for it with airlines like Ryanair and Wizz Air) and are compatible with overhead storage racks on trains and buses.

Jump to: How we test | Best travel backpack reviews | Buying advice

Shortlist: Best travel backpacks at a glance

Best travel backpack overall: Cotopaxi Allpa 35L Travel Pack

Runner-up best travel backpack: Osprey Sojourn Porter 30L

Best for versatility: Patagonia Black Hole 32L

Best travel backpack under £60: Forclaz Travel 500 Organiser 40L

Editor's note: This article was updated on 28 July 2026 when we added in the Antler Discovery 45 and Mous Optimal Travel Backpack.

How we tested

The travel packs featured here (and several more which didn't make the cut) have been used and abused by former LFTO digital writer Fliss Freeborn, deputy editor Rob Slade and group editor Oli Reed. Between them, they have decades of experience testing kit professionally and have been on hundreds of trips.

For this article, each pack has been tested through several months of frequent travels both abroad and around the UK.

We tested against a range of criteria including comfort, material quality, organisation, features and value for money. Rather than take brands word for it, we also weigh and measure each pack ourselves to make sure measurements are accurate.

For more on our review process, take a look at our 'how we test' page.

Best travel backpacks reviewed:

What to look for in a travel pack

Knowing what to look for before buying a travel backpack depends mostly on what it's going to be used for, but that said, there are a few constants to bear in mind – whether or not you're going off for months at a time, or just a few days.

Materials

You'll want something that is tough enough to be thrown about a bus, taxi, ferry or other mode of transport – and possibly sat on at an airport – so going for something on the heftier end might not be a bad shout. We like toughened canvas, but ripstop nylon is great too.

Some amount of padding, especially for laptop and tablet housing, is a must if you tend to travel with those items, but not so much that it impedes on useful packing space.

Given your luggage is going to be dragged, pushed, pulled and squished, this is not really the place for state-of-the-art lightweight materials, but that said, your pack shouldn't weigh a tonne either, as that'll impact how much stuff you can get in it and still be within the weight limit if you're using it as a carry-on.

Features

In general, a travel pack should have a separate handy compartments that enable you to organise your kit as you want to. Smaller pockets can be handy for valuables such as phones, wallets or passports. However, while they should be easily accessible to you, they need to be difficult to get to for others.

Lockable zips are also something to look for, especially if you'll be traveling on busy public transport in areas known for pickpocketing. You can buy handy luggage locks on Amazon.

Other features, including internal storage space, depend upon how exactly you like to pack. Many of the backpacks in the list above have cavernous, empty interiors which could benefit from being used with packing cubes, helping to organise larger spaces and compress your items so you can fit more in.

Other packs have built-in storage solutions for different bits and bobs – fine if you're only ever packing shoes and clothes but this could be a little restrictive if you're wanting to cart around 15kg of charcuterie, or other strangely non-compressible objects.

Straps

The straps on a travel pack can make or break the experience, especially if you're having to carry it through museums and other tourist attractions in a city all day.

It's why we prefer packs over holdalls or duffel bags for city travel. They tend to be designed with ergonomics in mind more so than duffels, which although can often be carried like a backpack, are better for car-based adventures or staying at basecamp during climbing expeditions.

If you know you're going to be in and out of a lot of public transport, you should looks for stowable straps too: they're less likely to get caught in doors or catch on things in tight spaces. It also makes the travel pack more easily storable when not in use.

What capacity backpack do I need for my trip?

It very much depends on how you pack, what activities you'll be getting up to and what facilities you have at your accommodation.

If you're a savvy space saver going somewhere that already has bedding and toiletries, you can get away with 30 litres for a long weekend quite easily.

If you're a little bit more of an over-packer, or need spare shoes, extra warm clothing or food, taking 35-40L for around three days is advisable. We find that if it's a sunny city trip for four to five days, 40 litres is absolutely fine.

Is a 40L backpack big enough for longer travelling?

Yes, often quite comfortably if you're clever about what you pack. Even on longer trips – especially if you're going somewhere hot where you can take quick-drying lightweight baselayers which pack down to next to nothing – a 40L backpack can often offer the best travel solution.

Usually, 40L is small enough to count as hand-luggage, which makes air travel much more efficient, and enables you to whisk yourself on and off a plane in no time.

Is a 50L backpack too big for carry-on?

In general, yes, 50L will be too large at full capacity. You can always get a travel pack of a larger size and use compression straps to cinch it down, but opting for something smaller as a carry-on bag is a better bet. The products we've reviewed here are all 30-40L, which will happily fit in most carry-on sizers.

Which brand is best for a travel backpack?

Any of the above brands are a high on quality, but if you're unsure, picking a brand that only specialises in rucksacks and bags (for example, Eagle Creek or Osprey) is a great bet.

As usual, you tend to get what you pay for with travel packs, especially as they're probably going to see a fair amount of abuse in their lifetime.

About the authors

Fliss Freeborn is a writer and gear tester for Live for the Outdoors. She's been camping, hiking and travelling all her life, so she knows what makes a great product.

Rob Slade joined LFTO in 2024 as deputy editor, having previously been content editor at 220 Triathlon and editor of Adventure Travel magazine. He's been testing and writing about gear professionally for over 11 years. In that time, he's hiked all over the world, including Norway, New Zealand, Jordan and Vietnam.

There’s a useful test when evaluating an outdoor brand’s credibility: who actually wears the kit when it matters? Not on a photoshoot or a sponsored trip, but on a high-stakes mountain rescue, or when guiding a group over technical terrain. Helly Hansen easily passes this test.

The Norwegian brand's technical kit is worn, and trusted by, outdoor professionals for one main reason: they're embedded into the design process. For almost 150 years, the brand has relied on insights and feedback from mountain guides and search and rescue teams to design their gear.

Today, more than 55,000 outdoor professionals trust Helly Hansen. But what about the everyday hillwalker, those who aren't necessarily saving lives or setting high-altitude records?

The truth is, the demands aren't really any different. When a mountain rescue volunteer flags that a waterproof jacket soaks through over a long rescue, the fix benefits every hiker who has ever been caught in a sudden downpour. Likewise, when a mountain guide pushes for a base layer that can handle the UV on a long, exposed summer ridge, that’s a win even for gentle family walks in the Peak District.

Helly Hansen’s current summer hiking range is a direct product of the brand’s ‘trusted by professionals’ promise – and with their Summer Sale now live, with up to 40% off selected items, it's a good moment to kit up. Here are some of the highlights…

Jackets and hoodies

Legwear

Shoes

The rooftop tent may be a relatively recent phenomenon, but over the past five years its popularity has surged. Come camping season, you’ll struggle to drive down the street without spotting one perched on a car roof.

The concept is simple: a folded tent mounted to your roof rack that pops open when you reach camp. They’re comfortable, quick to pitch, free up valuable boot space and, in effect, turn your car into a mini campervan.

But with so many shapes, sizes and price points to choose from, which roof tent is actually the best? And where do you even begin when you’re investing in one of the biggest pieces of camping kit you’ll ever buy? Quality roof tents typically start at £1,000 and second-hand options aren’t much cheaper, so it pays to do your research.

Here at Live for the Outdoors, we’ve been testing roof tents since they first landed in the UK market, and we like to think we know a thing or two about matching the right model to the right camper.

In this guide, our expert team reviews and rates the best roof tents for anyone looking to add a little elevated adventure to their next road trip.

Jump to: How we tested | Best roof tent reviews | Buying advice

The best roof tents at a glance

Best overall roof tent: TentBox Classic 2.0

Best value: OEX Vertex Lite 130

Best for small cars: TentBox Lite 2.0

Best for families: TentBox Lite XL

Best for stargazing: Thule Approach

How we tested the best roof tents

The roof tents in this article have been tested by three members of the LFTO team: Oli Reed, Chris Williams and Fliss Freeborn. Each tester comes with a very different approach, representing a large proportion of the demographic interested in buying a roof tent.

Oli (above left) has two young boys so usually comes at it from a family angle; Chris is a hardcore hiker who enjoys being able to park up anywhere to make the most of an early start in the mornings; and Fliss is an all-round outdoorsy gal, who's tested roof tents at festivals and campsites as a replacement for a small, portable tent. Each brings their expert opinion to the reviews below.

Editor's note: We updated this article in July 2026 with fresh pricing and made some tweaks to the buying guide. Over the past year we've tested new models from TentBox and RoofBunk, with more reviews planned covering TentBox, Thule and Decathlon this summer.

Best roof tents reviewed:

What to look for in a roof tent

What type of vehicle can support a roof tent?

Rooftop tents vary in size, and some are suitable for bigger vehicles only. Roof tents that have folding bases can often be fitted to small cars, while single-piece roof tents (or large models like the RoofBunk Explorer Super XL) will require something bigger.

We've used them on estates, SUVs and the Dacia Jogger below without any issues, and have seen them being used with no issue on cars as small as a Fiat Panda. The key thing is checking the specifics of both your roof tent and car before buying.

Vehicle roofs all have a dynamic roof load limit. You need to know what this is before putting any significant weight on your car roof. Specifically, the dynamic roof load limit refers to the maximum weight a roof can bear while being driven. When parked, the load limit is several times higher.

How easy is it to install a roof tent?

Most roof tents must sit on lateral roof bars (not just factory-fitted side rails!), so you'll need these too. It's easy to find the correct ones for your car by using the online search filters provided by retailers like Halfords. Another trusted retailer would be Autodoc. Roof tent specialists such as TentBox help you find the right ones for your car.

In terms of installation, it's a pretty simple process of affixing the tent base to roof bars, but roof tents tend to weigh between 45 and 70 kilograms, so bear in mind you'll want a helping hand getting these things on and off your car.

How long does it take to pitch a roof tent?

Roof tent setup is a huge contributor to their success. It is incredibly easy. For a foldout roof tent, it takes a minute or two; for a hardshell roof tent, it takes about 30 seconds. Roof tents are so much faster to set up than any other type of tent.

Are roof tents comfortable?

Roof tents tend to have about the same bedroom space as a two-person hiking tent, give or take a few centimetres.

However, in our experience, roof tents offer better liveability and comfort because they feel more like a bedroom, thanks to a proper mattress and thicker tent walls. Some models have extra niceties like skylights, too.

How do roof tents handle different weather conditions?

Being elevated off the ground, one might think roof tents are susceptible to breaking in bad weather, but you needn't worry. We've found they handle windy conditions just fine. Their thick fabrics and metal frames are very strong, although it always pays to try and find a sheltered camping spot if you can.

Likewise with rain, roof tents have held up very well in our experience. The only slight issue in this regard is that roof tents don't have a porch area, so there isn't really a place to put on your boots before heading out (unless you don't mind keeping your footwear in the bedroom with you – but we're not fans).

Roof tents can be used in all seasons, which certainly adds to the appeal.

What is the price range for quality roof tents?

You’re typically looking at anywhere from around £1,000 up to £3,000 or more. Factors like hard vs soft shell construction, build quality, materials and added features all play a big role in that price spread.

Even if you’re new to rooftop camping, it’s worth investing in a well-made tent. You’ll have a far better overall experience, and if you decide to sell it later on, a quality model will hold its value much better on the second-hand market.

How do roof tents affect vehicle fuel efficiency?

Roof tents that collapse down into a sleek hard shell are more aerodynamic and aesthetically satisfying than those that sit under a heavy-duty soft cover. Hard shell roof tents also have a significantly lower impact on fuel efficiency, but they cost more to buy.

Those that use a softshell road cover do have a noticeable impact on fuel efficiency at motorway speeds, we've found. But at under 50mph, they have very little impact.

What are the benefits of hard-shell vs. soft-shell roof tents?

One is improved aerodynamics when closed, which, as we've covered above, lessens the impact on fuel efficiency and reduces wind noise.

Another benefit is that you can leave your bedding inside the tent when it collapses down. Bedding can't always be left inside soft shell roof tents because they fold over to be packed away, so the increased bulk makes them harder to shut

What accessories are available for roof tents?

As standard, roof tents come supplied with a telescopic ladder that allows you to easily and safely access the tent.

Beyond this, accessories include mattress topper pads for more comfort, thermal liners to insulate the tent when it's very cold, awnings, lighting, storage accessories, and security nuts for the attachment bolts.

Do roof tents come with built-in lighting?

Some high-end models do, but most do not.

About the authors

Oli Reed is the group editor at Live for the Outdoors (LFTO) and has worked in the outdoor industry since 2013, testing kit to the max along the way. He knows what sets an okay product apart from a great one.

Fliss Freeborn is a contributing writer to LFTO, but more often than not you can find her outside. She hikes and camps year-round, so knows exactly how a product should perform to keep you warm and comfortable.

Chris Williams is LFTO's former senior writer. He's worked both as a journalist in New Zealand and for outdoor gear brands and has extensive knowledge and experience using and testing outdoor and camping products.

So you're planning to go camping with your kids. Exciting? Absolutely. But also terrifying in equal measure.

How will you all stay warm through the night? What will you do to entertain them? What will everyone eat? And do you really have to sing songs around a campfire?

The truth is, family camping is nowhere near as daunting as it might seem. In fact, it's one of the best adventures you can have together. Here, we've teamed up with GO Outdoors to bring you nine top tips to help you prepare for your weekend in the great outdoors.

This article is part of our Family Adventure Week, running from 27 July to 2 August, where we’re sharing advice and inspiration for getting outdoors with your family. Keep an eye on the LFTO's Instagram and Facebook pages for more advice.

1. Give your kids jobs to do

The best way to get your kids immersed in the camping trip is to make them feel like they've got a big part to play in it. Hammering in tent pegs, inflating airbeds and washing dirty plates under a campsite tap are all key camping jobs, but they can also be a lot of fun.

It's a bit like asking your kids to help with map reading on a hiking trip – make them feel part of the experience and they'll enjoy it even more.

2. Take games, but don't over-plan

Your first challenge is to keep the kids off screens, which is actually a lot easier than you might think on a camping trip. It's all about distraction. The second they look like they're about to ask for the Nintendo Switch or a bit of phone scrolling, hit them with another camping game.

I never go camping without a frisbee, football, rounders set, badminton net, archery set, boules or a deck of cards... the list could go on forever. Just don't overdo it – they'll get sick of an organised fun schedule pretty quickly.

3. Make the nights warm and cosy

If there's one thing that'll quickly ruin a camping trip for you and your kids, it's cold nights caused by inadequate sleeping bags. So if there's even half a chance of the temperatures plummeting overnight, make sure you invest in some decent sleep systems, or at the very least take more sleeping bags, blankets and duvets than you think you'll need.

Better to be too warm with the option to kick off an extra blanket than shivering through the night wearing every piece of clothing you brought with you in a doomed attempt to stay warm.

See our full family camping packing list to make sure you don't forget anything.

4. Load up on layers – but pack light

Even in high summer, there's a good chance it'll be too cold for T-shirts and shorts once the sun drops behind the horizon. So take a good hoodie or insulated jacket for everyone, so they can stay ahead of the evening chill.

One key tip, though – don't overpack with loads of changes of clothes. If you're doing camping properly, clean clothes will get dirty almost the second you put them on, so just embrace the dirt and worry about putting your best gear on when you get back home.

5. Invite another family

Nothing entertains kids more than other kids, especially when you're away from home somewhere fun and exciting like a campsite. A surefire way to make sure you don't have to spend every waking hour entertaining them yourself is to plan your trip with another family.

Failing that, try to spot some other kids as soon as you arrive, throw a football or frisbee in their direction, and hopefully they'll all make friends and leave you to set up the tent in peace.

6. Make breakfasts easy

Young kids are always hungry, and never more so than when they first wake up. So shelve the plans for fried breakfasts and gourmet starts to the day, and instead fill your camp kitchen with quick and simple breakfast solutions.

Bowls of cereal, pastries, cereal bars, bananas and fruit – anything that means they can eat as soon as they're up and start the day with the energy boost they need after a night under canvas.

7. Let there be light – and lots of it

Guess what? It gets dark very quickly inside a tent once the sun vanishes from the sky. You don't need to spend a fortune on torches or lanterns unless you're planning to camp regularly, but taking plenty of them is well advised.

Make sure everyone has a torch each, plus at least one or two lanterns to hang up in the tent so you can get sorted last thing at night. You'll also want them for lighting outside the tent when you're sitting up chatting long after the kids have gone to sleep.

8. Forget about bedtimes

Even if your kids have a strict 7pm bedtime at home, that's not going to cut it when the sun's still shining on a campsite and the sound of other families playing games and generally having the time of their lives is filling the air.

Camping is a treat, so treat it that way. Let your kids stay up late, explore after dark, create amazing memories, then fall asleep when they're exhausted. It might even mean they don't wake you up quite so early the following morning...

9. Leave showers until you get home

Ever tried getting a dog into a bath? That's what it's like trying to wrestle your kids into a campsite shower block.

If you're only away for a couple of days, pick your battles. Teeth must be cleaned morning and night, but the full hosing down can wait until you get home on Sunday evening.

A final reminder...

Natalie Wolfenden, author and outdoor enthusiast at GO Outdoors, said: "Family camping doesn't have to be about having the perfect setup or sticking to a rigid plan. In fact, some of the best memories are made when things don't go quite as you’d expect. Whether that's discovering a new walking trail, cooking dinner outdoors for the first time, or simply spending an evening together away from the distractions of everyday life.

"Camping gives families the opportunity to slow down, connect with nature and enjoy quality time together in a way that's not quite achievable at home. Children naturally become more curious, creative and adventurous outdoors, and even simple activities can feel exciting when you're sleeping under the stars. The key is to come prepared, stay flexible and embrace the experience. It's often the small moments that actually become the highlights of the trip and the reason you fall in love with camping."

Watch: Expert advice for family camping

The roof tentmarket is getting crowded, with lots of brands and models muscling onto the scene. There’s a wide range of functionality, from fold-out canvas structures to premium hardshell options that pop up with the click of a button, and as a result prices vary wildly.

But if you want to dip a toe into roof tenting without spending thousands of pounds up front, Go Outdoors has come up with a good entry point. The OEX Vertex Lite is the popular retailer's entry-level range, with prices starting below £600 for the solo model and around £100 more for the double (see below).

At around half the price of its market-leading TentBox Lite equivalent, this is one of the most affordable rooftop tent options out there at the moment. But our question was: is it just cheap, or does it actually deliver the remarkable value it appears to?

We took the OEX Vertex Lite 130 for a spin to find out. Read on for our full review...

How we tested

I’ve tested a lot of roof tents over the last few summers, so I followed the same pattern I usually do. I unboxed the Vertex Lite 130 on my driveway and watched a quick YouTube video on how to install it (which took about an hour), then spent another 15–20 minutes familiarising myself with all of the internal and external features ahead of my first camp.

The first overnighter was a local solo trip to make sure I was happy with the setup and the way the tent felt on the car. Then I raised the stakes by trying it out with my two boys (aged 10 and 7). Officially this is built for two people, but we’ve squeezed into plenty of little tents together before – and kids do love roof tents – so they helped me nail that all-important final verdict.

How is it so much cheaper than a TentBox?

This was the question I kept asking myself before it arrived. The Vertex Lite range has a similar look to the market-leading TentBox Lite range, in that it’s a fold-out fabric tent with a telescopic ladder, and side by side the spec sheet doesn’t look all that different.

But Go Outdoors sells the Vertex Lite 130 at £695 if you have a Membership, making it almost half the price of the TentBox Lite at £1,349. They’re broadly similar in size (the TentBox Lite is more compact when closed, while the Vertex Lite is slightly smaller when open), have comparable waterproof ratings, take similar amounts of time to pitch, and don’t look wildly different when set up.

Having tested both models, though, there are a few extra touches of quality on the TentBox Lite. The ladder feels more robust and comfortable to climb, it has more vents and skylights, the mattress is more comfortable, the materials feel higher quality, and the overall finish is just that little bit slicker – as you’d expect from a market-leading brand charging market-leading prices.

So the big question is: should you be paying double the price for the TentBox Lite? Or can you live with a few trade-offs for something that’s far more affordable?

Build quality and weather resistance

For a roof tent costing well under £700, the Vertex Lite 130 has a surprisingly impressive materials list. The tent body is made from tough 210D polyester Oxford fabric with a 3,000mm hydrostatic head, while the separate rainfly ups that to 6,000mm and features a silver coating to reflect heat and UV.

The flysheet's silver coating is a nice touch, helping bounce away sunlight and UV rays to keep the inside cooler on warm days. It also adds a layer of protection against UV damage, which is important for a tent that’s going to spend its life strapped to the roof of a vehicle.

The heavy-duty 600D PVC-coated travel cover should stand up well to life on the roof of your car, and the aluminium frame keeps the overall weight down to just 39.5kg. In short, there’s nothing about the spec sheet that feels overly compromised in the pursuit of a low price.

Where the Vertex falls a bit short is in the finer details, rather than the overall quality. The TentBox Lite, for example, uses a premium polycotton canvas for the main tent body, which is generally quieter in windy weather, breathes better and can help reduce condensation.

That’s one of the reasons it feels like a more premium product overall. But it’s also around 10kg heavier and over £600 more expensive, so the Vertex’s all-polyester construction feels like a sensible trade-off rather than simple cost-cutting.

Comfort and liveability

One difference I noticed quite quickly is that, despite also being marketed as a double roof tent for two people, the Vertex Lite 130 is slightly more compact than the TentBox Lite. The mattress measures 214 x 130cm, which is 6cm shorter than the TentBox equivalent, and that difference is noticeable.

I’m 6ft 1in tall and only just fit when fully stretched out. As I wriggled about in the night, I often found myself with either my head or feet touching one end of the tent. Add in another adult – or two young kids like I often do – and it does start to feel a little cramped in a way that many larger roof tents don’t.

My bigger gripe on comfort, though, is the mattress. The Vertex’s integrated 3-inch foam mattress certainly isn't bad, but I found it quite firm. I recently tested the RoofBunk Explorer Super XL and its memory foam mattress was so comfortable it genuinely felt like sleeping in my own bed at home.

The Vertex doesn't deliver that same level of luxury. It’s padded and supportive enough – this is camping after all, not a hotel suite – but it does lack the premium feel I’ve experienced from rival brands.

The internal headroom is decent at 93cm, and I had no issue sitting upright inside. But again it’s slightly lower than the TentBox Lite, which gives you around 105cm of internal height. That extra space makes a difference when you’re getting changed, sitting around during bad weather or just chilling out inside.

I like the simplicity of the window setup, with one on each side and another at the rear of the tent, plus the ability to unzip part of the roof to let extra light in. I would have liked a proper skylight, but that’s another compromise you have to accept at this price point.

Storage is well thought out. There are two handy internal pockets for things like phones, keys and torches, plenty of attachment points for hanging lanterns, and two well-sized boot bags that dangle outside the tent (see below), giving you somewhere to stash footwear after climbing the ladder.

Speaking of the ladder, this is probably my biggest frustration. It feels a little flimsy compared with the rest of the tent, and the angle of the rungs can dig into your feet if you climb it barefoot. What I'd love to see here is the angle of the rungs adjusted so they lay flat once the tent is fully pitched. Again, you have to keep the price point of the Vertex Lite in mind when being too picky, but it’s a noticeable weak point on an otherwise impressive-value roof tent.

One last point worth mentioning is that, as this is a single-skin tent, it is prone to condensation. We tested in high summer during a heatwave, so we had the windows open to vent all night and it wasn’t a huge issue. But there was still a little bit of water buildup build-up in the mornings. This is similar with many comparable roof tent models, though, so don’t let it put you off.

Ease of pitching

This is where the Vertex Lite really comes into its own. The Go Outdoors website states that it ‘takes seconds to set up’, which is a bit of an exaggeration, but I’d say that once you’re familiar with it, it should take no more than five minutes.

You simply unclip the four corners of the travel cover and drag it off, undo the buckle that’s used to compress the tent when closed, then unfold it using the telescopic ladder as a lever. Once the tent is unfolded and you’ve adjusted the ladder to the correct angle, the only thing left to do is unclip and extend the short telescopic pole that keeps the porch roof in place – and you’re done.

It’s an incredibly simple design that’s just as easy to take down when you’re ready to go again, which for me is a big bonus. One of the main drawbacks of roof tents is that whenever you want to use your car on a camping trip, you need to pack the tent away. So the simpler that process is, the better. Because there isn’t a lot of excess fabric on the Vertex Lite (often caused by large porch areas or venting awnings), it packs down quickly without you having to spend ages stuffing loose material back inside.

Compressing the tent ready to refit the cover is easy too, thanks to the adjustable strap and plastic buckle (below) that holds it in place. Many of the Vertex Lite’s competitors use Velcro straps for this, which are nowhere near as secure.

It’s also worth saying I found the Vertex Lite easier to attach to my car than most roof tents I’ve used. It uses a similar format to most others (four brackets that attach to the underside of the roof bars with bolts), but rather than fiddling with a spanner, there’s a simple plastic hand-tightened nut that you rotate to secure them – so no tools are required.

It takes between 30–60 minutes to fully attach and feel confident that the installation is secure, but you make that time back with the speedy pitching time if you keep it on your car for a few trips.

Portability and compatibility

Weighing just 39.5kg, one of the big selling points of the Vertex Lite 130 is that it’s one of the lightest two-person roof tents on the market. As a result, it can be fitted to almost any car with suitable roof bars. It would certainly look and feel more at home on something like an SUV, but we’ve seen it used on models like Ford Fiestas and VW Golfs.

The key thing to check before purchasing is the dynamic load rating of your roof bars. Go Outdoors recommends that your roof bars or rails have a minimum dynamic load rating of 50kg, and if they do, you should be fine.

Probably the main things I don’t love about roof tents are, firstly, that it’s very much a two-person job to lift them on and off your car – and that’s still the case with the Vertex Lite 130 despite its relatively low weight.

And secondly, you need good storage space when you take them off. This model is simple enough to detach and lift down, but you’ll still need somewhere dry and secure to store it over autumn and winter so you’re not leaving it attached to your car all year.

How does it feel on your car?

No issues here whatsoever. I’ve been using it on a Dacia Bigster Extreme SUV, which has a sunroof, so anything mounted on the roof is prone to creating a bit of cabin noise. But the sound from the Vertex Lite 130 feels minimal. I’ve driven with it on quiet country lanes and on the motorway, and I’d say you only really start to notice it in terms of wind noise once you hit around 65–70mph.

In terms of how it feels on top of the car, I can honestly say it’s never impacted the way I drive, and I’ve noticed very little change in fuel economy on the trips we’ve done. I wouldn’t want to keep it on the roof for months at a time because it must have some impact, but for short-term use I’ve been very happy with the performance.

Value for money and competition

This is the absolute major selling point of the OEX Vertex Lite 130. If you can bag this tent at the Go Outdoors members’ price of £695, it’s hard to see a better deal out there for a brand-new roof tent.

You can often find Ventura roof tents on sale for around £750–£850, and Decathlon’s Quechua inflatable roof tent ranges from roughly £500–£700, but in our opinion this is the strongest wallet-friendly option currently available.

The big question for me before testing was: how much of a compromise do I have to make on quality for this price? And yes, there are certainly things that rival brands do better. If I were offered the TentBox Lite and the Vertex Lite for the same price, I would definitely take the TentBox.

But as someone who’s reviewed plenty of tents, I’d say the OEX punches well above its price in terms of spec. The materials aren’t cheap – they’re just less premium in some areas. A 6,000mm hydrostatic head on the flysheet is impressive at this price point too.

I’ve not yet used it in truly foul weather because of the summer heatwave, but the Vertex has already had a proper thrashing from my two boys, who use it more like a wrestling ring than a tent, and it certainly seems durable enough.

Verdict

The OEX Vertex Lite 130 isn't the best roof tent I’ve tested. The mattress is on the firm side, the ladder could be better and it does lack the premium touches you'll find on more expensive alternatives. But none of those compromises ever felt like dealbreakers when I reminded myself what this tent costs.

At £695, I genuinely think this is the best value roof tent you can buy right now. It pitches in minutes, feels reassuringly well made, keeps the weight below 40kg and offers everything most people need for weekends away. If you're buying your first roof tent, don’t want to spend four figures and can live without a few luxury touches, the Vertex Lite 130 is an easy recommendation.

There’s a lot to love about family camping – getting the kids into nature, spending time away from screens, marshmallows around a fire. What none of us love, however, is the packing, which can feel like a stressful game of Tetris.

You can attribute the pain of packing to a lot of things. Getting everything into the car is always a mega challenge (in which case, you may want to invest in a roof box).

Making sure you don’t forget anything important can also be tricky, with many family camping trips involving an emergency dash to the shop mid-weekend for something that you forgot.

And then there’s the important task of picking the right kit for your trip. We’re talking appropriate layers and sleeping bags for the weather conditions, games for porch-based fun if it’s raining and the right cooking kit for your family feasts.

All this is a complex business, so to make it easier we’ve teamed up with GO Outdoors to bring you the ultimate family camping kit list, which you’ll find below.

This is just one part of our Family Adventure Week, running from 27 July to 2 August, where we’re sharing practical advice and inspiration for getting outdoors with your family. Keep an eye on the LFTO Instagram page and LFTO Facebook page for more advice.

Family camping checklist – what to take

Scroll on down this page to see everything you need to take on your next family camping trip, complete with product recommendations. For a printable family camping checklist, click here.

For more advice, see our survival guide to family camping.

Family tent

The obvious one and the biggest thing you’ll be packing into your car – a family tent. Pick one that sounds bigger than you need (e.g. if there’s four of you, go for a five-person tent), think about how much living space you want and pay close attention to pack size, and how that’ll fit into your car.

Top deal: Save 45%* on the Berghaus Air 400XL Nightfall tent.

Tent accessories

Electric hook-up is a handy addition if you want to run a camping fridge or use an electric kettle or toaster. Duct tape can be a handy rescue remedy if your tent (or any other kit) gets damaged.

A mallet is another essential for knocking in pegs, especially when the ground is hardened due to lack of rain.

Sleeping kit

A decent sleeping mat or airbed is vital to a good night’s sleep. These can range from a basic flock airbed to something more substantial like this Berghaus Air Double Self-Inflating Mat (which has 38%* off) gives you memory-foam-like comfort and year-round warmth. Just don’t forget a pump!

Sleeping bags are also key. Sure, you can take a duvet from home, but they’re far bulkier and less thermally efficient. You can opt for a double sleeping bag or a single sleeping bag, though if you have young kids, we’d recommend taking specific children’s sleeping bags for them – if there’s too much space in a sleeping bag, they can be harder to keep warm.

You’ll also want to remember pillows (you can get lightweight, packable ones for camping), something to sleep in, ear plugs (for the snorers in the next tent) and an eye mask (for the early morning light, unless your tent has a blackout bedroom).

A word of warning. Even in the midst of a heatwave, your tent will get cool in the night, so don’t be tempted to rely on a blanket or super thin sleeping bag. Oh, and make sure you pack plenty of warm layers for lazing around camp, too!

Camp kitchen equipment

You can pick and choose here. You can easily keep this minimal if you plan to eat at a pub every night, or if there’s a pizza truck or something similar on site, in which case you only need to worry about breakfast (get pastries and cereal bars for a low-effort brekkie) and lunch.

If you intend to cook then you’ll need a camping stove (or a barbeque, if you’d prefer that) – ideally a double burner if you’re cooking for the whole family, though wide single burners can work if you’ll only be cooking one-pot wonders.

Then you’ll need the correct gas (check it has the right connection), a lighter or matches, pots or pans, cooking utensils, plates or bowls, cutlery and potentially a tin opener, depending on what you’re cooking.

Don’t forget little essentials like cooking oil, salt and pepper and sauces (stock up on sachets when you’re at hotels or fast food chains).

A camping fridge or a cool box are essential if you’re doing lots of cooking, while you’ll also want to take some form of washing up bowl, washing up liquid and a tea towel.

And finally, if you have electric hook-up, you may want to take a small toaster or kettle, though your camping stove can also be used for both.

You can find some great camp kitchen offers right here.

Lighting

Make sure you pack some form of camping light or lantern to keep things lit up at night, while a couple of head torches will help you navigate the campsite (and your tent) without tripping over guy lines.

Camp furniture

Camping chairs and a camping table are pretty essential if you want everyone to enjoy the camping trip – otherwise, you’ll be sat on the cold, hard floor.

Think about what type of table you need and how easily it’ll fit into your car. Do you plan to eat at a table or on your lap? Would a small table work to cook on and use as a coffee table? Or do you need something bigger?

Other essentials

You also won’t want to forget bin bags, spare toilet roll, wet wipes, a bottle opener, spare batteries, personal medication, a first aid kit, sun cream, anti-bac handwash, insect repellent and a multitool. I tend to keep that latter item to hand in the tent through the night so it can be used to create a quick exit through the flysheet in case of an emergency (such as a fire).

I’d also recommend packing a lot of these smaller items into a couple of storage boxes. It helps with transport, but also makes it easier for you to keep the tent organised throughout your trip – there’s nothing worse than everything being spread out all over the place.

Don’t forget your toiletry bags and towels, either, while a pair of flip flops per person is incredibly handy for late-night toilet trips or shower runs.

Oh, and don’t forget to take water bottles so you can stay hydrated throughout the day.

Optional extras

Some people will be tempted to take a portable toilet to avoid late-night walks to the bathroom block, though this isn’t an essential.

A windbreak can be helpful for added privacy and keeping your seating/cooking area protected on a windy day, but you can easily get by without one.

You may want to take a brush to help keep your tent nice and clean, while spare tent pegs can be useful if you think you don’t have enough or the ones you do have aren’t very good.

A lot of people take a water container camping with them, which can be handy to save you from repeated trips to the drinking tap, but if you’re not on a very large campsite, you may not have to walk far anyway.

Finally, you’ll probably want to pack a couple of games to help occupy everyone – a football, frisbee, Uno or Dobble all work well.

Full family camping checklist

Remember, you can download a printable checklist by clicking here or you can copy and paste the full compacted list below into your notes app on your smartphone.

• Tent

• Electric hook-up (optional)

• Mallet

• Duct tape

• Sleeping mattresses

• Pump

• Warm layers

• Sleeping bags

• Pillows

• Eye mask and ear plugs (optional)

• Camping stove

• Gas for your stove

• Barbeque and fuel (optional)

• Pots and pans

• Lighter or matches

• Cooking utensils

• Plates or bowls

• Cutlery

• Tin opener (optional)

• Cooking oil, salt and pepper, sauces

• Camping fridge or cool box (optional)

• Washing up bowl, washing up liquid, tea towel

• Electric toaster and kettle (optional)

• Camping lantern(s) and head torches

• Camping chairs

• Camping table

• Bin bags

• Spare toilet roll

• Wet wipes

• Bottle opener

• Spare batteries

• First aid kit and personal medication

• Sun cream

• Anti-bacterial handwash

• Insect repellent

• Multitool

• Water bottles

• Flip flops

• Toiletry bags and towels

• Games

Take the stress out

Natalie Wolfenden, author and outdoor enthusiast at GO Outdoors, said: “Camping has long been one of the most accessible and rewarding ways for families to spend quality time together outdoors, but a little preparation can make a huge difference to the overall experience. Having a clear packing checklist helps take the stress out of getting away, ensuring you have the essentials covered while avoiding unnecessary last-minute purchases or forgotten items.

“When camping with children, comfort and practicality are often the key considerations. Choosing the right sleeping kit, preparing for changing weather conditions and planning simple meal solutions can help families feel more confident and make the most of their time outside.

“The beauty of family camping is that it doesn’t need to be complicated. With the right equipment and a bit of forward planning, families can focus less on logistics and more on creating lasting memories together in the outdoors.”

The GO Outdoors Member’s card unlocks exclusive prices across departments and can be purchased online or in-store, priced at £5 for an annual membership. All products are subject to availability and are available while stocks last.

After more than a decade of soggy socks, bashed up pork pies and making polite conversation with the midgie-bitten masses, here are the things outdoor writer Fliss Freeborn would banish to Hiking Room 101 faster than you can say “lovely day for it” in the driving rain.

Admittedly, this list could have been longer, but we decided to focus on the biggest, most irritating pet peeves – quality over quantity, if you will. But do get in touch and tell us what pet peeves you'd be sticking in your own Hiking Room 101 after reading...

1. The “I don't need waterproofs, it's July” brigade

Optimism is charming, but a soggy fleece which smells like a wet spaniel is not. For the love of God, just bring a jacket.

Don't have a decent one? See our list of the best waterproof jackets and best waterproof trousers for inspiration.

2. Chatty uphillers

I love a natter. I really do. But not when I’m wheezing up something near-vertical and you’ve decided now is the time to discuss politics, pilates or your divorce. I’ll talk to you at the trig point.

3. Dogs in jumpers with Instagram accounts

This is a proper grumpy one because, really, it’s doing no harm to anyone. But if your whippet is sponsored by Ruffwear and is wearing a colour-coordinated boot/sock combo for summit pictures, I’m going to be irrationally miffed. Sorry.

4. Snack stealers who “didn't realise it was a long walk”

These people turn up with one fun-size chocolate bar and somehow think they’re entitled to all of your snacks too. I’ve taken to bringing extra for my top culprits, but it doesn’t mean it’s not annoying.

To make sure this isn't you, here's our list of the best hiking snacks.

5. Head-to-toe in (insert any expensive brand here)

It’s a free world and people can spend their money how they like. But when I see a person of a certain wealth bracket parading around in brand-spanking new branded Gore-Tex Pro like they own the place, my blood begins to boil. Give me Bams in tracksuits any day over Richard in his £675 waterproof jacket. (It’s also probably Richard’s Range Rover – see grump number 10).

6. Earnest use of the phrase ‘off-grid’

The truth is, there is almost no true wilderness left in Britain. Bar a few places in Scotland, you’re never really more than 20km from full 4G or the nearest Spar shop. Not to mention the fact you’ve brought two power packs, a solar panel and will be posting your adventure on Instagram as soon as you get a whiff of signal.

7. People who don't say “hello” back, or even smile back

I’M NOT TRYING TO SELL YOU LIFE INSURANCE! JUST BE NICE BACK!

8. Toilet tissue tyrants

Obviously this applies to all littering, but ladies, we really need to quash the belief that because it’s made of paper, it’ll bio-degrade. It won’t and I don't want to look at it. Bury it or take it home with you.

9. Bluetooth speakers at full volume

Look, if you’re completely alone, with no one to chat to and there’s not a soul within 5km, then fine. Blast your mid-noughties bangers all you want. But as soon as you see the silhouette of another person, switch that crap off and respect your fellow walkers. Harumph.

10. Selfish, stupid parking

Get your Range Rover off that soft verge before I key the damn thing.

11. The disappearing companion

You’re on a hike with someone you presumably thought was a friend, until they leave you for dust at the first uphill and you basically spend the day on your own. It’s sad, lonely and infuriating. Don’t do this, especially if you’re a man out with a lady. She won’t be impressed by how fast you are, promise.

12. The overenthusiastic false summit friend

As Morgan Freeman once said, “hope is a dangerous thing”. I know you’re lying when you say the top is just up this next one. Nor is it, actually, the one after. It’s over five more rises, through a bog, and then up a scree slope that looks like it was designed by Frank Gehry on shrooms.

About the author

Fliss Freeborn is a writer and gear tester for Live for the Outdoors. During her time at university, she spent considerably more days in a tent in the Scottish Highlands than she did in the library, which she highly recommends as a study strategy. Fliss also believes that life is too short to eat bad food outdoors, and that cooking good scran while in the hills is easier than you might think with the right kit and some forward planning – yes, you can always do better than a pot noodle.

The Inov8 TRAILFLY V2 continues the Lake District-based brand’s long tradition of making trail running shoes that work far better than they look. To my eye, this still isn’t a handsome shoe, but Inov8 has never needed polish to justify its place on the trails.

Where Inov8 shines, and has always shone, is out-of-the-box comfort, natural fit and dependable trail performance. The Trailfly V2 is no exception. It’s light, breathable, roomy through the toe box and pleasantly smooth over easier terrain, with a bouncy footbed and 4 mm graphene-enhanced lugs that work especially well on hardpack, dusty tracks and road-to-trail transitions.

It’s not the most protective trail running shoe I’ve tested, and the low heel structure won’t suit everyone. But for everyday trail training, light mixed-terrain runs and longer efforts on easier ground, this is a very capable update.

Upper

The upper is classic Inov8: light, airy, flexible and far more comfortable than its busy-looking upper would suggest. The open mesh feels very similar to the previous version, though the Trailfly V2 now gets more KPU overlay protection across the upper, particularly around the toe box and midfoot.

That extra reinforcement is welcome. As someone who regularly finds the only loose stone on a perfectly good trail, I appreciate the slightly tougher front end. It doesn’t turn the shoe into a tank, but it does give the toe box more resilience than the airy mesh first suggests.

The fit is one of the best things about the shoe. Inov8 describes this as Natural Fit, with a locked-in heel and midfoot plus more room at the toes. The result is a toe box that feels properly foot-shaped, to the point where it makes you wonder what narrow shapes you’ve been calling normal for years.

The midfoot hold is also good. A reinforced KPU overlay structure across the centre of the forefoot helps keep the shoe secure without clamping down too hard. It gives you enough support for cornering and uneven trail movement, while still letting the front of the foot spread naturally.

The heel is where I’m less convinced. The Trailfly V2 is a low-to-the-ground shoe in general, and the rear structure feels particularly minimal. The collar around the Achilles sits lower than it looks, and there isn’t a huge amount of support or structure at the back of the shoe. This sensation may be exaggerated by the thick Boomerang footbed, which lifts your foot slightly within the shoe, but the result is the same: the heel doesn’t feel as locked down or confidence-inspiring as the midfoot.

It’s not sloppy, exactly. It just feels a bit low and exposed, especially on difficult downhills or sustained descents. Runners who like a more structured heel counter may find this slightly underbuilt.

Breathability, though, is excellent. The mesh is open enough that you can feel air moving through the shoe when running at pace. On warm days, that makes the Trailfly V2 feel light and refreshing rather than clammy and overbuilt.

Midsole

The Trailfly V2 uses Inov8’s Powerflow Pro midsole, paired with a 6mm Boomerang footbed. That footbed is a real feature. I liked it in the previous Trailfly, and I still like it here. It gives the shoe a noticeable bit of spring and bounce underfoot, especially compared with plenty of firmer, more stripped-back trail shoes.

The ride is smooth and slightly soft and easy, without tipping into full maximalist wobble. This isn’t a max-cushioned ultra shoe and it doesn’t have the towering stack of Inov8’s more cushioned Trailfly Max, but it still feels far from minimal. There’s a proper heel-to-toe drop and a thick enough bed of foam to make easier trails feel forgiving.

That makes it a good option for road-to-trail running. On tarmac link-ups, compacted gravel and flowing hardpack, the Trailfly V2 rolls along nicely. It’s light, easy and comfortable, with enough cushioning to take the sting out of repeated impacts.

What it lacks, for me, is a bit of midsole give and trail feedback. I like feeling what’s happening underfoot, especially on technical ground, and the Trailfly V2 can feel slightly insulated from the surface beneath it. It’s not dead or dull, but it doesn’t quite give me the precise terrain information I want when the trail gets sharper, rockier or more awkward.

On long sustained declines, I also found the footbed could generate some heat under the balls of the feet and toes. It wasn’t severe enough to stop and deal with, but the hotspots were noticeable. For everyday runs, I wouldn’t worry too much. For ultras, I’d be more cautious.

That’s partly because of the underfoot feel and partly because, in my experience, Inov8’s ultralight approach can be a double-edged sword. These shoes are impressively light at 304g, but they can also feel a little skimpy and unprotective when compared with more armoured trail shoes. Some runners will love that. As someone who likes the armoured feel of the Scarpa Ribelle Run 2, I feel slightly under-shoed in them.

Outsole

The outsole is one of the Trailfly V2’s strongest areas. Inov8 uses its G-GRIP graphene rubber, with 4 mm lugs designed for hard and rocky ground. The brand says the V2 compound has been reformulated to improve wet slip resistance compared with the first-generation Trailfly series, and the grip does feel dependable across the sort of mixed terrain this shoe is clearly built for.

The lug pattern is not made up of sharp, aggressive spikes. Instead, the outsole uses large, wide, multi-directional lugs that behave more like tyre tread than individual studs biting into soft ground. That makes the Trailfly V2 excellent at transitions: road to gravel, hardpack to dusty trail, smoother woodland path to firmer rocky track.

It also transitions nicely through the stride. There’s a slight rocker in the geometry, and the shoe feels accommodating whether you’re landing on the heel, midfoot or forefoot. Midfoot and heel strikers get a smooth roll forward, while toe-first runners won’t find anything intrusive or clumsy at the front.

The toe end of the outsole has the sharpest, most aggressive lug shapes on the shoe, which helps with toe-off and propulsion. There’s no extra roughening or texturing across the rubber faces, though, so most of the grip comes from the compound and lug layout rather than lots of little friction-enhancing details.

In practice, I found the Trailfly V2 more comfortable on dusty trails, muddy paths and firm, flowing routes than on sharp rocky ground. The grip is good, but the shoe doesn’t provide the same level of protection or precision as more technical mountain-running options. It’s happier cruising across changing surfaces than battering through jagged terrain.

That is use case rather than failure. This is a hard-ground trail shoe for runners who want lightness, comfort and adaptability, not a fell shoe, mud shoe or rock-hopping weapon.

Price and competition

At £130, the Inov8 Trailfly V2 sits in a competitive but reasonable part of the trail running market. It’s not cheap, but it’s also less expensive than many premium technical trail shoes, especially those with higher stacks, plates or specialist mountain-running builds.

Compared with the Scarpa Ribelle Run 2, the Trailfly V2 feels lighter, softer and more suited to easier miles, but far less protective and precise on technical ground. The Scarpa feels more serious, protective and mountain-focused. The Inov8 feels happier jogging out towards gravel, hardpack and smoother trail.

Against Inov8’s own Trailfly Zero, the V2 is the more accessible shoe for many runners. The Zero's lower, more natural platform won’t suit everyone, while the standard Trailfly V2 gives you a more conventional drop, a smoother ride and more cushioning for regular training.

If you want maximum cushioning for long ultras, the Trailfly Max makes more sense. If you want something faster and more stripped back, the Trailfly Speed sits at the more agile end of the range. The standard Trailfly V2 sits in the useful middle of the range: not the softest, fastest or most minimal, but probably the easiest to recommend for general trail use.

Value is solid. You get a comfortable upper, bouncy Boomerang footbed, graphene-enhanced outsole and a versatile ride for a fair price. My only hesitation is durability.

Inov8 has long been a pioneer of lightweight trail footwear, but that can come with a slight sense of skimpiness. These shoes feel built for good miles, but I wouldn’t expect them to have the long lifespan of heavier, more protective trail shoes.

Verdict

The Inov8 Trailfly V2 is a light, breathable and very comfortable trail running shoe for hardpack, road-to-trail routes and long mixed-terrain training runs. It has a roomy natural toe box, excellent out-of-the-box comfort and a bouncy footbed that gives the ride more spring than you might expect from Inov8.

The outsole is well judged too. The 4 mm lugs are not wildly aggressive, but they work well across dusty trails, light mud, compacted paths, gravel and road link-ups. This is a shoe that loves transitions, both between surfaces and through the stride.

It’s not perfect. The heel structure feels low and under-supported, the shoe can feel a bit skimpy on technical terrain and the footbed may create hotspots under the forefoot on long sustained descents. It also won’t be my first choice for ultras, sharp rock or runners who want lots of protection.

But as an everyday trail shoe for runners who value comfort, lightness, breathability and easy miles over rugged mountain armour, the Trailfly V2 is a strong option. It still won’t win me over aesthetically, but it is a very good reminder that Inov8 shoes don’t need to look pretty to work properly.

About the author

Milo Wilson is a digital writer and gear tester for Live For The Outdoors. He specialises in trail running, hiking and outdoor footwear, with a particular interest in grip, fit and why so many excellent running shoes look like they were designed during a printer error.

Each of us, no matter how fast or how far we run, is bound by one guiding force: the desire to improve. Whether that means a PB, a new distance achieved, higher weekly mileages ticked off… The scope is vast.

So, no matter what your reason for wanting to better your performances, we’ve delved into the world of ‘mixing it up’, so give you some training sessions to drop into your weekly schedule.

Adding one or two of these to your plan, among the regular easy runs, is guaranteed to have you firing on all cylinders by the time the clocks go forward. Whether you’re running up mountains or hunting for a parkrun PB.

Regular running

Sessions don’t have to be fully scheduled affairs. Sometimes just getting out the door will do more than you think for your fitness!

Long Runs

You are longrunning, right? Once a week? OK, good, just checking that you are getting in a few efforts that are a decent bit longer than your easy days. Try adding in an extra-long day every three or four weeks but be careful to take it slowly at first.

Broken Long Run

Is your regular long run not enough? Incorporate an up-tempo section of running, roughly 20-30% of your total time. Like a 90min run with 35min at your regular pace, 20-25min tempo, then 30/35minm at normal pace.

Progression Running

Get out and just run easy for at least 10min, not worrying about anything except warming up. Slowly increase the effort level throughout the run, making sure you finish feeling strong and at a good effort level.

Don’t stress about sticking to certain paces or increasing at a set time; feed in your effort naturally. For a six to eight-mile run, New Balance coach Steve Vernon recommends starting at marathon speed and gradually bringing it down to your half marathon pace.

Hill sessions

If your racing is going to take in a fair amount of ascent, it pays to be specific in your training. And even if you’re not doing the UTMB next year, hill efforts will build good form and boost your power.

Alternating Uphills

Ultra runner and coach Doug Stewart stresses the importance of prolonged hill sessions for longer races. One of his favourites, and a staple of many of his training programmes, is alternating 2min power hiking and 2min fast feet jogging up a steep gradient, repeating for a set time or distance.

You can perform this on the treadmill unless you’re lucky enough to live somewhere with a long enough climb. Doug says: “Not only does this session target the leg muscles in two different ways, but it allows you to experiment with which technique is faster and easier for you on different gradients.”

Step Up The Steepness

Salomon athlete Max Nicholls swears by the treadmill for this one. He preps for uphill races by using an indoor trainer for 3min efforts, starting on 10% incline and increasing by 1% each rep (six in total). Keep the pace the same, with the increase in difficulty coming from the incline.

Hills (with a cruel twist)

Take one regular hill session, say, sets of 5 x 30sec hills with jog back recoveries and walk between sets. But rather than turn straight around and head back down, add 20 lunges (or your favourite leg exercise). Alternatively, find a hill that ends on a flat stretch and run the hill and stride/push for another 10sec or 50m as opposed to stopping at the top.

Sprints

Steve Vernon recommends hill sprints for improving running form, economy and turnover: “Here’s a slightly different take on what should be your favourite session for the winter,” he says. “Run about 10 sprints uphill followed by 2-3 miles at about 10k pace/effort.”

Alternatively, run 6-10 reps of 10-15 seconds on moderate gradient with good surface (which can be on road). Great for after a shorter steady run. Important: Take recoveries of at least 2min, and don’t be afraid to take long recoveries between reps. You’ll feel better for it, and better able to hit the next effort full gas.

Decent Descents

Have you ever considered practicing downhill running? Many of us don’t realise how difficult it can be, which is only exaggerated towards the end of races. Doug Stewart suggests it not only improves confidence, but also technique and ability to pick safe, quick lines on technical descents, ultimately making you quicker.

For a session, try downhill reps of 20, 40, 80, 160 and 240sec, walking back to the top of the hill as a recovery.

Fartlek sessions

Originally developed by Swedish athletics coaches in the early 20th century (so now you know!), these efforts are about running for a set time rather than distance. This style of workout comes in to its own when time is short, as you can plan exactly how long the session will take.

Solid Efforts

3min efforts at strong pace, 90sec easy between. Start out with four if you’re a beginner, progress up to eight or even more for more seasoned runners. Simple, effective fartlek.

Push Harder

Sets of 2min moderate aerobic, 30sec push, 30sec recovery between these, and 2min between sets. The 2min reps should be testing but manageable, followed by 30s where you have to focus on running economy and terrain whilst tired. Repeat six times or more. Recoveries are easy running/jogging.

Minute on/off

This is so versatile, it should be a staple for any runner whether training for 400 metres or ultras. Top UK ultra runner and coach Damian Hall points to the classic one minute hard, one minute easy session as a great way to vary speed and keep running fun regardless of experience level and ability. It can also be a good way to break up the time in the middle of a long run.

Go Longer

Sets of 5min, 3min and 2min with 2min recoveries between. American trail runner Tommy McClellan, recommends this session for a good mix of sustained efforts and some faster aerobic work. He’ll usually stick to three sets.

Interval sessions

Not just the realm of road and track runners, interval training can add a great sharpener for shorter races or add variety to a training plan. Try them in a group for maximum ‘enjoyment.’

Sandwich Race Tune up

Feeling fit and want to get some zip into the legs before a race this weekend? Try 3 x 5min (or a mile loop). Take the first one pretty comfortably, at a pace/effort that you could sustain for a 10k. Hit the next rep hard – almost as fast as you dare to go. For the final rep, return to that steady-state, controlled effort, just like the first.

Take 3min recovery, walking or jogging between each. The idea is to have the first rep almost as a final part of your warm-up, meaning that you should feel pretty ready to attack the second. The final rep teaches discipline and control.

Steady, Steady, Hard

This is more of a principle to apply to a session than a session in itself, but it’s a great way of mixing things up and tackling a few different effort levels. Basically, run sets of three, with the first two reps of each set at a ‘steady’ effort (manageable but not a jog) followed by the final rep which ratchets the pace and effort up a level.

It works really well for anywhere from 30sec intervals to 1k or so, but can be applied to nearly anything. try applying the theory to laps of a field about 500m around and take 1min between reps, and 2min between sets. The goal is to run as many sets as you feel. This allows for a good volume of work that’s both aerobically challenging but which also breaks up the rhythm at the end of each set.

Variety Pack

For this, you will need a good length trail or road loop (something where you can run for 10-20min without too much tedium), and a good hill for reps. Run 10min at tempo pace (just slower than 10k race pace), 2min recovery walking/jogging to the hill, 4x 30sec hills with 2min recovery, then another 10min tempo at the end.

Feeling great? Add another set of hills! Great for a lot of different types of runner and for different race-targets. Adapt it to suit your needs and goals, making the tempo sections longer
or faster.

Hit The Track

We’re all about mixing up terrain, so if you have one near you, get to a track. Run 200m moderate, 200m easy for 10min. Take a recovery of 2-3min then repeat. If this is too easy, try changing it to 300m ‘on’ and 100m ‘off.’ Track running is perfect for developing a good rhythm and turnover which can pay off in shorter races and on hills.

Kill or Cure!

Steve Vernon also likes to use track sessions, even for longer reps. But be aware, this one comes with a warning from the man himself: “This one’s a killer!” The session is three sets of 2k, then 1k, taking a lap to jog between. Aim for around 10k pace for the 1k reps, and slightly slower on the 2k efforts. This is a perfect way of getting a big volume session from the track session.

Back to Basics

No watch, no set distances. Take all the externals out of it and just run hard for some parts and recover for others. Run between certain landmarks (eg. run this hill and across to that tree; push this lap), or stride out until you feel a certain way. No set recoveries or times. It takes some getting used to but can be a great refresher for the mind and to learn about effort levels.

The extras…

The non-running things that will make a difference come race day! The key with a lot of these is not long, complex routines, but being consistent with them and doing it regularly, even if you can spare only a couple of minutes to do them.

Form Drills

There are a millionand-one different drills out there (the internet is your friend), but a simple routine of a few key ones, repeated over the course of a training cycle, can really help improve running form and economy. Even taking 5-10 minutes after a two runs per week to do a set of skips, and side skips, high knees and backwards lunges can really add up.

‘Mountain Legs'

This is a 3min set used by David Roche, Hoka One One athlete and one of the USA’s top trail runners. He suggests keeping a very simple, quick strength routine is key to consistency. The session is just two key exercises: 20-50 (each leg) rear lunges and 30-100 (each leg) step-ups. Simple? Yes. Easy? Try it and then see how your quads feel the next day!

Get the best from yourself

Five extra tips to keep you firing

Core and Strength

When you feel great, it’s easy to tell yourself, “Hey, when I finish, I’m going to be extra dedicated and do a core session.” This can easily remain a thought, not a reality. To combat this, set a 10-minute timer and do different exercises for 30 seconds at a time, starting and finishing the a set of 1min front plank, 30sec side planks. You can choose the exercises and know you’ll be all done in just 10 minutes.

Cross Training

Often people rely on cross training only when they’re injured, which really gives it a bad reputation! It can bolster the volume of a training cycle with less risk of injury. Cross training can include any nonrunning aerobic activities, such as swimming, cycling, rowing, etc. Want to stay out on the trail? Head out on a mountain bike – just don’t forget your spare inner-tubes!

Strength and Conditioning

Nobody wants to get injured (talk about stating the obvious, we know!), and if you are injured, everyone wants to get fit again. For this reason, don’t underestimate the importance of S&C exercises to injury-proof hips, hamstrings, knees and other crucial areas.

Don’t Forget The Easy Runs

None of these 20 workouts is going to have as keen an effect if performed in isolation, and without a decent base of endurance training. ‘Easy’ pace is that at which you can easily hold a conversation.

Team up for Training

Yes, the mornings and evenings are still dark. One of the best ways we’ve found to motivate us to run when it’s cold and dark is to meet up with pals. Or run with a spouse, friend, dog, running club; anything to give you the kick up the behind to get you out of the door!

"It was 30 times harder than I could have imagined when I started at St Paul’s – I just had no idea.”

Multi-award-winning photographer Quintin Lake is referring to his experience of walking the coast of Knoydart – a gloriously rugged expanse of unforgiving wilderness in north-west Scotland.

“It’s just days and days without a single hint of a path,” he recalls. “And the cliffs go right down to the sea.” He then talks about the added difficulties created by the climate – having to pour water from his boots each night, being soaked through by the end of each day, and returning to the same sodden clothes the following morning. “The best I could ever hope for was to be damp and warmish.”

He isn’t joking.

At Knoydart, progress was slow. “I was only walking 9km a day, even though I was moving from dawn until dusk. The terrain was so difficult and so exhausting. I was constantly having to make these decisions of, ‘do I do this slightly sketchy side-climb on some rocks, or do I backtrack in the wet and the rain to do another two hours of the day?’ For that whole section, the challenge was just to physically be able to do it.”

You may wonder why Quintin was, of his own volition, putting himself through such an ordeal.

He was midway through his boldest ever photographic project – walking around the entire coastline of mainland Britain. The Perimeter – as he named the project – wasn’t just following paths. It was about getting as close to the coastline as possible, even if it meant trespassing or making the journey more difficult.

Maybe I’m just a bit of a masochist, but it was the hardest and best part of the journey.

“Maybe you’ve got a port or industrial area and there’s a little peninsula. The footpaths tend to just ignore that because it’s annoying for people to do a big wiggle if they’re going from A to B. But I would always do the wiggle because often I would find something that was a bit more unexpected.”

The entire route came to a whopping 11,000km (nearly 7000 miles), and it took Quintin 454 days to complete it over more than five years.

Each day he took hundreds of photos of whatever he found – be it a golden sunset beach, the reflective waters of an estuary… or a concrete ferry terminal. “If you open a Lonely Planet walking guide, say, you tend to think the whole country is pubs, rolling fields and dramatic cliffs. But a big part of it is also walking through an urban area, a firing range or an industrial site. And to me, I find that just as interesting.”

Many of his finest experiences were off-path in spots to which almost nobody ventures. And the best of the lot? We’re back to Knoydart again.

“Maybe I’m just a bit of a masochist, but it was the hardest and best part of the journey – without doubt my favourite part of the country,” insists Quintin. “I feel I got my best photographs during that section. I thought, this is a real adventure – I need to put every fibre of my determination into doing this. But I also felt I was being rewarded through it.”

Quintin believes his thirst for hardship first stemmed from when he was 10 years old and his mum had the idea of the two of them walking from John o’ Groats to Glasgow – a walk of about 300 miles. “She wasn’t that experienced as a hiker, and I remember one night we misjudged the distance, and we slept under one of those crinkly foil blankets, literally on the path. For me, that was exciting. I loved going back to school and telling my friends about this adventure under this survival blanket.

“I also loved thriving on the problems. That was the thing that really changed me, because it removed that sense of fear – that if everything goes wrong, you’re not going to die just because you’re a bit cold at night. That was probably life-changing.”

Experiences like these normalised long journeys for Quintin, and when he was 20 he walked from Land’s End to John o’Groats.

“I could pretty much forensically tell you every little bit about that journey, and I think I’ve been chasing that sense of connection with the landscape ever since.”

Quintin trained as an architect, though his passion for photography as an art form went from strength to strength. He retrained as a photographer and began working in commercial architectural photography, giving him skills that benefit his landscape photographs today.

At the beginning I thought, well, what could go wrong? How hard can it be? And this turned out to be very naive.

“In architecture you always think about the underlying structure of things – what the true essence of something is. And that’s how I look at the landscape. If it’s Crib Goch, say, the first thing I notice is the angle of the line, the play of light and dark, the composition that the mountains are making, and then how that will relate to the camera frame. So I’m looking at the underlying geometry of things, which I think is a good skill in photography.”

Quintin thought it would be impossible to actually make money from capturing landscapes. But then, in 2010, he won the Amazing Places category in the Travel Photographer of the Year competition, and his self-belief grew when he started selling fine art prints to fund further travel. The idea for Perimeter began to develop four years later when he was recovering from a case of meningitis and decided to walk the Thames Path.

“I had to slow down. I live in Cheltenham, and that meant if I had a problem on the Thames Path I could get a bus or taxi home. But because I was slowing down, the photography got better.”

After completing the walk, he then tackled the coastal part of the River Severn. “It sounds quite flippant, but I was so fired up with inspiration about this that it was only a couple of weeks after finishing the Severn coast I thought, well, let’s try and walk the whole thing.”

And so, on 17th April 2015, he stood at St Paul’s Cathedral and began the longest walking adventure of his life. “At the beginning I thought, well, what could go wrong? How hard can it be? And this turned out to be very naive.”

To start with, he would walk for two days at a time, but soon realised things would need to change. “The two things I realised quite quickly were that if I didn’t camp, it would become fantastically expensive. And that I needed to block out longer periods of time, or it would just take too long.”

Quintin became mostly self-sufficient, carrying five days’ worth of dehydrated food and camping wild most nights. He walked an average of 15 miles each day, but again needed to re-evaluate how he would undertake this enormous challenge when he suffered two ‘overuse injuries’, as Quintin puts it – shin splints and a split tendon.

“You can’t wing it. You can’t eat junk food, not sleep enough, not stretch, and not expect to get injuries. So I’m actually fitter now than 10 years ago because I don’t drink alcohol, I don’t eat processed food, I sleep more, I stretch more. And that means my body isn’t going to suffer like that.”

But his most frightening lesson of all came near the end of the walk on the apparently benign Holderness coast of East Yorkshire, where the cliffs are eroding away.

“I didn’t know that the cliffs erode five metres a year,” says Quintin. “The OS map shows all the roads going to the edge of the cliff, and normally you would think there’s going to be some stairs to and from the shore. But, of course, there aren’t because they’ve been washed away.”

Quintin got stuck below the cliffs as the tide was rising. “It got to the point where the waves were lapping over my boots and I was trying to scramble up these cliffs which are like wet concrete. That was the moment where I thought I would have to hang on and call the RNLI. That was the most terrifying moment of the journey.”

Quintin kept jogging along, looking for a way up, and eventually found a section of cliff that looked potentially climbable. “Maybe it wasn’t an advisable thing to do, but I managed to clamber up on this loose earth. And I did get to the top and collapsed on my back, shaking with adrenaline.”

But amid the inevitable mishaps on a venture of this scale, Quintin was continually rewarded both by seascapes he knew and those he didn’t.

“I had never experienced Northumberland before, but I thought it was so beautiful,” he recalls.
“It had been quite a sad moment for me to leave Scotland because in England I had to stealth camp, which does make you feel a bit like a vagrant.

"But the next day it was Bamburgh Castle, and the day after that it was the Holy Island of Lindisfarne – it was a full moon and I could walk on the pilgrim’s path to the island under moonlight. And then there were the big beaches like Druridge Bay.”

But what he enjoyed throughout was the continually changing mood, terrain and environment served up by the coastline. For Quintin, this is something that is unique to Britain.

“The geology of this island is mushed together like playdough. All those changes, one after the other, is such a beautiful thing to explore at the pace of walking. There literally wasn’t a single day of this 454-day journey where I was bored or felt the day looked the same as another.”

And this is why he believes walking supersedes cycling and driving as the best way to explore and photograph our coastline. “I think there’s a state of contentment you get with the act of walking which you don’t get in anything else. It keeps you entertained and intrigued, but also allows you to relax, which is what you need for creativity.

“What is the true nature of the Cumbrian coast or of the south coast? I don’t think it’s an easy question to answer, but if you place yourself in it for a number of days and you’re literally smelling it and touching it, I think you can intuitively feel it in a way that you just can’t if you drive somewhere.”

Quintin has depended on walking for many of his projects. It hasn’t just been a vital component of his photography – it has been a vital part of his life too.

“It has given me everything. It has given me inspiration. It has given me a sense of purpose. It has given me health. It has given me happiness. It has opened up a world of creativity for me. I really couldn’t imagine life without it. And it’s so simple, and free, and there for all of us.”

It has given me everything. And it’s so simple, and free, and there for all of us.

Quintin's 3 favourite landscapes

Of the thousands of photos Quintin took on his journey around the perimeter of Britain, here are three which gave him particular moments of joy.

1. Skiary, Knoydart, Highland

“Skiary is a tiny cottage next to Loch Hourn in the north of Knoydart. You’ve got these layers of granite mountains rising up with the mist. It’s so epic and is my favourite image of the whole project. When I started the journey walking into Kent, I never believed that the island would contain that drama. I mean, it’s something I’d imagine you would have in a Norwegian fjord, not in Britain.”

2. Barmouth Bridge, Gwynedd

“This is my favourite image in Wales. In the background you’ve got Cadair Idris, and it’s all misty and the tones are beautiful. And it’s really harmonious because the bridge adds to the landscape and so does the nature.”

3. Bristol Channel from Exmoor, Somerset

“The South West Coast Path actually goes along the edge of Exmoor, so it’s really quite high overlooking the Bristol Channel. I took a photo across the channel where the clouds form these kind of bands which mirror the horizon. And then you get this hint of Wales in the distance. That’s my favourite image in England… ironically, of Wales.”

There’s a version of camp cooking that involves a battered pot, a sputtering stove and a resigned acceptance that everything will taste slightly burnt. It doesn’t have to be this way. The reason Primus has been making outdoor cooking equipment since 1892 is because this pioneering Swedish brand realised early on that, done right, cooking outside is one of the great pleasures of being outdoors, and that it deserves to be taken seriously.

The range has evolved considerably since that first soot-free kerosene stove was built in a Stockholm workshop. Today it spans compact two-burner campsite stoves, portable grills that will do justice to any ingredient, versatile cook sets for backcountry trips and a thoughtfully designed suite of tools and utensils that make the difference between a functional camp kitchen and a gourmet one. Here’s how to build the ultimate setup.

The Stove: Moto Two-Burner Stove

Any serious camp kitchen starts with a reliable heat source, and Primus' brand-new Moto Stove is the ideal foundation for any setup. Two 4,400W burners with independent flame controls give you the flexibility to boil a pan of water and simmer a sauce simultaneously – the kind of dual-flame control that’s effortless when you have it and conspicuously absent when you don’t. Wraparound windscreens protect both burners in breezy conditions, and an integrated Piezo igniter means no fumbling for a match.

The powder-coated steel body is durable and easy to clean, with a stainless steel and nickel-chrome cooking surface that wipes down quickly after use. The low-profile design packs neatly into a car boot or campervan without taking up meaningful storage space, and the built-in carry handle makes setup and pack-down straightforward. Connect directly to a regular screw-in canister – no adapter needed – and you’re cooking on gas within seconds of stopping.

With the capacity to feed up to five people, the Moto is the kind of stove that soon earns its place on every trip, becoming the first piece of camping kit you pack.

Click here to get yours.

The Grill: Kuchoma Portable Grill

While the Moto handles the everyday cooking, the Kuchoma handles the occasions when you want to do something more with your evening meal.

A horizontal burner tube delivers even heat and 2,500W of grill power, while the deep steel hood seals in heat for controlled cooking. Foldable legs raise the grill to a comfortable working height and free up tabletop space, while the ceramic non-stick grill grate is removable for easy cleaning – and dishwasher safe if you save it ‘til you get home.

The most portable grill on the market, it carries in one hand, locks closed for transport, and takes up barely more space than a large griddle pan.

Sear, grill, toast or slow-cook under the hood. For anyone who thinks grilling out is too much hassle, the Kuchoma will change their mind.

Tap this link to find out more.

The Cookware: Essential Trek Pot Set

For those heading further afield – away from the campsite and into the hills – the Essential Trek Pot Set covers the bases without adding unnecessary weight. A 1-litre pot with frying pan lid and a 0.6-litre pot nest together into a compact package that fits into any rucksack without drama. Hard-anodised aluminium construction means fast, even heat distribution and easy cleaning in the field.

Between the two pots you have enough capacity for a proper backcountry meal for one or a reasonable feed for two – pasta, rice, one-pot stews, rehydrated meals, morning porridge. Meanwhile, the flat-bottomed mini frying pan does double duty as a pot lid. Simple, sensibly designed, and built to last.

Take a closer look here.

The Prep: Campfire Prep Set

Good ingredients deserve proper preparation, and the Campfire Prep Set is the piece of kit that elevates a camp meal from functional to memorable. Three solid oak cooking utensils – a spoon, an oversized fork and a flat-edged scraper – cover most cooking situations, joined by a stainless-steel grater and a 12cm knife, all housed in a compact storage roll made from rugged PU-coated G-1000 polycotton. It keeps everything together and protects it in transit.

The oak utensils are naturally self-disinfecting – a quiet but meaningful advantage in the field. It’s the kind of well-considered detail that runs through the Primus range: features that earn their place through usefulness rather than novelty.

Grab your Campfire Prep Set now.

The Kettle: LiTech Coffee/Tea Kettle 1.5L

A proper brew is, for many campers, non-negotiable. The LiTech Kettle makes morning tea or evening cocoa easy: hard-anodised aluminium heats water fast and efficiently, and the narrow pour spout gives you the precision control that pour-over coffee demands. The folding handle pivots up for pouring and folds flat for packing, while the 1.5-litre capacity is enough for multiple cups.

Love brewing on camp? Get your LiTech Kettle now.

The Complete Kit: Trail Cooking Kit + Coffee Press

Lastly, for those who want a single, compact solution that covers all the bases, the Trail Cooking Kit with Coffee Press is the answer. A complete trekking kitchen for one to two people, it includes everything needed for outdoor cooking (1-litre anodised aluminium pot with pour spout plus frying pan/lid and included handles), plus an integrated coffee press – invented in Sweden, handcrafted in Europe, and designed to pack down into one neat, self-contained unit.

Whether you’re a new wild camper putting together your first kit or an experienced backpacker consolidating a system that has grown unwieldy over the years, it presents a compelling case for simple and effective design.

Get yours here.

From a campervan kitchen to a solo overnight bivvy, the Primus range gives you the tools to cook properly wherever you are. Visit the Primus website to build your camp kitchen setup.

Primusequipment.co.uk is not intended for individuals under the age of 18 and age verification may be requested for the purchase of some items.

Primus-Silva Ltd 02413508 Registered Address 85 Great Portland Street, London, W1W 7LT

The National Three Peaks challenge involves approximately 462 miles of driving and 23 miles of hiking – a logistical undertaking that often means a cramped minibus, a sleepless night and several motorway service stations.

Tens of thousands of walkers attempt the challenge each year. For many it's a memorable taste of Britain's peaks – but that popularity comes at a cost. The challenge has received a fair amount of criticism over the years. Groups rushing to beat the clock contribute little to the local economies they pass through, whilst some leave litter on the mountains, stray from established paths and drive dangerously on rural roads.

What if you want the sprit of the challenge without the midnight motorway miles? The good news is that Britain's hills offer more than enough raw material, from alternative challenges to different schedules and mountains. Here’s where to start.

Alternative challenges

The Welsh 3000ers

This mix of ridge-walking and high-mountain wandering over Wales' 15 highest peaks, from Snowdon to the Carneddau, is usually tackled over one day.

Most people attempting the Welsh 3000s challenge tackle it from south to north – starting on the Snowdon range and finishing on Foel-fras in the Carneddau range – but it can be done in either direction. Fitness is key, as is a plan that involves start times, refuelling stops and the ability to stay flexible with dates to suit the weather.

With 3600m of ascent and two deep valleys to sort the wheat from the chaff endurance-wise, the it's a superb mountain challenge for experienced walkers. Due to its difficulty many split it over a weekend.

Yorkshire Three Peaks

The second most famous Three Peaks Challenge, the Yorkshire Three Peaks, takes in three sentinels: Ingleborough, Whernside and Pen-y-ghent. Each present their own challenges, but we wouldn't say any of them are particularly tough for the average hillwalker.

The toughest bit is more the 23 miles walked between them. Most aim for 12 hours. As a walking exercise, the Y3P is a lot less heavy on the carbon footprint than the National Three Peaks.

Ten Tors Challenge

Set among the rock ‘tors’ of Dartmoor, this DIY challenge (traditionally an army-marshalled event for teenagers) involves choosing ten tors from a list of a possible 18 to link in a walk of 35-55 miles. Often conducted as an organised event, it’s typically broken by a wild camp and the target time is 34 hours.

Alternative schedules

Three days

Doing the Three Peaks Challenge over three days makes a lot more sense than trying to cram it all into 24 hours, yet it’s no pushover. You’ll still be covering a hefty mileage in a short space of time and driving long distances during unsociable hours – but the difference is you’ll have a hot meal and a bed to curl up in between the three mountains.

This allows you to sleep beneath and immerse yourself in the unique atmospheres of Ben Nevis, Scafell Pike and Snowdon for a bit longer than you otherwise would have, and enjoy the ascents of each at a rather more appreciative pace.

One week

Take a week and your challenge becomes a ‘grand tour’ of the UK’s greatest mountain ranges. Over seven days you can explore the surrounding areas, such as Glen Coe and the west coast in Scotland, the western Lake District and Snowdonia.

If the weather is looking fickle you can give yourself more chance of getting good views by picking the best days; or if it’s looking promising all week you could even climb each mountain twice by different routes. Which, if anything, gives you more potential for fundraising – as well as doubling your ascent figures.

Alternative mountains

If you’re the sort who likes to make the less obvious choice – and you’ve got a decent amount of mountain experience under your belt – then why not create your own event?

The mountains we’ve chosen all lie within the rough orbit of the 24-hour Three Peaks Challenge, so they should be suitable. However, as there are 8,000 potential combinations here, we can’t actually vouch for all of them.

Providing they’re within relative striking distance of each other, there’s nothing to stop you choosing three completely different mountains as the focus of your Three Peaks Challenge.

For convenience

Foel-fras, Blencathra and Ben Lomond. These are the most conveniently located of their respective countries, in that they sit just off the main thoroughfares that serve them. Ben Lomond is a bit of a fiddle, but it is also Scotland’s most southerly Munro.

For lovers of big mountains

Carnedd Llewelyn, Helvellyn and Ben Lawers. The highest peaks on their respective lists (and the second, third and, er, tenth highest in their respective countries) – and splendid mountains all.

For those who like pointy things

Tryfan, Grisedale Pike and Meall nan Tarmachan. Shapely, sharp and beloved of scramblers, these are sure to test more than just your legs – so don’t rush.

Alternative modes of transport

Boat

No, it’s not a joke. In fact it’s rather popular to sail between the Three Peaks, and there are several organised challenges conducted each year. The most popular is the Three Peaks Yacht Race, which has been going since 1977.

Being relatively coastal, the mountains lend themselves well to triathalon-style attempts and the typical yacht challenge – docking at Caernarfon in Wales, Whitehaven in Cumbria and Fort William in the Highlands – involves 389 miles of coastal sailing, 18 miles of cycling and 72 miles of running.

Bike

Even more environmentally sound than boating, biking between the Three Peaks has become more popular in recent years. The cycle covers around 42km running and 670km on the road, and there's no set route.

The time it takes to cover the distance will depend on your level of fitness, but the record stands at 32 hours 10 minutes, set in 2021 by Angus Young. The experienced cyclist completed the challenge with the help of a dedicated support crew, following months of preparation.

Rail

It is possible to climb the Three Peaks linking most of the journey by rail, though it’s by no means straightforward – and it makes sense to tackle it south to north. The nearest mainline station to Snowdon is Bangor, and to Scafell Pike it’s Ravenglass – so connections must be made and planned from these stations to the foot of each mountain.

The overnight train to Fort William can be utilised for heading north, but to cover the distance from the station to the base of Ben Nevis you’ll need some sort of transportation. A bus or a bike are obvious options, but you’ll have to spread the challenge over three days or a week to make it work.

The Railway Children charity organise a rail-based Three Peaks Challenge if you’d rather someone else took care of the planning, and Ronald Turnbull describes a public transport Three Peaks Challenge in his book Three Peaks, Ten Tors.

About the author

This article was compiled by LFTO digital writer Evie Nichols, with words from Simon Ingram, a former Trail magazine and National Geographic Online editor. Simon is also the author of two critically acclaimed hillwalking books – Between the Sunset and the Sea and The Black Ridge – and has written for the Guardian and Times among many others.

Can just 20 minutes of running boost your mood and your brain power? You bet it can! And we’re not just saying that because we like nothing better than to head off-road for an hour or so. In fact, researchers at King's College London teamed up with shoe brand Asics to answer this question and came up with some pretty sensational findings.

The research team, led by Dr Brendon Stubbs, explored the relationship between running and brain power and mental health, by testing participants in a natural environment. By using EEG technology (an electroencephalogram, or EEG, recording of brain activity), the researchers took five elite athletes and seven everyday runners out of the lab and recorded the impact that running for 20 minutes had on their cognitive and emotional function.

This research shows that with just 20 minutes of running you can have meaningful improvements in memory and in cognitive function. The team proved that, through running, you can reduce people’s impulsivity and improve their relaxation, reduce frustration and build up stress resilience.

Dr Brendon Stubbs says, “It is impossible to overstate just how significant the impact sport and exercise have on our mind. It’s absolutely vital that people regularly move their body to experience those all-important cognitive and emotional benefits for themselves. Never has there been a more important time to become active and experience the mental health benefits sport and movement bring.”

“What is really exciting is that we have shown that it is possible to take research outside the lab and measure real-world changes in people’s brain before and after they have exercised and engaged in physical activity.

The next stage for this is to replicate this study with a larger sample of people so we can further validate and demonstrate the cognitive and emotional uplift across different samples of people, and to also include people who are not used to running, to see if there are greater benefits for them. Furthermore, there may be certain times of day or certain forms of running which are beneficial for you as an individual, so personalised exercise, such as trail running, to help across those mental well-being issues could be explored for particular demographics.”

It's particularly exciting research given the lockdown drama we’ve all endured. Gary Raucher at Asics said, “We know Covid has put even more pressure on our wellbeing. We also know and believe that sport and movement can lift spirits. For us, 2021 is about unlocking the unique power of sport to uplift our minds. That starts with encouraging people everywhere to move with us at sunrise as we commit to our philosophy of 'sound mind, sound body.”

The cold hard facts are super. The evidence from the findings showed that, for all athletes, improvements in emotional and cognitive functioning were objectively noticeable. Additionally, for everyday athletes (those doing 150 minutes of exercise per week) 20 minutes of running improved stress resilience by 28%, and how they handle frustration also improved by over 100% compared to when not running.

Furthermore, when it came to brain pathways associated with cognitive performance, the everyday athlete again demonstrated a significant uplift after 20 minutes of running. This included up to a 26% increase in brain processing speed, up to a 21% improvement in memory, and as much as a 58% reduction in levels of cognitive stress.

This article originally appeared in a 2021 issue of the former Trail Running Magazine.

About the author

Stuart Haw is a Lecturer in Health Studies, researching and educating on how sport organisations and community assets can contribute to improved health outcomes and more equitable participation. Much of his work examines governance, community involvement, and the challenges faced by organisations delivering local health and physical activity initiatives.

Alongside his academic role, he competes in endurance events and trail running, having competed internationally for 5 years, reaching the 2026 Ultra Trail World Finals. Being active within the environments he study provides an additional perspective on performance, participation, and the realities of both high performance and community sport systems in practice.

If mountains could be awarded Michelin stars, I’d give Liathach three of them straight off the bat. Let me explain. In a former life I was a food writer. Occasionally I glimpse opportunities to blend my twin passions of cuisine and crags; generally when talking about cooking mad stuff on the side of a hill. Once or twice, the idea of reviewing a mountain like a restaurant has drifted through my mind, but I’ve never quite found the right mountain for it. Until now.

As I sat down to process my most recent trip to Liathach, it hit me like gold brick wrapped in a slice of lemon: this mountain is a gourmet experience. It could be reviewed as such while only just (I hope) stretching your credulity. So I do hope you’ll indulge me for the following few paragraphs, and then, with any luck, travel northwards to Torridon to see what I’m on about and to gorge on everything this fine establishment has to offer. So grab knife, fork and napkin, because here we go.

It all starts, of course, with the chef. In this case, the cordon bleu behind this exquisite peak is Torridonian Sandstone, whose other successful ventures include Beinn Eighe and Beinn Alligin. Liathach, however, is the most avant garde of the franchise, leaving tried and tested menu choices behind in favour of bold and technical prowess at every turn. If you want safety – a gently braised ascent with a side of pleasant exertion – this is not the place for you. May I suggest the nearby Ben Damph as an alternative; they welcome walk-ins.

My dining companion and I arrived on a pleasant day in early summer, and immediately we were struck by the timeless elegance of Liathach’s setting. The original architect, Lewisian Gneiss, included two separate dining establishments of Spidean a’ Choire Leith at 1055m, and Mullach an Rathain at 1024m, as well as enough outdoor terraces to bully any Parisien bistro into submission.

Though many of the offerings here are seasonally dependent, there is always something geological on the menu – denudation, alluvial deposits, and some heavy glacial action to name but a few elements of Liathach’s amuse-bouche enticements.

On arrival, the mountain’s hospitality is excellent. By around 150m in, my companion and I were being invited to remove our coats and drink unlimited homemade mineral water from the fast-flowing Allt an Doire Ghairbh. Before we knew it, we were onto our first course: a steep but well-crafted zigzag path, which really helped to set the tone for the experience ahead.

There is some light scrambling involved in this delicate first course, but this only adds to the charm. In fact it did what every first course should do, by whetting our appetites for the excitement to come. At around 600m, just as the ambience was threatening to become a little stuffy, the air conditioning came on. I was grateful for the cooler air, not just for my own comfort but for the structural integrity of that chocolatey sandstone, which looks like it could melt if overheated.

Our second beverage of the day arrived just after: we drank in the view down the corrie and over to the north side of Torridon, which was both fresh and invigorating.

A well-placed cairn on the ridgeline signalled the end of the first course, and we were then invited to try an optional second course eastwards. For a small supplemental fee (another 300m in distance and around 60m of extra ascent), the peak of Stuc a’ Choire Dhubh Bhig offers a locally sourced vista of the neighbouring establishment of Beinn Eighe. This is often served with a light dusting of low-level cloud, but we found it to be equally good unadorned. If you can afford it, it’s well worth spending the extra time on this intriguing diversion.

The menu really opened up as we headed west along the ridge. Here we found a fun and inventive third course of crunchy quartzite boulders, scattered around two small but perfect bites of Stob a’ Choire Liath Mhor. This gave way to an absolutely phenomenal topside of Spidean a’ Choire Leith, a conical and perfectly panoramic Munro embellished with more of those quartzite boulders (a staple of the region, it seems). Our glasses were then filled to the brim with a spectacular vintage of Torridonian Viewpoint, this time with a slightly spiced edge to it. (Just to be clear, I literally mean an edge – and a sensational one it is too.)

All good establishments need exposure, and happily, Liathach doesn’t rely on Instagram for this. At the point the OS menu calls Am Fasarinen (Gaelic for “the teeth”), things get distinctly bitey for a few hundred metres, and options split according to dietary preference. Carnivorous scramblers are invited to chomp their way through an esoteric meat-stack of sandstone pinnacles, aged for a billion years for maximum flavour. This is a properly hands-on experience, and as an acquired taste, should only be undertaken by confident diners.

If you prefer to keep your hands clean, you may opt for the vegetarian way round – but don’t go thinking this is the safe choice. The incredibly spicy bypass path is piped delicately along a 600m drop, and is only suitable for those without a height intolerance.

Both options ultimately result in whole-body shivers, but in the most rewarding of ways. This is the crescendo of the meal, and it makes you feel utterly, completely, and terrifyingly alive.

After this course, a welcome palette cleanser appeared in the form of an uphill climb, refreshingly unsullied by dizzying glimpses. This was the perfect preparation for our dessert, which, after a short break to recoup our senses, appeared as a sweet and earthy slice of Munro called Mullach an Rathain, doused in a split sauce of relief and awe.

It matched perfectly with yet another highly drinkable Viewpoint, this time of a west-facing vintage with notes of Skye and other Hebridean flavours, backdropped with undertones of Beinn Alligin. We lingered a while over this one, enjoying every last drop, and every last crumb. It is perhaps the best pairing of the day, so do make the most of it.

The cheese-course descent was surprisingly generous. Funky, contrastive and sharp in places, it included a variety of hard-aged stony paths and softer, earthier scree, washed in Torridonian rainwater. Halfway through, we also were presented with one small, freshly baked Toll Ban, grassy and green, which helped round out some of the more challenging flavours of this course; my only complaint is that I could have had a few more of those delicious morsels of respite.

All in all, we found some of the descent options to be reasonably piquant, but really, in comparison to our pinnacle course, nothing was too difficult, and everything slid down nicely in the end. We were ever grateful for the option to rest on one of the many sandstone wine terraces here, and enjoy another glass of Viewpoint before ending our meal.

By the time we’d finished, we were reasonably tired, but happy and very satiated. The whole experience so far had taken eight or so hours, and as a wind-down and final farewell, we were invited to come through to the A896 for a couple of very flat kilometres of easterly tea and coffee. This is more pleasant in sunny conditions than drizzly ones, but if you’re pushed for time, you can forgo this frivolity and an unofficial taxi will take you back to your car in exchange for the sight of a thumb.

The bill is paid by your thighs over the next few days, but whatever pain is inflicted when getting out of bed in the morning is more than worth it. This is a bucket-list venue; one whose demands are steep, but whose rewards are higher.

Now that I’ve got the restaurant review/mountain article mash-up out of my system, you’re unlikely to see it ever again in these pages, perhaps to your relief. On the other hand, I stick by my claim that if any hill lends itself to culinary judgement, it is Liathach. Book a table, give it a try, and tell me I’m wrong.

VERDICT: Brash, boisterous, creative and bursting with flavour; Liathach is as much a menu as a Munro.

About the author

Fliss Freeborn is a writer and gear tester for Live For The Outdoors. During her time at university, she spent considerably more days in a tent in the Scottish Highlands than she did in the library, which she highly recommends as a study strategy. Fliss also believes that life is too short to eat bad food outdoors, and that cooking good scran while in the hills is easier than you might think with the right kit and some forward planning – yes, you can always do better than a pot noodle.

If you listen to what your biomechanics are telling you, you can improve your form, reduce injuries and run faster. And who doesn’t want that? Here's how to make it a reality...

"Running performance of any individual heavily depends on a combination of different anatomical, physiological and biomechanical factors," says sports scientist and footwear specialist Anna Kosciuk.

“A common misconception is that all runners move in the same way. This is untrue, as running is a relatively free form of movement. Yes, it comprises of certain phases and sequences of movements that all runners must complete to achieve forward motion during each gait cycle (from when the foot hits the ground on initial contact through a full contact of the foot with the ground to when it leaves the ground) but to do so, every runner displays a slightly different running style.

"Styles can vary depending on a variety of form factors, such as footstrike pattern, frequency of steps (cadence) being generated , and step length, which has been found to further affect the position of the foot on initial contact (overstride) and play a key role in running pace development.

"Therefore, understanding your unique and individual biomechanics is key for achieving peak performance , ensuring constant progress in training and maximising injury prevention. By knowing exactly how the body moves and when, with tools such as wearable technology, a runner can successfully identify any weaknesses and asymmetries between the two sides of the body and apply effective interventions to ‘fix’ those issues."

Related: 10 mistakes every beginner trail runner makes

Footstrike

This describes which part of a runner’s foot – rearfoot, midfoot or forefoot – makes initial contact with the ground. Everyone has a natural footstrike pattern but it can be altered by changes in technique, gradient, surface, speed and footwear.

Paying attention to your footstrike may help some runners with injuries. Forefoot striking reduces loads at the knee and possibly hip joints but will likely increase loads in the calf/Achilles.

Rearfoot striking is likely to transmit loads further up the body to the knee and hips. So, runners with knee pain may benefit from a move to forefoot striking, while runners with calf issues may wish to stick with midfoot or rearfoot striking.

To help a footstrike transition, introduce running drills, perform intervals where you focus on experimenting with a different pattern and spend time working on ankle mobility and improving range of motion in the lower leg via static stretches and foam rolling.

Cadence

Good cadence (leg turnover) for runners is all-important, as it has not only been found to improve running performance (pace), but also to increase running economy and manage risk of running-related injuries. Typically, runners have a slightly lower than optimum cadence, especially at the end of a run, when they experience greater fatigue.

According to research, running cadence of between 5-10% higher than the cadence naturally selected by a runner has a positive effect on number of biomechanical loading factors. These include reduced peak ground contact forces, reduced joint loading throughout the lower limb joints, more favourable joint angles at initial ground contact, and decreased vertical oscillation of the hips.

Runners have various options available to them to try to develop their cadence further, including running drills (such as ‘high knees’, ‘fast feet’, ‘heel to butt’), interval training, pace-based workouts and even running to music.

Pronation

Pronation is the inward rolling motion of the foot from when it makes initial contact with the ground and progresses to a full foot ground contact during a single step. It is an essential part of how the body absorbs running impacts, so it’s not something we should aim to eliminate.

Different runners will go through different ranges of motion, and we separate these into ‘neutral pronation’, ‘under pronation’, and ‘over pronation’ categories. If running pain-free, there is no need to change your running technique to modify your pronation.

However, if you keep getting niggles and foot pain and wish to explore whether the problems occur due to an inefficient foot movement, start introducing foot mobility exercises, ankle strengthening and work on single leg balance.

Related: How to transition from road running to trail running

Step length

Step length refers to the distance covered from the point of ground contact of one foot to the point of ground contact of the other foot. Two steps equal one stride. For runners, achieving a good step length is essential, but it requires a balancing act between producing sufficient distance with each step to generate speed but avoiding overstriding.

Runners have various options available to them to try to develop their step length further. Most of these strategies need to be viewed as long-term projects and be introduced for an extended period of time, including: running drills (such as ‘straight leg bounds’, ‘power skip for heights’), strength and conditioning (single leg exercises, plyometrics) as well as ensuring a good range of motion around the hips and the lower leg via appropriate stretching.

5 simple ways to alter your technique

1. Track your running metrics

Monitor and analyse information on cadence, step length, footstrike and other running-related metrics across a number of different runs, ideally performed in different conditions using smart tech such as running watches.

Understanding what your form is in those different scenarios will help you to establish what your typical running gait is, how it changes across different runs and identify form factors which might need improving.

2. Mix up your training

Start mixing your sessions up rather than just sticking to what you know. Familiarise yourself with different types of workouts and try to understand associated benefits – performing a variety of sessions will challenge your body in different ways!

Why not try out an interval workout or running a fartlek instead of another easy run? Or maybe it's time to start utilising power as a performance metric or use heart rate as part of your training?

Related: 10 different types of running explained

3. Perform drills to activate muscles

After a warm-up, dedicate 20-30 minutes exclusively for running drills and muscular activation. Drills are a game-changer for a lot of runners, as they keep the body warm and allow us to maximise muscular activation while working on speed, strength, balance and coordination during short, intense yet specific movements.

4. Focus on getting stronger

Doing strength and resistance training is important for runners due to its ability to make tendons stiffer, springier as well as improve joint stability. Greater leg strength and stiffness often goes in line with improvements in endurance capability.

5: Work on calf and hip flexibility

Without a good range of motion in the lower and upper leg muscles, your body develops compensatory pathways to enable forward motion and shifts load from certain muscles and tendons to others that might not be able to handle it effectively.

Sign up to the Run 1000 Miles Challenge!

Every year, we host our annual Run 1000 Miles Challenge, where thousands of runners try to hit 1,000 miles in a year. It's one of our favourite ways to get people on the trails, and signing up gives you access to lots of benefits, including a 15% discount on running gear at SportsShoes!

Click here to sign up and get your 15% discount code.

The Danner MTN45 Low is a modern hiking shoe with one foot in the brand’s leather-boot heritage and the other somewhere much closer to trail-running territory. It has the sturdy, old-school look of a traditional Danner hiker, but underfoot it’s much more progressive than the upper suggests.

This is not a pared-back scrambling shoe or a precise approach shoe. It’s also not a big, stiff, waterproof walking shoe for grim bog duty. Instead, the MTN45 Low feels geared towards long days, fast transitions and lots of steady trail miles, with plush cushioning, dependable grip and more support than its fairly slim profile suggests.

The result is a shoe that looks like it belongs beside a campfire and performs more like something you’d actually want to walk 20 miles in. It looks heritage, but the sole unit tells a different story: modern foam, serious rubber and a far livelier ride than the leather upper first suggests. But is that enough to make it one of the best hiking shoes on the market?

Design and features

The most interesting thing about the Danner MTN45 Low is the contrast between its upper and outsole. From above, it has a traditional hiking aesthetic, with a premium nubuck leather upper inspired by Danner’s more classic mountain footwear. From below, it looks far more modern.

Danner uses a Vibram N-45 Plus outsole with Megagrip rubber and Traction Lug design, which is the kind of compound you’d expect to see on performance trail running shoes and approach footwear.

The tread has neat chevron-shaped lugs running through the centre, with larger oblong chevrons around the perimeter. These reverse direction towards the rear of the shoe to help with grip and braking.

There’s also a split through the outsole rubber, where you can see the midsole foam beneath. That helps the shoe flex more naturally on uneven ground, rather than behaving like a solid plank with laces. It’s a proper modern sole unit, and it looks much closer to a trail running shoe than a traditional hiking shoe.

The midsole is Danner’s EnduroFoam+, a nitrogen-infused supercritical foam designed to provide cushioning, rebound and energy return. The foam gets thicker under the heel, with an extra lip of support rising around the back of the foot. That gives the shoe a noticeably cushioned rear section without making the whole shoe feel overbuilt.

There’s serious support built into the MTN45 Low, but it doesn’t feel bulky or medical. The profile is still fairly slim through the front of the shoe, with most of the chunk and cushioning concentrated around the heel.

Fit and comfort

The MTN45 Low is comfortable in a very specific way. Under the heel, it feels plush, supportive and well dampened. Danner’s EnduroFoam Plus midsole gives you a lot of cushioning without turning the shoe into a soft, unstable platform, and the slightly thicker heel section does a good job of absorbing repeated impact over long walks.

Another recent Danner hiking shoe left my Achilles wanting for a blister plaster, but I’ve had no such issue with the MTN45 Low. The rear of the shoe feels supportive without rubbing aggressively, and the padded heel structure works well with the soft foam beneath it.

The tongue is more divisive. It’s made from a thin, stretchy, perforated neoprene-style material that reminds me slightly of a wetsuit, though this is still a non-waterproof shoe. It deforms nicely over the forefoot and keeps bulk down, which is great in theory. In practice, there isn’t much cushioning between your foot and the laces.

That matters because the lacing hardware feels more old-school. The laces run through fairly firm metal eyelets, and when you pull the knot tight at the top, it’s easy to create pinching across the top of the forefoot. The little suede tab over the centre of the tongue appears to be there to add protection, but it doesn’t fully solve the problem.

The workaround is to take a bit of time with the laces. Instead of yanking them tight from the top, you need to work tension evenly through the forefoot. It’s a faff, but once you get the pressure right, the fit holds well. The laces don’t spring back or loosen constantly, so you’re good to go as long as you don’t overtighten them at the top.

Performance and grip

The MTN45 Low is at its best on long mixed-terrain days rather than short, technical thrashes. It doesn’t feel like a climbing or big-approach shoe, despite the sticky Vibram rubber. Instead, it’s built for transitions: gravel to woodland, hardpack to rock, road link-up to trail and long mileage where comfort matters as much as bite.

The outsole is excellent. Vibram Megagrip rubber gives the shoe a much more confident feel than the leather-hiker styling initially suggests. It grips well across dry rock, compacted dirt and general trail surfaces, while the chevron lug pattern provides reliable forward traction.

The centre lugs help with drive, while the broader perimeter lugs add stability when the ground gets uneven. Because the outsole is split and flexible, the shoe doesn’t fight the terrain too much. It bends and adapts enough to feel comfortable on awkward surfaces, but there’s still enough midsole and TPU structure to stop it feeling floppy.

That balance is the MTN45 Low’s biggest strength. It’s not as agile as a low, minimal hiking shoe and it’s not as locked-in as a technical approach shoe. But it feels steady, cushioned and controlled over distance. For day hikes (here are our favourite ones in the UK), travel, dog walks, dry mountain paths and long trail days, that makes a lot of sense.

Support and protection

The support in the MTN45 Low is concentrated in the right places. The heel feels well cushioned and reassuringly held, with the thicker EnduroFoam Plus midsole and raised rear lip giving the back of the shoe a secure feel. There’s also a TPU rock plate and mudguard, helping with underfoot protection and durability without adding too much bulk.

It’s not a high-protection shoe in the boot-like sense. The low cut means you don’t get ankle support, and the non-waterproof mesh lining makes it less suited to wet UK hillwalking than a full Gore-Tex hiker. But for dry, rocky and mixed trails, there’s enough protection here for confident long-distance use.

The upper feels sturdy, but not stiff. Nubuck leather gives the shoe a tougher, more traditional feel than mesh-heavy trail shoes, while the breathable lining stops it from becoming too hot and sealed-in. It’s a good compromise for walkers who want leather durability but don’t want the full heft of a classic hiking boot.

Danner also describes the MTN45 Low as recraftable, which is unusual in modern hiking shoes. In theory, that means the shoe can be rebuilt or resoled rather than simply thrown away when the outsole eventually dies. That’s a strong point for durability and sustainability, especially in a market full of footwear that seems designed to give up long before you feel finished with them.

Waterproofing and breathability

The MTN45 Low is non-waterproof, which is worth knowing before you march into wet grass assuming it has a hidden membrane.

The upside is breathability. Without a waterproof membrane, the shoe feels better suited to warm, dry and mixed-weather hiking. The mesh lining helps with airflow, while the nubuck upper gives a decent amount of durability and light resistance to trail muck.

The downside is obvious. For proper rain, boggy moorland or long wet grass, this wouldn’t be my first pick. You can treat nubuck with a suitable spray to improve resistance, but this is not a sealed waterproof hiking shoe.

That makes the MTN45 Low better suited to dry-season hiking, travel and high-mileage days on firm ground. It’s less convincing as a year-round UK walking shoe unless you’re happy to accept wet feet now and again.

Price and competition

With a £240 RRP, the Danner MTN45 Low sits firmly at the premium end of the hiking shoe market. That puts it into competition with high-end trail-inspired hikers, lightweight approach shoes and some very capable waterproof walking shoes.

The value depends on what you want from it. If you simply need a waterproof hiking shoe for muddy British paths, there are cheaper and more practical options. If you want a modern leather hiker with a plush midsole, Vibram Megagrip outsole, recraftable construction and plenty of crossover appeal, the price becomes easier to understand.

Compared with chunkier traditional walking shoes, the MTN45 Low feels sleeker and more versatile. Compared with a trail running shoe, it feels more supportive, more durable and more substantial underfoot. It sits in the middle ground: part hiking shoe, part travel shoe, part heritage Danner, for walkers who want their kit to work hard without looking like pure performance footwear.

Verdict

The Danner MTN45 Low is a well-judged blend of old-school hiking style and modern trail technology. The nubuck leather upper gives it that classic Danner character, while the Vibram Megagrip outsole and EnduroFoam Plus midsole make it feel far more cushioned, grippy and long-distance-ready than it first appears.

It’s at its best on long, dry, mixed-terrain walks where comfort, grip and stability matter more than waterproofing or technical precision. The heel cushioning is excellent, the outsole feels secure across varied trails and the overall shape avoids the clunky, overbuilt feel that can plague supportive walking shoes.

There are drawbacks. The thin tongue can pinch if you overtighten the laces, the non-waterproof build limits year-round UK usefulness and this is not the shoe I’d pick for scrambling, heavy bog or technical approaches.

But as a stylish, durable and surprisingly modern hiking shoe for long days on the trail, the MTN45 Low works very well. It looks like Danner, but walks like something far more modern.

About the author

Milo Wilson is a digital writer and gear tester for Live for the Outdoors. He specialises in trail running, hiking and outdoor gear, with a particular interest in footwear, mountain kit and the fine art of getting irrationally excited about outsole patterns.

We should, of course, take the time we spend in the mountains seriously, behaving responsibly while looking out for ourselves and others. This I do, but I’ve learnt to temper common sense with a generous dose of common silliness. Wouldn’t it be a shame if there wasn’t space to be a bit less serious along the way? After all, what’s life without a little colour? So, when the chance to go wild camping on this absurdly named peak presented itself, it was too much to resist.

The Bannau Brycheiniog (Brecon Beacons) hold many wonders for the intrepid mountain walker. From the rampant, ever-popular heights of Pen y Fan to the quiet westerly hills no-one can remember the names of; from waterfalls you can walk behind to a hill named after a confectionery item no-one in the 21st century has likely ever seen (Sugar Loaf), this national park has it all.

But when you look a bit closer there’s a cherry on the cake in the form of that childishly funny name lurking – or should that be smirking – on the map.

Twmpa. That’s our mountain’s grown-up Welsh name, which translates as mound. It would appear though, that at some point in relatively recent history there may have been a Lord Hereford – there’s no documentary evidence to suggest which one – who wasn’t well respected by those who named mountains.

Back in the day that would probably have been the people who lived in its shadow, with the local name eventually making it onto the official map. It’s a little like that polar research ship the public wanted to call Boaty McBoatface. See, silliness does exist and, at the right time, it’s wonderfully good for us.

In our mountain’s case, it’s a very short stride to make something rude even more crass, so I took that step by deciding I had to spend the night on Lord Hereford’s Knob. And it turns out there’s a song about exactly this by Half Man Half Biscuit. Such are the lyrical delights of this masterpiece that I’d be leading you astray if I didn’t reference them from time to time. The first bit of advice I gleaned from the lyrics was the fact it can get a bit chilly up there: ‘you’re gonna need a jumper’. Maybe I was being naïve in such a literal interpretation, but I packed one anyway.

Once my jumper was folded and safely stowed, I put the rest of my plan into action and walked up from Hay-on-Wye to Gospel Pass. I’d left it until mid-afternoon before starting out, so by the time I started to climb Twmpa for real the sun was already low and I arrived at the summit shortly before dark.

Being sensible and responsible, I wanted to pitch my one-person tent last thing, then break camp shortly after dawn, thus ensuring I spoilt not one person’s day. See, silly can be sensible. The other reason was I was too embarrassed to explain to anyone what I was doing. You know, in case they were all grownup and reluctant to snatch at these brief glimmers of light in an admittedly difficult world. Luckily, it being late autumn, I saw no-one until the morning.

From the summit that evening, views out to the west were uncluttered and huge. Pen y Fan punctuated the far horizon, above which an inspired daubing of colour grew in intensity. From blacks through to reds, via yellows, oranges, blues and greys, the sky seemed to be melting. Sat on the grassy summit watching that display wasn’t unlike some kind of psychedelic trip (so I’ve been told).

Back in 1967, Allen Ginsberg, the American Beat poet who came to the public’s attention in the 1940s and ’50s, climbed Lord Hereford’s Knob while under the influence of LSD. The experience was incorporated into the poem Wales Visitation, a piece of writing that quite literally trips through this landscape, hinting at the closeness of humankind with the natural world: ‘I lay down mixing my beard with the wet hair of the mountainside/smelling the brown vagina-moist ground, harmless/tasting the violet thistle-hair, sweetness.’

That’s probably enough of that. Now, where was I? That’s right: the sunset. It was nice. Really colourful.

The first hour of darkness, when it came, was even more eventful, even though it was still only about six o’clock in the evening. I’d noticed a few ponies grazing what is clearly common land (I wonder what Lord Hereford had to say about that?). As soon as night fell, they went bat-poocrazy, chasing after one another and doing circuits of the tent. When they passed between the moon and me, they cast a huge, fleeting shadow over the tent. I sat inside, convinced I was about to die under the hooves of moon-maddened mountain ponies. But I didn’t; a fact which I’m still quite glad about.

The morning arrived, right on time. As I sipped my second coffee, I thought I’d watch the sun rise from the summit, a very short distance from my tent. It was while contemplating the scene that I ran through the lyrics of that Half Man Half Biscuit song again and I realised there was a discrepancy. A line of the song goes like this: ‘On touching the trig point, I found my thrill.’

Intent on every thrill I could lay my hands on, I was more than a little puzzled by the fact there wasn’t a trig point. There was only a rather delicate looking cairn – one that, if I touched it, would spill rather than create a thrill. I touched it anyway. I mused further. To the west, according to the song, you should have been able to see ‘Benny Hill’. Well, I couldn’t see it. I spent an age looking at the map; still nothing.

Then I got to thinking about the jumper. The song had been correct in that advice, but I was beginning to wish it had mentioned the need for a coat and, erm, trousers. I’m only kidding, of course. I take my silliness seriously, unlike those Biscuit folk, who clearly hadn’t done their research. As I started my way back to Hay-on-Wye, after a morning exploring the hills to the south-west, I had to wonder if they’d ever actually spent a night on Lord Hereford’s Knob. (It’s just always funny.)

For more of Tom's adventures, read his report on camping next to a haunted house in Scotland.

About the author

Tom Bailey has been the photographer for Trail magazine, Country Walking magazine and LFTO for more than 20 years and is one of the most experienced hillwalkers and wild campers in Britain. He’s climbed more mountains than most people could dream of and is an oracle of knowledge on everything from routes and gear to geology and nature.

It’s often said of show-offs that they suck all the oxygen from a room. Craving attention above all else, they drag the centre of gravity towards them, leaving anyone else in the vicinity to wonder if they actually exist at all.

Snowdon (Yr Wyddfa) is a bit like that. Obviously, we love this mountain. But it does tend to consume the hillwalking oxygen, usually at the expense of those unfortunate hills which happen to share its orbit.

We’re not talking about its close entourage of Crib Goch, Garnedd Ugain and Y Lliwedd; they bask in Snowdon's glory by dint of direct connection and thus inclusion in the classic Snowdon Horseshoe. Nor about the famous neighbours: the Glyders, the Nantlle Ridge and Moel Siabod. None of those hills or ranges is short of love and affection.

No, we’re talking about the satellite peaks that are usually overlooked, ignored, considered unworthy of individual attention. “What’s that one over there?” we might wonder, before Snowdon starts yapping “Oi, stop that! Look at me! LOOK AT ME!”.

Today we put that right. Because not only are these long-suffering satellites great climbs in themselves, they also offer unusual and fascinating perspectives on Snowdon: intimate snapshots that the big celeb hasn’t approved for publication.

So let’s put some oxygen back in the room. Welcome to the world of Yr Wyddfa’s outliers, or Snowdon’s sleeping satellites.

1. Moel Hebog – 783m

The one that: All the king’s horses couldn’t find

We start with the one that is furthest away from Yr Wyddfa. Moel Hebog’s toppermost rock is a shade under five miles from the summit café as the Welsh raven flies, but the distance just means you get to enjoy the spectacle of Wales’ highest peak without feeling overpowered by it.

Thrusting into the sky just south-west of Beddgelert, Hebog is very nearly a free-standing mountain, with only its outliers Moel yr Ogof and Moel Lefn to keep it company. Even its name is beguiling: ‘the bare hill of the hawk’.

It’s also more or less a coastal mountain, enjoying a vast panorama across to the Glaslyn estuary (where lie Porthmadog and Portmeirion) and Tremadoc Bay.

The result is a singular combination of mountain and marine views, stretching from the sea, up the valleys of Rhyd Ddu and Nantgwynant, and all the way up to Moel Siabod, away to the north-east.

The climb starts easily, crossing the scenic line of the Welsh Highland Railway. But it soon becomes rough and rugged, as befits a mountain that isn’t climbed as much as its neighbours. And soon Hebog changes aspect, morphing from shapeless hulk into something more like the jagged blade of a kitchen knife, with unsuspected rock faces peering down upon your progress.

There’s a little scrambling to be done on this rough-hewn footpath, but it’s fun and never too technical. And when you finally pull yourself up to the summit ridge at Y Grisiau, you know you’ve earned the magnificent view that unfolds.

The summit is a benign one; rounded and gentle, with the vertiginous drops to the east hidden. And the view is sumptuous. The Boss commands the most attention of course, seen here in its unfamiliar south-western aspect: a fat dome of spurs and ridges, topped by the tiny pyramid of the summit.

From here you can continue onto those two cute outliers, Moel yr Ogof and Moel Lefn. It’s a fabulous ridge, turning Hebog and its friends into a self-contained range that, if it were anywhere other than in the shadow of The Boss, would be adored as a piece of mountain architecture.

Moel Lefn boasts two exciting pinnacles at the very top, while to the east of Moel yr Ogof’s summit is a cave where the Welsh hero Owain Glyndŵr – the 15th century ruler of Wales and defiant rebel against English authority – is said to have hidden from the forces of King Henry IV.

(That said, it’s worth exploring carefully around here; more than one source reckons the ‘true’ Glyndŵr’s Cave has still not been found and lurks elsewhere on the mountain.)

It’s perhaps easy to understand why Owain would choose this one for his hideout: it’s quiet. Everyone else was probably climbing Yr Wyddfa. And even today, you probably won’t be troubled much by other walkers. Very often, the only sound you’ll hear on the summits of Moel Hebog and its brethren is the Welsh Highland Railway, some 700m below.

Moel Hebog was good enough to hide a Welsh prince on the run. For peace and quiet in a busy National Park, it’s perfect for you too. Matthew Pike

2. Elidir Fawr – 924m

The one that: Has every right to feel angry about stuff

Poor Elidir Fawr. Not the most junior, but perhaps the least loved of Wales’ 3000ft peaks. A sullen middle child, it has good reason to feel left out and hard done by. Yet for all its posturing as the ugly duckling of Snowdon’s satellites, Elidir Fawr can be swan-like when you get to know it at close quarters.

What makes it such a surly beast? Well, not only does it sit in the shadow of Yr Wyddfa but it’s also the forgotten Glyder: part of the same range as Fawr, Fach, Tryfan and Y Garn, but cast aside on a remote western spur that’s hardly ever included in anyone’s day on the Glyderau.

And then, of course, there’s its exploitation by the hand of man. In the space of a century, the Dinorwig slate quarries gnawed away at Elidir Fawr’s south-eastern flank, tearing toothmarks into a grey waste streaked by inclines and terraces.

Meanwhile, what should be a wild cwm on north-western side has been drowned by the reservoirs of Marchlyn Mawr and Bach, which feed a hydroelectric power station buried deep within the mountain.

Beneath your feet (should you be tempted to befriend Elidir Fawr) is a network of tunnels 10 miles long and Europe’s largest manmade cavern. When Britain needs power, and needs it quickly, a surge of water through Elidir’s innards can deliver 288 megawatts in an instant.

But while man has tried his best to put Elidir Fawr off balance, its rocky summit remains perfectly poised: rising proudly and undiminished above the desecration. Pleasingly pyramidal, this crest of interlocking boulders fans out on either side, leading you out along a slender promontory. Eye to eye with Crib Goch, you’re treated to a Royal Box view of Yr Wyddfa’s thrilling northern profile.

So yes, Elidir Fawr might have been robbed of some of its beauty. But look beyond the obvious scars and you’ll see it has lost none of its intrigue. Philip Thomas

3. Yr Aran – 742m

The one that: Laughs at Cnicht’s claim to be the Welsh Matterhorn

Yr Aran is the closest of our secret satellites to the mothership, and perhaps the one that most acutely misses out on the fame of Yr Wyddfa. Not only is it connected to the massif by one of the classic ascent routes – the South Ridge – but it’s also a damn fine peak in its own right: a proud pyramid with pleasingly sharp slopes on all sides and an excellent ascent ridge of its own.

But how many walkers will get to Bwlch Cwm Llan and choose to turn south, not north? How many boots will stand atop Yr Aran’s fine summit, even on the sunniest summer day? Perhaps a couple of dozen, if Yr Aran is lucky.

But what treats that summit offers those who do choose to come to it, including one of the grandest panoramas in Eryri. The Boss entirely fills one hemisphere of course: vast, yet close enough it feels like you could rest your back on it. The world feels like a perfectly designed place from here – hills like knees under a quilt subsiding into pastures, fuzzy-felt fields and the odd bobbly stand of oak before terminating in thumbnail-size sandy beaches where the sea sips at a river-mouth.

Yr Aran doesn’t so much let you go as spit you off on the steep descent back to Bwlch Cwm Lan, from where the foreshortened ramp of the South Ridge rears with fitting might. Climb it if you want/must; we’ll never say the South Ridge isn’t a sensational way to climb a mountain. But keep looking back, because unlike most of the other souls you may meet on the climb, you’re now a paid-up member of the Yr Aran Appreciation Society, and it’s a bond that may just last a lifetime. Nick Hallissey & Guy Procter

4. Moel Cynghorion – 674m

The one that: (Very briefly) pretends to be Yr Wyddfa

I hope it’s not sacrilege to admit I once took the train up Yr Wyddfa.

Actually I’m quite proud of it. Of the people in our party, one had mobility issues and another was swimming in amniotic fluid, so the train gave us all a way to enjoy the experience of Wales’ highest mountain. It brought a tear of joy to the former, and helped to imbue a love of the mountains in the latter (so I like to imagine, anyway). All I had to do was temporarily rewire my brain to see Yr Wyddfa as a theme park attraction rather than a walk.

But the train journey revealed one fascinating feature that I hadn’t truly appreciated before: Moel Cynghorion.

As the train chugged its way up towards the Clogwyn ridge, an enormous grass-and-crag dome appeared across the valley. It looked stunning. So much so that the train suddenly buzzed with chatter and awe: “Wow, is that one Snowdon?”

It’s an easy mistake to make, as at this point it looks far more dramatic than the portly rump up which the train is slowly chuffing. But it’s not Snowdon, it’s Moel Cynghorion. (You can, of course, experience the same sensation while walking the Llanberis Path, but the train carriage concentrated the moment because so many people were saying it at once.)

Later on, as the train climbs higher, it becomes clear that Cynghorion is nowhere near Yr Wyddfa’s height (at 674m, it’s some 410m lower). But for those precious early minutes, it looks better than The Boss – and very few peaks can pull that off around here.

Moel Cynghorion (say ‘kun-horion’; it means ‘hill of the councillors’) is Yr Wyddfa’s next-door neighbour to the north-west. The pair almost touch, with The Boss’s Clogwyn Du’r Arddu ridge dropping to the gap at Bwlch Cwm Brwynog where Cynghorion takes over.

Despite the steep face it presents to the train, the back of Cynghorion is a smooth green slope, shelving gently up from the Snowdon Ranger station on the Welsh Highland Railway. The route starts here and partly borrows the Snowdon Ranger Path, perhaps the most under-rated of all Yr Wyddfa’s named ascent routes, before branching off up the broad crest of Bwlch Carreg y Gigfran.

The climb is grassy all the way. But when you get to the top, the ground vanishes. Instead of any more mountain there is just Cwm Brwynog, 180m below, with the railway and the Llanberis Path way over on its farthest edge. To passengers on the train, you’re now standing atop Fake Snowdon. You look very, very cool at this point.

And what of ‘real’ Snowdon? Well, turn to your right and there it is, presenting a weird and unfamiliar profile which it hides from all but the most discerning hillwalkers.

Cynghorion is also a great place for a twilight climb or a wild camp. Lying to the west of Yr Wyddfa, it catches and keeps the dying sunlight better than any of The Boss’s other outliers, lighting up the summit of Wales in a golden corona before letting it sink slowly into blackness beneath a billion or so stars. You don’t see that kind of thing from the train. Nick Hallissey

5. Mynydd Mawr – 698m

The one that: Even an Eryri devotee might struggle to place

Mynydd Mawr is the one you can see across the valley if you’re climbing the Snowdon Ranger Path. It’s a free-standing meringue of a hill, with broad, sweeping ridges that offer a variety of ascents.

The best of these is the south ridge, which rises from the forests above Rhyd-Ddu and up to the 573m spur of Foel Rudd, before sweeping in a graceful arc to the summit. It offers fantastic and unusual views, not just of The Boss but also a sensational, side-on view of its other more famous neighbour, the Nantlle Ridge.

6. Moel Eilio – 726m

The one that: Is suprisingly soft and springy

It’s easy to forget that Yr Wyddfa has long spurs in half a dozen directions, and perhaps the far reaches of the westernmost spur are the most overlooked. Carry on from Moel Cynghorion and you’ll reach shapely Moel Eilio.

Most of its approach paths are soft and grassy, although a trio of out-thrust ridges on its eastern side offer more exciting ascents. This is the calm end of Yr Wyddfa – which from this angle appears to have twin peaks, with Garnedd Ugain and the true summit sitting side by side.

7. Carnedd y Cribau – 591m

The one that: Really shows you the horseshoe

The small car park on the A498 between the Pen-y-Gwryd Hotel and Llan Gwynant is one of the busiest spots in all of Eryri, because it’s where motorists stop to gawp at the Yr Wyddfa/Snowdon Horseshoe.

Carnedd y Cribau, which rises high above that same road, is like that car park only much, much better. From the car park at Llyn Pen y Gwryd, you can head south over rough ground to the summit, where arguably the best (and quietest) view of the horseshoe unfolds.

8. Gallt y Wenallt – 619m

The one that: Is so close, yet so, so far

Many years ago, Trail was walking in Nant Gwynant with a local expert, who suddenly decided to make a bit of mischief. “I presume you’ve done the real Snowdon Horseshoe, have you? Not the fake one everyone else does?” Okay, we said. We’ll bite. What’s the real Snowdon Horseshoe then?

“Well, you don’t descend after Y Lliwedd. You carry on to Gallt y Wenallt. I have no idea why everyone leaves that one out.”

Gallt y Wenallt. You’ll know its outline, even if you don’t know the name: it’s the one that dominates the whole valley of Nant Gwynant, rising sharply from the shoreline of its titular lake, Llyn Gwynant. Dai (for that was his name) was quite right that it should be part of the horseshoe; it’s a continuation of the Y Lliwedd ridge to a distinct separate summit. But hands up if you’ve done it? Hmm, thought as much.

The reasons it’s not on the classic horseshoe are fairly clear: the terrain connecting it to the Y Lliwedd path is rough and trackless, and it’s an out-and-back detour, unless you’re particularly craving a long, drab and pathless descent into the boggy fastness of Cwm Dyli.

So it’s a bind. But if you do decide to take on the ‘real’ Snowdon Horseshoe, there’s a bloke called Dai, somewhere in the vicinity of Nant Gwynant, who will quietly doff his hat to you.

And there we have it: eight mountains that are proud enough to ignore The Boss and stand on their own mettle, but which will also quietly admit they like a bit of love and attention. And they reward it out of all proportion to the effort of climbing them. Nick Hallissey

On the northern shore of the Mawddach estuary sits the bustling town of Barmouth. Directly behind this ever-popular west coast spot, something geologists describe as an ‘anticlinal structure’ starts to emerge, getting ever bigger and higher the further north you go.

I feel an irresistible urge to call it the tail of a sleeping dragon, but in simple terms, it’s a ridge. In slightly more complex terms, it’s part of what geologists know as the Harlech Dome, but that’s by the by.

This ridge snakes up into Eryri/Snowdonia National Park, erupting in a series of rugged peaks known as the Rhinogydd, or the Rhinogs. And almost from the moment the ridge leaves Barmouth, it acquires a drystone wall; the first of a series which form a continuous line all the way along the crest of the ridge to the summit of Rhinog Fach, 9 miles away to the north-east. The higher sections of this wall look so spectacular that it has become known as the Great Wall of Wales.

The wall is an extraordinary thing; a contour-defying monument to human toil.

I like a wall. You know where you are with them; namely, either one side or the other. Navigationally, they’re often referred to as handrail features: they provide a consistent and reassuring line (assuming they’re going to the same place you want to go). They’re marked on the OS Explorer map for routefinding certainty, they can provide shelter from the wind and rain, and they make a great backrest when you’re having lunch.

They’re also really rather beautiful structures. A drystone wall is held together by interlocking stones placed on top of each other, no mortar necessary.

Regional construction styles have evolved over time; there must be people who know where they are in the country just by the way a wall has been built. (I’m not quite at that level yet.)

What’s more, in Eyri alone there are thousands of miles of them. So for all these reasons, I decided to go and walk the Great Wall of Wales. It did not disappoint.

Walking the wall

A walk alongside the wall was clearly going to need a good plan. There are obvious logistics to solve:
I want to follow a line for just over nine miles through some rather complicated mountains.

Planning is all part of the fun, though. For some of us, the planning stage of a big walk is almost as good as the walking itself: poring over beautiful maps, pondering the connections, picturing the scenery. What’s not to like?

The first big question, of course, is which direction: sea to summit, or summit to sea? I finally decide on the latter, because I like the sound of starting with the tough stuff and then walking ‘downhill’ to the sea, rather than heading uphill and hitting the mountains just as fatigue might set in.

With the extra distance involved in getting to the summit to find the top of the wall, my route becomes more like 12½ miles. And it won’t all be downhill: yes, the ridge does tend downwards, but not without humps and bumps along the way.

Also, the Rhinogs are renowned (notorious?) for their roughness. These hills have not the manicured trails of the Snowdon/Yr Wyddfa massif; they are rebellious and rugged. So there’s no two ways about it: it’s a big day, requiring a decent degree of match fitness. But I have the feeling, as I fold up the maps again, that it’ll be worth every ounce of effort.

Spoiler alert: I was right.

Into the Rhinogydd

The day begins with a lift, in which a friend drops me at the road-end at the foot of Cwm Nantcol, on the western side of the Rhinog range. I work my way up the southern side of the cwm, eventually finding the steep path that grinds its way up the western face of Rhinog Fach, popping me out at the northern end of its summit ridge.

The view from Fach is famously excellent; mountains one way, sea the other. On any normal day, this would be more than enough to excite me. But today, there’s something different: here, for the first time, after two and a half hours of walking and 2000ft of ascent, I meet the wall.

It is an extraordinary thing; a contour-defying monument to human toil. My first thought is, how long must it have taken to build it? The short answer is a long time. The more comprehensive answer is that it takes about three hours to construct one metre of your average 1.4m high drystone wall.

Times that by the length of the wall (15km/15,000m) and you have a monumental 45,000 hours of manual labour. That’s 1875 days, or 267 weeks and 6 days. Then factor in finding and collecting the stone for the wall in the first place, not forgetting the fact that the wall was often built on very steep and craggy mountainsides.

Then consider the difficulties of nipping out to pick up a sandwich at lunchtime, and where and exactly what the toilet facilities were like. And of course where would the HR department have sat? And all those meetings about meetings, and press releases, and questions in the House…

Wait; perhaps I am confusing the enterprise with HS2. My brain is addling. I decide the wall was put there by a giant, and leave it at that.

The first few feet of the wall slither off the summit out to the east. Another wall, heading south along the ridge, abuts it and reminds me that it’s not one but many walls that make up the whole length. Turning with the second wall to the south, I quickly start to descend, the path staying on the western side.

Remember, if you take on this challenge, that you need to follow the path, not the exact line of the wall; that might get you into some trouble in one or two places. It has a habit of taking on sheer edges, as if out of pure bloody-mindedness. Thankfully, the path from this point onwards follows a long-distance trail, the Cambrian Way, and so is usually clear on the ground.

Very soon the path downwards is squeezed between huge rock slabs on one side and the uniform piling of stones on the other. There’s a snug comfort, being high up in that notoriously rugged mountain range, knowing that I have a friend to walk with, a guide to show the way. It doesn’t take long for it to seem to me as if the wall has its own personality.

Down at the dip between Rhinog Fach and the next peak Y Llethr, I spin round to take a look back at where I’ve come from. Seen from this angle, Rhinog Fach sports a rocky profile that is surely the envy of most mountains. Then there’s Llyn Hywel. In sunny, settled weather, it’s a sublime mountain lake, and a popular wild camping spot.

The wall now takes on the northern face of Y Llethr. Its route exploits the easier ground, but towards the top it takes on a formidable crag and wins, I think; it’s difficult to be 100% sure. The path climbs to the west of the wall, preferring to seek out easier ground. But don’t worry, the two are reunited at the top of the thigh-burning climb. Once there, I backtrack along the wall slightly to see how it reached the top. Here I discover one of the best vantage points of the whole walk, by climbing atop a huge rock where my wall meets another coming up from the east.

From here I can see the twin hearts of the Rhinogydd, Fach and Fawr. They are indeed untamed mountains. I’ve explored them many times and by many routes, including a full north-south traverse. The latter idea is not for the faint-hearted: 22 miles across wild and often trackless terrain, including the need for wild camps. Today I am very glad to have my wall, and the simple destiny of the sea.

From summit to sea

The actual summit of Y Llethr is a little disappointing, considering that at 756m/2480ft, it is the highest peak in the range. This becomes especially evident when you reach the apologetically humble summit cairn, marooned in a grassy plateau. The wall forms the centre line of the view to the east, with grass below and giant sky above. The grey filling in a blue-green sandwich.

But don’t let the strangeness of Y Llethr’s summit dampen your coping stones, because things are about to get biblically good. From this point on, the wall is a writhing, mountain-constricting serpent. It sets off south-westwards downhill before swinging to the south-east as it climbs along Crib‑y-rhiw. Then it summits a nameless peak with a 688m spot-height, before changing allegiance once more and veering south-west. Almost as if it can’t make up its mind.

From this point on, the walking becomes straightforward. Out is the difficult, rocky terrain, in is a grassy, undulating path that, along with the wall, leads your eyes and your boots onwards, over what seems like all of Wales. The best section of the whole day lies between Y Llethr and the trig point on Diffwys.

At this point on my walk, the conditions have turned for the even better, and the gods reward my intrepidness with a cloud inversion. A milky sea fills the valleys, the wall-topped ridge bestriding the scene like some celestial causeway.

On the flanks of Diffwys I also encounter that other Rhinog speciality: feral goats. Over the crags they come, nimbly stepping from rock to rock. In their nonchalance they perhaps don’t appreciate quite how epic they look against their backdrop. Like chamois in the Alps, only a bit smellier.

A milky sea fills the valleys, the
wall-topped ridge bestriding the
scene like some celestial causeway.

A stone trig pillar anoints the summit of Diffwys. It looks to be made from the same stone as the wall; I find myself wondering if the Ordnance Survey surveyors borrowed a little of the wall to build it. A stile lets me step over the wall to access the trig, and I pause mid-crossing. Standing on top of the wall is a rare moment of not being on one side or the other, and what a moment it is.

To the south is the Cadair Idris range, which appears unnervingly close. Eryri can be a strange place at times, as mountains you know and love appear as if by magic, much closer than expected, and different in form from how you’re used to seeing them.

But it’s the ridge upon which the wall sits that truly beguiles me. The sea, now much more than the distant rumour of previous glimpses, appears as an inevitability and tells you one thing: the end of the wall is where the sea begins.

I am now almost literally walking on the clouds. The wall changes tack to stay in tune with the ridge, jinking left then right then left again, all the way to the hills above Barmouth. As I get lower, my dear friend the wall finds itself getting attacked from both sides by other walls. The lower and nearer to civilisation it gets, the more frequent the perpendicular abutments occur. It’s like all the walls from the town have come out to welcome the Great Wall home.

It’s only after Bwlch y Llan, and just before a spot‑height peak of 350m, that the hill crest is at last devoid of a line of human-piled stones. The Cambrian Way, which has traced the line of the wall conscientiously all day, finally flings caution to the wind and strides out across the open access hillside without its handrail for the final descent to Barmouth. There I shall enjoy an ice cream perhaps more than any other I have ever deserved.

I’ve been writing about walking in the mountains for over 30 years, so I'm always very careful about deploying the superlatives. But in summing up my day on the Great Wall of Wales, I do it without hesitation: this has been one of the very best walks of my life.

It has had rough ’n’ tough bits and nice ’n’ easy bits; surprises and delights and goats. It has had literal twists and turns all the way. It has made a range which is reputed as tough and uncompromising into something cohesive, navigable, even friendly. It put my feet in the clouds and my heart in the sky.

So do yourself a favour. Hit the wall.

One of the best things about sitting round camp on an evening is tucking into some food, which always seems to taste better when you’re dining alfresco and have been exploring all day.

And while there’s a very real temptation to just gorge on some delicious camping snacks, it’s always a good idea to have something more substantial to tuck into.

If you’re fed up with simply eating on your lap (or you’re upgrading your camping kit), it might be time to invest in a new camping table.

Picking the best option for you can be a tricky task, though, as these portable tables come in varying shapes, sizes and designs. So, to help you pick, we undertook months of testing to come up with a list of the best camping tables.

Jump to: How we tested | Best camping table reviews | Buying advice

Shortlist: Best camping tables at a glance

Best in test: Outwell Berland M

Highly recommended: Nemo Moonlander Dual Height Camp Table

Best budget buy: Hi-Gear Low Picnic Table

Best lightweight option: Helinox Table One Hard Top

Editor's note: This article was updated on 15 July 2026, when we added in a new Dometic review and checked that all products were still available to buy.

How we tested

All of the tables included here have been tested over a period of several months by LFTO deputy editor Rob Slade. They've been used and abused around camp (and in the garden), weighed, measured and put up/down many, many times.

On top of that, we conducted a controlled stability test by piling weight onto one corner of each camping table to see how much it took before it begun to tip over.

That's only part of the picture, though, as we also tested stability while conducting everyday camping tasks, such as food prep and eating dinner. Testing took place in a variety of places so we could judge the tables' ability to stay stable even on bumpy or sloping ground.

Alongside stability, the other key criteria we analysed throughout testing was durability, weight and pack size, ease of setup and value for money.

For more on what goes into our reviews, see our how we test page.

Best camping tables in detail:

Do I need a table for camping?

In a word, no. You don’t need a camping table, but you certainly might benefit from having one.

I’m proof that you can get by without one for years. I’ve wild camped, slept in small two-person tents and spent days chilling out in family-sized tents, all without a table.

And it’s been fine. I’ve chopped food on plates on my lap, hoovered up bbq food from the comfort of my camping chair and cooked over a small backpacking stove while hunkered down on the floor.

However, if you want a bit more luxury, you want to make life easier on camp or you’ve got multiple people to feed, then a camping table can be a great addition – as long as you have space for it in your car.

Having one gives you somewhere to prep food, eat food and dump other handy camp items such as lanterns or drinks.

What type of camping table is best for me?

Like all camping products, tables come in all shapes and sizes. That’s everything from compact side tables to large behemoths that’ll comfortably sit six or more people around them.

The big question here is, do you want to at the table to eat dinner? Or are you going to be eating on your laps, but using the table to prep and cook? Alternatively, do you just want something to pop your drinks and books on?

If it’s the latter, then a small, packable side table would be adequate. These can come in lightweight guises, with collapsable poles and a rigid fabric tabletop, or more traditional ones where the legs simply fold out.

You can then get a range of styles when opting for a larger table, including picnic-style sets that simply fold out, large options with rigid tabletops or collapsable tables that fold up.

These larger, more rigid options are great if you’re camping as a family or want to go to all in with your camping meals. Just make sure it’ll fit in your car when packed down and in your tent when unfolded!

What to look for in a camping table

Weight and pack size

This is rather self-explanatory, but you obviously need to be able to fit your new camping table into your car (or van or trailer!). Folding tables can take up less space, but you might sacrifice a bit of stability for the privilege.

The big thing here is to measure the packing space in your vehicle and check whether it would fit in, and how it might affect everything else you’re packing – dead space is the enemy of efficient packing.

Weight isn’t such a big deal when car camping, but ideally it’s not going to be so heavy that it’s difficult to carry. Plus, remember that the more weight you have in your car, the more strain it puts on your vehicle’s components.

Size and surface area

There’s no one-size-fits-all here, so consider how many people you’ll want to sit at the table or what you want to use it for. Then use a tape measure to map out how much space you’ll have to play with based on the dimensions provided by the tables you’re interested in.

Of course, if you just want something that acts as a side table, you don’t need to worry about the measurements so much, but can focus on other aspects that can make or break a camping table.

Height and adjustability

The height of your new camping table has to be tall enough that you can fit your camping chairs under it, but not so high that the shortest people using it are going to struggle to actually eat from it.

Ideally, it’ll also be at a handy height for standing and chopping up food. For context, my dining table at home tops out at 76cm and yours is probably similar.

Some tables are adjustable, allowing you to use a mechanism on the table legs to amend the height. This is a handy feature, as it means you can tailor the height depending on how tall your party is or what task you’re using it for (e.g. food prep, eating, as a coffee table).

Plus, if you can adjust each leg individually, it means you can potentially still have a flat surface to work on or eat off if you’ve pitched up on bumpy or sloping ground.

Stability

This links into that last point well. We need our camping tables to be stable and sturdy, as the last thing you want is for food and drink to be sliding around and spilling in the tent.

Multiple things come into play when considering the stability of a camping table, including build quality. If a brand has used flimsy materials then it’s possible that they’ll bend and flex, which isn’t what we want.

While tougher materials will inevitably weigh more (and cost more), they’ll provide a more stable platform.

Another thing to look at is how much a table’s stability is compromised if it folds down. This will vary from table to table, depending on the mechanism. A bit of flex is okay, but it needs to be limited so drinks don’t slide around and so food prep isn’t hampered.

Stronger table legs help with stability, as does the ability to adjust the height if you’re on a slope or uneven ground. You’ll also want to pay attention to the feet at the end of the legs. Ideally these will be sturdy and purchase the ground well without sinking down into it.

Durability

Camping tables inevitably take more of a beating than a standard dining table in the house. We chuck them in and out of cars, use them as a kitchen sideboard when prepping food and sometimes expose them to a wider range of weather and temperatures.

As such, the tabletop needs to be resistant to scratches, easily wipe clean and strong enough that it won’t crack if it has stuff piled on top.

Depending on what camping stove you use, you may be able to use it to cook on top of your camping table, too (outside of your tent!), but you need to be sure that it doesn’t produce excessive heat underneath and that your camping table is robust enough to cope with a bit of warmth.

If in doubt, simply don’t do it, otherwise you risk burning or melting your table – or setting it on fire.

What comes after every hearty camp meal? Getting cosy in your tent and settling down for a decent sleep. See our list of the best sleeping bags to make it as cosy as possible.

About the author

LFTO deputy editor Rob Slade has been hiking, camping and tumbling around outdoors for much of his life, and has been reviewing gear professionally for 10 years.

Before joining us in 2024, Rob was content editor at 220 Triathlon and editor of Adventure Travel magazine (now known as Wired for Adventure). He's camped all over the UK, in New Zealand (for four weeks) and even in Wadi Rum desert in Jordan.

The best of both worlds. That’s what you’re supposed to get with a pair of approach shoes: the comfort of a hiking shoe and the sticky grip of a climbing shoe.

Designed as a hybrid between these two footwear genres, approach shoes are so-called because historically they were used by climbers on long walks (the ‘approach’) to the base of crags or cliffs before a day of trad climbing.

But these gnarly climbers couldn’t be bothered to pack two pairs of footwear. They wanted one multi-purpose, super-versatile, do-it-all shoe – a halfway house between a trail shoe and climbing slip-on that could deliver enough comfort, give and cushioning for big hiking mileage, yet also provide adequate traction, stability and precision for negotiating steep, technical, rocky ground.

The approach shoe was born. Yet now it’s no longer the preserve of just skilled climbers. Approach shoes are commonly worn by hillwalkers taking on graded scrambles such as Crib Goch, Striding Edge or Aonach Eagach, due to the excellent features they offer.

Those benefits include: soft and sticky rubber outsoles for slip-free traction; a precise and narrow fit providing a better ‘feel’ for the terrain; longitudinal rigidity for a more stable connection with the rock; and a climbing zone at the toe to improve performance when ‘edging’ on little rocky ledges and jamming your foot into cracks.

And now an exciting new approach shoe has just hit the market - the Scarpa Crux 2. Here's everything you need to know about it.

The Scarpa Crux 2: an upgrade to an already iconic shoe

Building on the success of the original Crux, which has become a favourite among climbers, hillwalkers and outdoor enthusiasts over the years, the new Crux 2 (£145) arrives with a series of technical and design updates while staying true to the qualities that made its predecessor so popular.

Designed for everything from rocky mountain approaches and scrambles to everyday hillwalking and even casual wear between adventures, it's a shoe that aims to combine comfort and technicality in one versatile package.

Multi-purpose, super-versatile, do-it-all shoe.

Available in both standard and Gore-Tex versions, the Crux 2 suits a wide variety of conditions and users. Whether you're tackling a grade three scramble, trekking some remote Munros or simply bimbling up your local hillside, Scarpa says the Crux 2’s “quality design and craftmanship will give you the best fit, performance and durability” on the market.

5 key features of the Scarpa Crux 2

1. Durable suede upper built for mountain use

The Crux 2 features a 1.8mm water-resistant suede upper that's designed to balance comfort with long-lasting durability. Suede remains a popular material for approach shoes because it offers a combination of flexibility, abrasion resistance and all-day comfort, making it well suited to repeated use on rocky trails and rough mountain terrain. A full rubber toe rand wraps around the front of the shoe, adding extra protection against scrapes and bumps.

2. Precision lacing for technical terrain

One of the defining characteristics of a good approach shoe is the ability to achieve a precise fit - and the Crux 2 uses extended lacing that runs almost all the way to the toe. This allows wearers to fine-tune the fit depending on the terrain and activity.

Tightening the lower section creates a more secure, performance-oriented feel for scrambling and easy climbing, while a looser fit provides greater comfort for longer walks. According to Scarpa, the down-to-the-toe lacing system helps provide 'precise foot placement' when moving over technical ground.

3. Sticky Vibram Megagrip outsole

Grip is arguably the single most important feature of any approach shoe and the Crux 2 uses a Vibram outsole featuring the renowned Megagrip rubber compound. Widely respected for its traction on both wet and dry rock, Megagrip has become a go-to choice for mountain footwear where dependable grip is essential.

The outsole also incorporates a dedicated climbing zone at the toe, creating a flatter contact area that helps when edging on small footholds during scrambles or easy rock climbs. Scarpa says this combination is designed to deliver 'high grip on every terrain'.

4. Waterproof protection with the GTX model

For those who regularly venture into Britain's unpredictable weather, the Scarpa Crux 2 GTX (£165) adds a waterproof, bluesign-approved Gore-Tex ePE membrane. Designed to keep rain and groundwater out while allowing moisture vapour to escape, the lining provides reliable protection without compromising breathability.

Alternatively, those who prioritise maximum ventilation in drier conditions can opt for the standard non-waterproof version instead.

5. Versatility beyond climbing and scrambling

Although approach shoes originated in the climbing world, today's models are expected to perform across a much broader range of activities, and the Crux 2 reflects that evolution. Scarpa positions it as a shoe suitable for approaches, scrambling, slab climbing and everyday outdoor adventures, making it an appealing option for anyone who regularly mixes walking with more technical terrain. It's described as a shoe intended to take you 'from shore to summit in comfort and style'.

For more information, visit www.scarpa.co.uk

You might be surprised to hear that three-person tents are rarely used to accommodate three people. They're normally used by two people who want more internal space than what a backpacking tent can offer.

The first thing to do is to decide whether you need a tent for a campsite or for wild camping. If it's the latter, you might want to check out our best wild camping tents or best two-person tents.

Car camping tents can be bigger, heavier, and more spacious. Hiking tents, like the Alpkit Jaran 3, need to be lighter and more compact. But within hiking tents, you need to decide if you want to prioritise toughness and weatherproofing over low weight and space.

As you can see, there's a lot to think about when you're trying to find the ideal three-person tent. To help you along, we've tested and recommended the best three-person tents for hiking and camping. Further down, you can also find buying and tent care advice.

Jump to: How we tested | Best three-person tents reviews | Comparison table | Buying guide

Shortlist: Best three-person tents at a glance

Best three-person tent overall: MSR Hubba Hubba HD 3

Best value three-person tent: Simond Three-Person Trekking Dome Tent MT500

Highly rated: Alpkit Jarran 3

Best lightweight three-person tent: NEMO Dagger OSMO 3P

Editor's note: This article was last updated on 15 July, when we added four new reviews and crowned our new award winners – the MSR Hubba Hubba HD 3 and the Simond MT500.

How we tested

We like to think of ourselves as tent experts. For the last three decades, we've been using and testing everything from bivvies and hammocks to large family tents on our hiking and camping adventures.

When going as a pair, we often use three-person tents because they offer a bit of extra living space compared to two-person models, which is always welcome, but seldom occupy more space.

Most of the tents recommended here were tested in the Lake District by experienced gear expert James Forrest (pictured above) and former LFTO senior writer Chris Williams.

Each tent was tested against a set criteria. This includes weather protection (performance in both wind and rain), comfort and liveability (can you actually fit three people inside and is there enough room to do camp admin?), features, weight and pack size, and value for money.

For more on our review process, see our how we test page.

Best three-person tents reviewed:

Table: Best three-person tents compared

What to look for in a three-person tent

Space

With hiking tents, tough and highly weatherproof designs don't offer the best internal space. Lightweight, less weatherproof models with skeletal pole structures have excellent internal space. Tunnel-shaped tents tend to rule supreme in terms of space-to-weight ratios, though.

Weight and packed size

This is key for hikers and part of the reason three-person tents are very popular. They can give that bit of extra room without adding too much weight or girth to the packed size compared to a two-person tent.

Consider your rucksack size and volume, and be sure to check dimensions of a tent's packed size before committing to it.

Features

Things such as the number of doors and size of vestibules are important because they heavily influence a tent's liveability. Two opposing doors makes entering and exiting for multiple people much easier, while multiple or generous vestibules help cater for gear and make things more comfortable when the weather sucks.

Are there gear pockets? How many pegs come with it? Do the zips have storm flaps? Think about your intentions for the tent and consider whether it has the right features for the job.

For a wider range of tents, check out our ultimate guide to the best camping tents.

What's the best tent shape?

Dome tents and geodesic tents are the most stable shapes and best for dealing with stroppy weather. Tripod and backpacking shapes are lighter than dome and geodesic tents but aren't so weather resistant. Though, weatherproofing is usually still very good.

Tunnel tents are popular for hiking and camping alike. They can be compact and lightweight or large and commodious, depending on the design. They aren't as good in a storm as dome or geodesic tents, but they are usually still pretty good.

For car camping, you could also consider inflatable tents, as long as you have a car that's big enough – they tend to be bulkier when packed away.

What materials are best for a tent?

Most tents these days use nylon or polyester. Nylon is lightweight and strong, and polyester is quite hydrophobic. Both are reasonably inexpensive. Some larger camping tents may use cotton, polycotton, or canvas because these materials have good temperature regulation, are quieter, and are very durable.

Though, like leather boots, tents using these materials usually need breaking in to weatherproof the fabric. They're also much heavier than the synthetic fabrics.

What size tent is best for three people?

For three people, a 3-person tent is generally the minimum size you’ll want, but many campers prefer a 4-person tent for added comfort and space.

A 3-person tent will fit three sleeping pads side by side, making it a practical choice for backpacking or situations where keeping weight and packed size down is a priority. However, it can feel snug, with limited room for gear inside the tent.

What are the best quality tent brands?

The best tent brand for you will depend on your needs. For backpacking, highly regarded brands like MSR, Big Agnes, and Nemo Equipment are known for their quality and innovative features – although they often come with a higher price tag.

If you’re looking for good quality at a more affordable price, Vango, Alpkit, and Wild Country tend to offer reliable mid-range options. For car camping, we’ve reviewed excellent tents from the likes of Robens, Quechua and Outwell, Nordisk, Vango and OLPRO.

How to clean your tent

All of the three-person tents we have recommended are durable and last many moons, but only if you take care of them as you ought to. This includes cleaning and proofing the fabric, plus making sure the tent is completely dry before storing it.

Tents that are still damp when packed away and stored are the ones that don't last long. Mould quickly sets in, and the fabric gets wrecked. We know that you can't clean and dry your tent while you're away on a hike, and that's all the more reason why it's crucial you do so when you get back home.

For cleaning synthetic, cotton, polycotton, and canvas tents, we recommend Grangers' Tent + Gear Care Kit or Nikwax Tent and Gear SolarWash. Both of these are effective water-based cleaners that clean and also revitalise fabric breathability.

About the authors

James Forrest has climbed every mountain in the UK and Ireland, is a serial wild camper and an experienced long-distance hiker. James has been reviewing kit for us for years, bringing a forensic level of testing from his base near the Lake District.

Chris Williams is LFTO's former senior writer and a gear geek for all things hiking and trekking. Chris likes to spend as little time behind a desk as possible, testing the latest outdoor gear and finding the best options for his fellow hikers and trail runners.

Camping cutlery is one of those little accessories that's all too easy to overlook when you're planning your next backpacking adventure or getaway in a tent.

Oh, you'll remember the backpacking stove, mess tins, pots and pans. You might even have a camping chair sorted. But the actual implements of eating are often forgotten – and there's just something so undignified about eating a plate of beans with a house key or piece of cardboard.

So, to save you from this shameful fate, our testers have found the created this collection of the best camping cutlery, which we reckon you'll end up packing first out of sheer excitement to use it.

There's a mind-bending array of camping cutlery available out there, from the humble spork to proper five-piece travel sets. All have their pros and cons and are best suited to different scenarios. That's why it's important to match the right camping cutlery to the right outdoor excursion.

With a sea of options out there, we've made things simple for you below by assembling our favourite cutlery options available for your next camping trip. Tuck in!

Shortlist: Best camping cutlery at a glance

Best in test: GSI Halulite 3pc Ring Cutlery

Best budget buy: Lifeventure Ellipse Camping Cutlery

Best family cutlery set: Easy Camp Family Cutlery

Best ultralight camping cutlery: Sea to Summit Frontier Ultralight Cutlery Set

Editor's note: This article was updated on 14 July, when we added in the Dometic set and updated some links and pricing.

How we tested the best camping cutlery

This article was compiled by Rob Slade and Fliss Freeborn. Rob is deputy editor of Live for the Outdoors (LFTO) and has been sleeping under canvas for decades. He's been testing camping and hiking kit professionally for over 10 years. Fliss is a writer for LFTO and lifelong devotee of camping cutlery. She once ate a full roast dinner with a spork to prove that you can (you can – but it's difficult).

The products featured below have all been tested extensively on multiple camping trips – from laid back car camping to multi-day hiking. Our rating criteria included weight (we weighed each product ourselves), comfort, performance and value.

Comfort was assessed on both holding the handles of the cutlery and cutting away, as well as how it felt to actually stick the cutlery into your mouth and take food off it.

Performance covered how easy it was to stick the cutlery into food and cut/scoop it up, as well as how robust each product felt. To help us establish this rating, we did a semi-controlled cutting test with the edge of a four-day-old loaf of sourdough bread. This crust has been known to break teeth, so we knew it'd be a good test for the knives featured here.

You can find out more about how we test here.

Best camping cutlery reviewed:

How to choose the best camping cutlery for you

It may seem like a trivial decision, but choosing the right camping cutlery for the job is of great importance. There's nothing worse than having to use something that annoys you, even if it's only for 15 minutes a day.

You'll also need to decide whether you're after something minimalist and lightweight, or fully comprehensive setup for longer trips, where sawing at a hunk of protein with a plastic spork will get very dull, very quickly.

This decision is very much going to depend on what sort of camping you'll be doing. If it's family camping, you'll probably want a big cutlery set that caters for everyone and comes with a handy storage bag.

If you're car camping on your own or as a couple, you won't need such a big collection, so individual sets can work well. Because you're not carrying your kit everywhere, it means weight is less of a concern.

However, if you're backpacking and carrying kit on your back for days on end, then you need something particularly lightweight. Speaking of which...

Size and weight

Apart from no cutlery at all, the spork is the best lightweight option. It's the bivvy bag of cutlery.

That said, modern materials and manufacturing now mean that you can get sets of a knife, fork and spoon without much of a weight penalty, but you'll want to make sure durability isn't sacrificed in the process.

Every gram counts for backpacking, but we recon anything under 50g is decent.

At the other end of the spectrum, a multi-piece set is comprehensive but bulky - and if you're car camping, then just taking a set from home that you don't mind much about and storing it in the glovebox can also to do the trick.

We also love the fact that camping cutlery can be used out and about just about anywhere – a folding or magnetic set does wonders for work lunches without having to use and throw away any single-use plastics or energy-intensive wooden forks.

Material

Plastic: Plastic cutlery tends to be the cheapest option, while it can also be lightweight, but isn't exactly the nicest to eat from. The knives made aren't usually great to use over longer periods of time and plastic cutlery can also be prone to snapping. If you go down this route, ensure its BPA-free and, ideally, made from recycled materials.

Stainless steel: Durable and rust-resistant, stainless steel feels sturdy in the hand and is a practical choice for car camping. It’s great for those who like ‘real’ cutlery, but they tend to be heavier, so aren’t usually the top pick for ultralight backpacking.

Titanium: Cutlery made from titanium is ultralight, incredibly strong and naturally rustproof. While more expensive, it will last for years and adds barely any weight to your pack.

Aluminium: This option is lighter than steel and more affordable than titanium, so it’s a good midway point, but it’s softer and can bend if put under too much force.

Wood/bamboo: Eco-friendly and natural-feeling, wooden or bamboo cutlery is gaining traction. It’s biodegradable and lighter than steel, but usually bulkier. If you're choosing things made of bamboo or other wood, be sure to treat them carefully, keeping them clean and dry so they don't rot.

What are you eating?

For those eating straight from the food pouch, a spork or spoon will see you right - no fuss needed. If you're fed up of getting messy hands when digging around for the last bits of food, though, then an extended or extendable spoon is a good shout.

On the other hand, if you're whipping up something a little more sophisticated, you'll benefit from a set. You'll already be bringing a stove and some cookware, so it'd be silly not to have the right cutlery, too.

If you're backpacking, chances are the food isn't going to be that challenging to cut or stab with a fork. We're talking pasta, rice, cous cous, noodles etc. This means the sharpness of your implements don't matter so much.

But if you do plan to take something tougher, such as chorizo, or you're going to be cutting other meat around camp, you'll want your knife to pack a punch.

Ease of use, comfort and cleaning

As much as weight is important when choosing the best camping cutlery for your trips, comfort, ease of use and cleaning are arguably even more important.

Some brands will try to trim weight to the detriment of comfort, so you want to make sure you're not left with any overly pointy edges on the handles that might cause pressure points to form while you're using the cutlery.

Comfort also extends to in the mouth. A good meal can be ruined by awkward or annoying cutlery, so the shape needs to lend itself well to what you're eating. The closer it feels to normal cutlery, the better in our experience.

When it comes to ease of use, consider how much food you can get (and keep) on your spoon/fork when using it. Are the edges curved enough to avoid food spilling off? Is the fork good at stabbing pasta?

And now to one of the worst aspects of camping... clearing up. We all hate washing up when camping, so the easier this is to do, the better. Bonus points also if you can chuck it in the dishwasher when you get home.

About the authors

Rob Slade is deputy editor at LFTO and has a long history of camping, hiking and reviewing gear. He previously worked as content editor at 220 Triathlon and, before that, editor at Adventure Travel magazine (which is now called Wired For Adventure). He's camped all over the world, including New Zealand, Jordan and across the UK.

Fliss Freeborn is a writer and gear tester for LFTO. During her time at university, she spent considerably more days in a tent in the Scottish Highlands than she did in the library, which she highly recommends as a study strategy. She also believes that life is too short to eat bad food outdoors and that cooking good scran while in the hills is easier than you might think with the right kit and some forward planning.

Wild camping can be an absolute dream. The silence. The peace. The sunset and sunrise. Not another soul in sight. It's everything you could want and more. But despite this, wild camping isn't always conducive to a good night's sleep.

There's a whole bunch of things conspiring against you, such as cold temperatures, early sunrises, weak bladders, slippery sleeping mats and so on.

So to help you thrive on a wild camp, rather than just survive, here are some of our top tried-and-tested tips on how to get a good night sleep.

Just remember to stick to the wild camping code...

1. Do pre-bed exercises

Get your heart rate going by doing a set of star jumps or sit-ups. Heat radiating from your body will help warm up your sleeping bag quicker, too.

2. Load calories before bedtime

Munch on a calorific treat, like some chocolate, a handful of nuts or some of our favourite hiking snacks, to give your body some fuel for warmth through the night.

3. Make a makeshift hot water bottle

Fill a basic drinks bottle with hot water, then wrap it in an insulating layer or stuff it in a sock and give it a cuddle. Just triple check that you've sealed that thing up properly so you can avoid any accidents.

4. Line your sleeping bag

Sleeping bag liners weigh little, take up minimal space in your rucksack and are a quick way to add up to 10°C in warmth.

Plus, they'll keep your sleeping bag protected from all of the dirt, sweat and suncream that you've been coating yourself with throughout the day. This will extend the lifespan of your sleeping bag, but it also makes washing much easier, too, as you can just wash the liner rather than your down-filled cocoon.

Check out our list of the best sleeping bag liners for some shopping inspiration.

5. Warm up your extremities

Before you go to sleep, pull on a fresh pair of hiking socks, a woolly hat or beanie and pop on a pair of warm gloves, because your hands and feet get cold the fastest. A neck tube like a Buff can also be useful to wrap around your head and neck.

6. Get clever with mats

Some sleeping bags have elastic straps to slide around your sleeping mat so you don't slide off. But if you don't have this, and your sleeping bag is large enough, put your sleeping mat inside your sleeping bag to stop yourself rolling off onto the cold, hard floor.

And while we're on this topic, here's our list of the best sleeping mats on the market right now.

7. Fill empty space in your sleeping bag

If you really want to maximise your warm, stuff your spare clothes into the bottom of your sleeping bag. Less empty space means more warmth.

8. Pee prior to bed

There’s nothing worse than having to crawl out of a warm and cosy embrace in the middle of the night to relieve yourself outside the tent. Make sure you hydrate well through the day and early evening so the fluids can pass through you before you bed down – the last thing you want to do is down loads of water before settling down.

9. Get clever with your pillow

Having some sort of pillow can help transform your wild night out and help you get a solid eight hours. We know some people will stuff clothes into a dry bag, fold up a fleece jacket or use a packed up insulated jacket – and if that works, then great.

But the best camping pillows weigh so little these days (the lightest we've used is 56g) that you can pack one without it weighing you down or taking up much space. And if you do, here's a trick to help you keep it in place.

While you could slide it inside the hood of your sleeping bag if it's small enough, a better tactic is to slide a fleece over the top of your sleeping mat, slip the pillow between the fleece and your mat, and then tighten the fleece up to keep everything in place.

10. Take an eye mask

If you're camping in the height of summer you'll be dealing with bright evenings and very early sunrises. Pack an eye mask to help you protect those valuable eight hours of sleep, rather than waking up at the crack of dawn.

Just don't lie in for too long – you're meant to decamp early doors so other hikers or dog walkers don't stumble across you.

As much as we talk about the importance of hydration in sport having year-round importance, there’s no denying that this time of year, runners tend to pay a little more attention to it. Running, and particularly racing, on warmer days requires planning to make sure you get the most out of yourself (not to mention that you don’t do any damage to your body).

Take trail legend Jim Walmsley, for example. After he clocked a new world record for 50 miles on a particularly hot day a few years ago, he told us: “I made a pre-race plan to drink about 700ml of a hydration mix per hour. The mix was a typical sports hydration drink, totalling 300 calories per hour with glucose and fructose as sugars. Nothing too fancy. I do wish I had the foresight to increase my fluid intake more as the day grew hotter. It was a simple thing I just overlooked.”

The physical effects

“Even a two to three-degree increase in body temperature, from a resting value of around 38°C, can cause physical and psychological problems when exercising,” says Professor John Brewer. “The body’s main defence mechanism is sweating, since the evaporation of sweat causes body heat to be lost. An individual’s sweat rate will depend on the intensity of the exercise they are doing, and the climate, with hot and humid conditions making heat loss much harder.”

Scientists have shown that physical and mental performance suffers when more than 2% of body weight has been lost by sweating – for an individual weighing 75kg, this is equivalent to 1.5 litres of sweat. Scientists have also shown that when exercise intensity is high, and in hot and humid conditions, sweating can exceed three litres per hour, so unless a sensible hydration strategy is followed, the effects of dehydration could be felt within half an hour. In less extreme conditions, sweating between one and two litres an hour is more common, so in around an hour, the impact of dehydration will become apparent.

Know your needs

Fomrer Ultra-Trail Courmayeur-Champex-Chamonix (CCC) winner Mimmi Kotka agrees. “Hydration is important for your performance in training and racing,” she says. “It is at the base of our physiology, and dehydration quickly impairs performance and increases the risk of heat stroke. Proper hydration helps the body cool muscles and get rid of excess body heat. And the balance in the body is dependent on your hydration and electrolyte status. So, for optimal performance, you need to hydrate and, in longer efforts, also take your electrolyte intake into consideration.

“But it is not as simple as just drinking as much as possible. Drinking too much can be harmful, as can taking on too many electrolytes. Hydration needs to be adjusted to the person and conditions. Depending on effort, time, how much one sweats, the salt content of the sweat, the weather conditions and so on.”

Have a plan

Perhaps as trail runners, we don’t tend to think about hydration in quite the same way. But as we’re all aware, actually being near a lovely babbling brook and then having to drink from it because you didn’t prepare properly are two very different scenarios. One is picturesque, one is potentially dangerous. Be prepared. “Bring what you are used to and adjust to nature,” says Mimmi. “Depending on where you run you will have to know whether to bring water or not. If there are no clean streams or wells (be sure!) along the route, bring water or a sports drink (for long runs).

“Generally, for shorter runs and efforts, water is enough; you don’t need additional electrolytes or sugar. And if you go into the training properly hydrated, you might not have to drink much at all. Drink if you are thirsty.”

Related: Best running packs tested and reviewed

More than water

“For longer efforts you might want to take in sports drink (water, sugar and electrolytes) or just some electrolyte tablets dissolved in water, depending on effort and personal preferences. Sports drinks are more readily absorbed in the gut than plain water because their sugar and electrolyte content mimic the body’s own balance. This makes absorption faster. The electrolyte that we lose most of through our sweat is sodium, followed by potassium. So, this is helpful to keep in mind when planning fluid intake.

“For really long efforts and races you need a well thought through hydration plan. And also, be aware of your body to be able to adjust along the way.”

Of course, we are trail runners for a reason. To enjoy the incredible mountains and all they have to offer. “I usually run in the Swedish mountains or the Alps where the water is drinkable so I mostly just carry an empty soft flask (and sports drink powder for long runs) in my belt or backpack,” says Mimmi. However, she is keen to emphasise that sports drinks are hugely important even in those locations. “Mountain stream water is low in electrolytes,” she offers. “So be careful to replenish with electrolytes, too, if this is your water source in hot conditions.”

And don’t forget that when you’ve finished, hydrating post-run is as important as during the run. “Recovery drinks containing carbohydrates, protein and electrolytes can be useful but are only truly needed if you are a high-level athlete doing several high quality sessions a day (less then eight hours between sessions). For normal training, think normal food and drink,” says Mimmi. We’ll drink to that!

Related: Best running caps for training and racing

Mimi’s top tips

Follow these five golden rules from one of the world’s top ultra runners:

Hydration is an everyday thing

Keep hydrated every day, not just around your training. This will ensure you start training in a good hydrated state and that you replenish afterwards. As a bonus, all your life tasks will probably function better, too. So drink enough and don’t be afraid of that extra pinch of seasalt on your food (if you’re not suffering from hypertension that is).

Have a plan

For racing longer races, have a hydration plan adjusted to your needs

Use nutrition products that you are used to

Take your personal physiology into consideration. For example, do you sweat a lot, is the sweat ‘salty’? Then you need more electrolytes.

Assess the climate

Research where the race is and check the weather forecast. Humid climates and heat will, of course, require more hydration than cold and rain.

Check the aid stations

Are there any long stretches of a race without water? Then you need to plan for this and fill up at earlier stations.

Need more essential advice for running in sunny weather? See our list of the best running sunglasses.

Modest in height yet mighty in significance, Schiehallion occupies a unique place in both physical and human history.

If you’ve ever dipped into stories of early mountaineering, Scottish folklore, cartography or scientific discovery, you may well have come across this distinctive Highland peak.

With its steep sides and famously symmetrical, whale-backed profile, Schiehallion stands alone in the Grampian Highlands. This isolated Munro has provided shelter and sustenance to local communities since Neolithic times – long before the Bronze Age reshaped Britain’s landscapes and cultures.

Few mountains offer such a rich blend of geology, folklore and scientific legacy in such a compact, elegant ascent.

Its south-western flank guards a small cave, Uamh Tom a’ Mhòr-fhir, woven into local folklore as an entrance to the underworld. From this springs the mountain’s Gaelic name, Sìth Chailleann – often translated as “fairy hill of the Caledonians”.

Then, in 1774, Schiehallion stepped onto the scientific stage. Thanks to its regular shape and relative isolation from other peaks, it was chosen as the site of an ambitious experiment to calculate the mass of the Earth. Scientists measured how gravity deflected a plumb line at various points around the mountain, comparing observations against the stars. The calculations were complex – but the project helped advance the idea of representing mountains using contour lines to show relative height.

Climbing Schiehallion today, it’s worth pausing to reflect on the extraordinary layers of story beneath your boots. Few mountains offer such a rich blend of geology, folklore and scientific legacy in such a compact, elegant ascent.

Read on for my full route guide to hiking this magnificent Scottish mountain.

How hard is climbing Schiehallion?

Difficulty: Medium

Distance: 10.5km (6.5 miles)

Time: 5.5 hours

Ascent: 760m

Highest point: 1083m

Start point: Pay and display Forestry and Land Scotland Braes of Fos car park, grid reference NN753557.

Fitness: A good, general level of hill fitness is required, as for any mountain walk. Compared to some higher or longer Munro routes, however, this one is less arduous in summer conditions.

Terrain: Engineered lower trails, rocky paths through heather and open, boulder-strewn terrain at higher elevations.

Navigation: A mostly linear ‘up and down’ route following clear paths and prominent features. In poor weather or low visibility, you should be confident checking map and compass bearings when leaving the summit.

Suitable for beginners? We wouldn’t recommend tackling a 1000m+ Munro as your very first mountain. Build experience on smaller hills and shorter mountain days before taking this on.

Where should I base myself?

The most accessible start point for this route – Braes of Fos car park – isn’t easily reached by public transport. Drivers can access it from Pitlochry or Aberfeldy via a minor road off the B846 (General Wade’s Military Road).

Glengoulandie Caravan and Camping Site is less than 6km from Braes of Fos and makes an excellent base, with full facilities, a shop and café. There’s even a waymarked valley trail linking the site to the Schiehallion walking route (open April–September).

You’ll also find plenty of food options in nearby Aberfeldy. For something relaxed and family-friendly, try neighbourhood Italian restaurant KB’s Kitchen.

What's the best map?

Printed options include:

• OS Explorer OL49 (1:25,000)

• OS Landranger 51 (1:50,000)

• Harvey British Mountain Map: Schiehallion (1:40,000)

You can also download this digital version via OS Maps:

Schiehallion: Step-by-step route guide

1. This route starts from the pay-and-display Forestry and Land Scotland Braes of Fos car park (with toilets), which is an excellent access point with a well-engineered trail departing through forestry to access Schiehallion’s eastern slopes. This area is owned by John Muir Trust and they have been working to restore habitat and vegetation, so please keep to the engineered trail that crosses the Allt an t-Socaich river and gains height in a generally south-west direction. Initially, ascend through rough grazing and heathery ground, through a deer gate/fence and towards a large, low-walled animal enclosure just below the 400m contour.

2. For the next 350m of height gain, the valley trail becomes rockier and weaves through heather-covered slopes, becoming interspersed with larger rocks as you gain height, heading generally west-south-west. The angle of ascent is fairly gradual with far-reaching views over Loch Tummel and to the mountains of the Cairngorms to the north-east (look behind you!)

3. Ascending generally west-north-west, during the next 1.2km the route, the heather coverage decreases to leave the landscape littered with rocks and boulders, as the spur of this eastern ascent ridge gradually narrows. Now the higher slopes of Schiehallion are more visible, stretching away to the west, with a series of gradual height gains between you and the summit.

4. At the 940m contour the ground flattens considerably for approx 250m, over stones and boulders. Infrequent cairns mark the route at points, and there is certainly evidence of a path weaving through these rocks, but any summit snows can obscure both the rocks and path. From this flattening it is another 1.3km to the final summit, including another final steepening above the 1000m contour. Above this, the slender summit ridge offers much larger boulders and blocks of rock to clamber through to gain a cairned summit at 1083m.

5. From this steep-sided summit area, views south-west towards the Ben Lawers massif are impressive. In very poor visibility, ensure you check your direction of travel to lock in your progress back along the east-south-east facing narrow, rocky spur that you ascended. Generally, the descent route will now be heading east, and using the same route you ascended. The flattening at 980m is 1.3km away, taking care through the larger rocks at times.

6. From this level area of ground, the descent is more gradual following the rounded, eastern spur of Schiehallion, returning on the same path. Descend for 3km to reach the stone-walled grazing enclosure you passed on your ascent, just below the 400m contour.

7. Follow the valley trail for another 1.5km as it returns to the forest car park.

What hiking gear do I need?

Even in summer, this is a big, challenging mountain route. The mountains of Scotland are are renowned for inhospitable weather, which can change in the blink of an eye, so don’t even consider it without quality outdoor gear.

We’d recommend the obvious basics: walking boots or hiking shoes, a good hiking daypack, a reliable waterproof jacket (it rains a lot in Scotland, if you haven’t heard), and a pair of quick-drying walking trousers with some packable waterproof overtrousers in your bag. Plus, quality insulating layers.

Hiking poles are also a good idea to ease pressure on your knees, because this is a long day. In winter conditions, an ice axe and crampons – plus the skills to use them – are mandatory in these mountains.

When’s the best time to hike Schiehallion?

As with most UK mountains, spring, summer and early autumn are wonderful times to visit Schiehallion, offering warmer temperatures, longer daylight hours and less chance of snow and ice.

If you’re planning a winter ascent, make sure you’re fully prepared with the appropriate equipment, skills and experience for encountering snow, ice and challenging weather conditions in the Scottish Highlands.

About the author

If you find a route written by Kate Worthington on Live for the Outdoors, you can be sure it’s a cracker. Kate lives and works in the mountains of north Wales, where she’s a director of RAW Adventures, as well as a qualified Mountain Leader, Winter Mountain Leader and Fell/Trail Leader in running fitness.

She’s been hiking, climbing, scrambling and running in the mountains her whole life, and has a gift for creating inventive, inspiring route guides that take her all over Britain in search of adventure.

MSR's tents are brilliant, but the low hydrostatic head waterproof ratings have always been a chink in their armour. But with boosted numbers, can the MSR Hubba Hubba HD 3 stake a claim to be one of the best three-person tents around? James Forrest heads outdoors to find out...

I've long been a fan of MSR tents. Over the past seven years I've used various models across everything from Munro-bagging missions in Scotland to long-distance backpacking trips in New Zealand, and I've generally found myself gravitating towards MSR's dome-style designs over more traditional tunnel tents.

Back in 2019, for example, I spent 25 nights in the original Hubba Hubba when climbing all 282 Munros, while more recently I've used the lighter-weight, more minimalist Freelite 2 on a month-long journey across the Swiss Alps and a 70-day section of New Zealand's Te Araroa, involving more than 30 camps. In other words, I'm pretty familiar with the MSR approach.

My feedback has always been broadly similar. MSR's tents tend to offer excellent liveability thanks to their high walls, generous headroom, rectangular floorplans, twin doors and roomy vestibules. They're comfortable places to spend time, particularly compared to some of the lower-profile, cramped, coffin-like tunnel tents that dominate the backpacking market.

The trade-off is that MSR’s lofty walls can catch the wind, the mesh-centric inners are cold and breezy, and, most importantly, the official waterproof ratings have never looked especially impressive on paper when judged against some UK-focused rivals.

That's largely because these American-designed tents are (generally speaking) intended for drier, less windy climates in the US. The new Hubba Hubba HD, however, has been developed specifically to address some of those long-standing criticisms while retaining the spacious, user-friendly design that has made the range so popular in the first place. Here’s what I think.

Design and features

The standout feature of the Hubba Hubba HD 3 is its rectangular floorplan. In an era when many backpacking tents save weight by tapering aggressively towards the foot end, MSR has prioritised usable living space instead. The result is a genuinely roomy three-person shelter that offers noticeably more shoulder room and sleeping comfort than many rivals.

At 191cm wide, you can comfortably fit three sleeping mats side-by-side with more personal space than you'll find in alternatives such as the Robens Roamer 3 LW (160cm), Vango Scafell 300 Plus (170cm) and Simond MT500 3-Person Dome Tent (180cm). Whether that additional 20-30cm is worth paying a premium for will depend on your priorities, but there's no denying that it makes a meaningful difference to comfort on longer trips. Also, the steeper, more vertical architecture of the MSR makes it feel far more spacious than an extra 20cm might initially suggest.

The tent's structure plays a major role in creating this sense of spaciousness. Pitching is quick and intuitive, relying on a hub-connected DAC pole system that forks into a Y-shape at either end and incorporates a central cross pole. The design is symmetrical and straightforward to understand, avoiding the fiddly complexity found in some modern backpacking tents. It is an inner-first pitch, which isn't ideal when rain is hammering down, but the process is fast enough that this rarely feels like a major drawback.

Once assembled, the structure creates near-vertical walls, excellent headroom and a taut, confidence-inspiring shape. Maximum internal height is a generous 107cm, while the dome-style design provides excellent shoulder and elbow room throughout the tent. This is where the Hubba Hubba philosophy really shines. Compared to many low-profile backpacking tents, it feels noticeably less claustrophobic and far more comfortable when spending extended periods inside.

The flysheet clips neatly over the inner and creates two large side-entry vestibules, each accessed via a large StayDry door. The dual-door arrangement means it’s easier for occupants to get in and out without disturbing each other, while the vestibules provide plenty of room for muddy boots, packs and cooking gear. The door design is particularly well thought out, using straight-running zips that converge at a single point, making them easy to locate and operate even in darkness. Built-in rain gutters and kickstand vents further add to the tent's practical appeal.

Inside, MSR has also paid attention to organisation. Large overhead gear lofts provide useful storage for smaller items, while an integrated clothes-line offers somewhere to dry damp clothing. The pockets feature cable ports too, allowing easy routing of charging cables from power banks. None of these details are revolutionary on their own, but together they contribute to a tent that feels carefully considered and pleasant to live in.

Waterproofing, wind protection and condensation

The HD designation stands for Heavy Duty, and this is where the tent differs most significantly from previous Hubba Hubba models. In many ways, it feels like MSR's direct response to the criticisms often levelled at earlier versions of the range.

The flysheet uses a solution-dyed 20-denier ripstop nylon fabric with a 3,000mm hydrostatic head rating, while the floor receives a substantial boost to 6,000mm. Those figures represent a significant increase over the standard Hubba Hubba LT, which uses ratings of 1,200mm and 1,800mm respectively. The HD also incorporates stronger DAC NFL poles, more robust hardware, additional guying options and reduced mesh throughout the inner, all with the aim of delivering greater protection in poor weather.

Interestingly, I've never personally had an issue with the lower waterproof ratings found on previous MSR tents. I've used them through severe Alpine storms in Switzerland and some truly biblical rainfall in New Zealand's Nelson Lakes region, near Waiau Pass, without ever experiencing leakage problems. MSR argues that waterproof performance is about far more than hydrostatic head numbers alone. The company points to its polyurethane and silicone coatings, seam sealing techniques, tightly woven fabrics and steep wall angles, all of which contribute to overall weather resistance.

That argument has always carried some weight in my experience. During testing in the Lake District, the Hubba Hubba HD shed rain effectively, with water beading and draining cleanly from the flysheet. Nevertheless, the higher waterproof ratings offer extra reassurance and should appeal to UK users who have historically looked at MSR's specifications with some scepticism.

Wind performance remains something of a balancing act. The tent's high walls and spacious profile inevitably present more surface area to strong gusts than lower tunnel tents, but the strengthened structure, additional guying options and sturdy DAC poles certainly improve confidence in exposed camps. It's still not a tent I'd choose for repeated use on winter mountain summits or in truly hostile conditions, but for typical three-season backpacking it feels robust enough and well judged.

The reduction in mesh inevitably has implications for ventilation. Previous Hubba Hubba models have always been exceptionally airy, which made them cool and comfortable in summer while doing an excellent job of minimising condensation. The HD version sacrifices some of that airflow in pursuit of greater weather protection. As a result, it may prove slightly more susceptible to condensation in certain conditions, although the combination of micromesh panels and upgraded flysheet vents should help maintain reasonable airflow. In practice, this feels like a sensible compromise given the tent's intended purpose.

Weight and packed size

Despite the heavier-duty construction, the Hubba Hubba HD 3 still posts an impressive trail weight of 2,360g. Considering the amount of internal space on offer, that's a highly competitive figure.

For context, the Vango Scafell 300 Plus weighs 3,600g, while the Simond MT500 3-Person Dome Tent comes in at approximately 3,650g. Even the Robens Roamer 3 LW is slightly heavier at 2,590g. There are lighter alternatives available, such as the Nemo Dagger OSMO 3P at around 2.1kg, but the differences are relatively modest when viewed alongside the Hubba Hubba's generous dimensions.

Packed size is equally respectable at 58x13cm. The supplied roll-top stuff sack makes packing straightforward and allows the tent to compress neatly within a backpacking pack. Given the liveability, weather protection and internal volume on offer, the weight-to-space ratio is one of the tent's strongest attributes.

Price and competition

There's no escaping the fact that the Hubba Hubba HD 3 is an expensive tent. With an RRP of £740, it's priced firmly in the premium end of the backpacking market. If, like me, you expect something costing that much to come with four wheels and an engine, it can feel like a difficult figure to justify.

At the time of writing, however, the tent can be found online for £629, which makes the proposition somewhat more palatable. Even so, it remains substantially more expensive than rivals such as the Robens Roamer 3 LW (£450), Vango Scafell 300 Plus (£225) and Simond MT500 3-Person Dome Tent (£159.99).

The reality is that the MSR is better than all of those tents in several key areas. The materials feel more premium, the design is more refined, the internal space is exceptional and the overall user experience is more polished.

Whether those advantages justify the additional outlay is ultimately a personal decision. After all, at current prices you could buy almost four Simond tents for the cost of one Hubba Hubba HD. For some buyers that equation will be impossible to ignore, while others will happily pay extra for superior comfort and design.

Verdict

The Hubba Hubba HD 3 is undoubtedly expensive, and its dome-style design won't appeal to everyone. If your adventures regularly involve camping in truly atrocious weather, prolonged storms or highly exposed mountain environments, there are more specialised options available from brands such as Hilleberg and Terra Nova.

For most three-season backpackers, however, this is an extremely impressive tent. It retains everything that has made the Hubba Hubba range so popular over the years, including excellent headroom, generous vestibules, dual doors and a beautifully taut, vertically walled structure that feels exceptionally comfortable to live in.

The real standout feature remains the rectangular floorplan. While many competitors claim to be three-person tents, fitting three adults side-by-side can often feel like an exercise in compromise. The Hubba Hubba HD genuinely delivers meaningful sleeping space for three occupants, and that extra room transforms the overall camping experience.

The HD updates also successfully address some of the long-standing criticisms aimed at previous Hubba Hubba models, adding greater weather protection and a more reassuring hydrostatic head specification without compromising the spacious character that defines the range. For backpackers who value comfort as highly as low weight, it's one of the most appealing three-person tents currently available.

Looking for something for two people? Take a look at our list of the best two-person tents as well.

About the author

James Forrest is a prolific peak bagger and long-distance walker who’s one of the most high-profile outdoor writers in the UK. James is based on the edge of the Lake District so when he isn’t off on his latest crazy adventure or challenge, he’s walking in his local fells. James reviews every type of outdoor kit for LFTO and is a real authority on everything you need for wild camping and packing light for a multi-day walk.

Robens is a well-respected Danish outdoor brand that occupies something of a Goldilocks position in the camping market. Its products generally sit above the budget-friendly offerings from brands such as Decathlon and Alpkit, but remain more accessible than premium names like MSR, Terra Nova and Hilleberg.

As a Scandinavian manufacturer, Robens also tends to place a strong emphasis on weather protection, which makes its tents particularly well suited to UK conditions. While some American backpacking tents prioritise weight savings and ventilation over outright stormworthiness, Scandinavian designs often take a more balanced approach.

New for 2026, the Robens Roamer 3 LW fits neatly into that mould. This three-person tunnel tent combines a lightweight specification with a weather-focused design, featuring a 2,000mm hydrostatic head flysheet and a 5,000mm-rated groundsheet. On paper, it looks like a compelling option for backpackers and campsite campers seeking a balance of low weight, protection and practicality. But will our testing show it's one of the best three-person tents around?

Design and features

The Roamer 3 LW uses a classic tunnel tent design, a shape long favoured by Scandinavian brands for its efficiency and weather resistance. Tunnel tents typically feel less spacious than dome-style alternatives because their curved sidewalls reduce usable headroom and shoulder room. However, they often make up for this with larger vestibules and a more aerodynamic profile.

That's certainly the case here. While the inner tent measures a relatively narrow 160cm across (tapering to 140cm at the foot end), which can feel quite snug when accommodating three sleeping mats side by side, the porch is genuinely impressive.

Compared to some competing three-person tents, the sleeping area is around 10-20cm narrower, meaning occupants will inevitably be sleeping in close proximity. For groups of three, that's worth bearing in mind. For two occupants, however, the sleeping compartment feels considerably more comfortable and spacious.

The large vestibule is one of the tent's standout features. It provides plenty of sheltered storage space for packs, muddy boots and other gear, while also creating a practical area for cooking on a backpacking stove during poor weather. It's a versatile setup that works particularly well on multi-day trips.

Pitching flexibility is another strength. The Roamer 3 LW can be erected as a complete tent, as a flysheet-only shelter or as an inner-only setup in suitable conditions. The structure relies on DAC Pressfit 9.5mm anodised poles, widely regarded as some of the most reliable and lightweight tent poles available. Reflective trims help with locating the tent after dark, while internal features include mesh storage pockets, a gear rope and a hanging point for camping lanterns.

Material quality is generally high throughout. The flysheet uses Robens' HydroTex RS SilPoly fabric, a 20-denier 380T ripstop polyester with a silicone and PU coating. The inner combines breathable nylon with B3 mesh panels, while the floor uses a 20-denier ripstop nylon fabric with a substantial 5,000mm waterproof rating.

Waterproofing and wind protection

On paper at least, the Roamer 3 LW performs strongly when it comes to weather protection. Tunnel tents generally offer better aerodynamics than many dome-style designs, presenting a lower profile to the wind and reducing the amount of exposed fabric. As a result, they can feel notably more stable in blustery conditions.

Personally, I'd feel more confident using the Roamer 3 LW in strong winds than either the MSR Hubba Hubba HD 3 or the Simond Three-Person Trekking Dome Tent MT500. Both of those tents employ taller, steeper wall designs that can catch gusts more readily. As with any tunnel tent, correct orientation remains important, but when pitched into the prevailing wind the Robens should offer reassuring stability.

Waterproofing is generally solid too. The tent combines a 2,000mm hydrostatic head flysheet with a 5,000mm groundsheet, and all seams are factory taped. The flysheet figure itself is perhaps a little underwhelming at this price point. For comparison, both the MSR Hubba Hubba HD 3 and Vango Scafell 300 Plus feature 3,000mm flysheet ratings. However, the real story here is not the hydrostatic head number but the fabric itself.

Robens' HydroTex SilPoly material offers several advantages over traditional nylon flysheets. Polyester absorbs significantly less water, meaning the fabric remains lighter during prolonged rain. It also dries faster and, crucially, maintains its tension when wet. Anyone who has spent a night in a rain-soaked nylon tent will know how frustrating flysheet sag can become. Once the fabric begins to droop, water can pool on the surface and performance inevitably suffers. The Roamer's SilPoly construction significantly reduces that problem, helping the shelter remain taut and effective throughout extended wet weather use.

Condensation management also appears well considered. The partly mesh inner tent promotes good airflow, while two external vents help circulate air through the shelter. Robens also includes flysheet toggles at both ends, allowing ventilation to be increased further when conditions permit while still maintaining a degree of weather protection.

Weight and packed size

The "LW" in the Roamer 3 LW stands for lightweight, and the specifications largely justify the name. The tent has an official weight of 2,590g, placing it firmly towards the lighter end of the 3-person tent market.

Its packed dimensions of 48x17cm are compact enough for backpacking use, although not exceptionally small compared to some of its direct rivals. During testing, the packed size felt broadly comparable to most other lightweight three-person tents I've used recently.

For context, the MSR Hubba Hubba HD 3 weighs 2,360g, making it slightly lighter despite offering a roomier interior. The Nemo Dagger OSMO 3P pushes weight savings even further at around 2.1kg. At the heavier end of the scale, both the Vango Scafell 300 Plus and Simond Three-Person Trekking Dome Tent MT500 weigh around 3,600g, making them considerably less attractive for long-distance backpacking.

Overall, the Roamer strikes a sensible balance. It isn't the lightest tent available, but it delivers a useful combination of low weight, durability and weather resistance without pushing into ultralight territory.

Price and competition

At around £450, the Roamer 3 LW certainly isn't cheap. However, it occupies an interesting middle ground within the wider tent market.

The Vango Scafell 300 Plus costs £225, while the Simond Three-Person Trekking Dome Tent MT500 is available for £160. At the other end of the spectrum sits the MSR Hubba Hubba HD 3 at £740.

That places the Robens somewhere between the budget and premium categories. The question many buyers will inevitably ask is whether it justifies costing roughly twice as much as the similarly configured Vango Scafell 300 Plus. The answer is probably yes from a performance and quality perspective. The materials are superior, the weight is lower and the overall package feels more refined. Whether those gains justify the significant price increase is ultimately a personal decision.

Within Robens' own range, the Roamer 3 LW sits towards the premium end because of its lightweight, backpacking-focused specification. Buyers working to a tighter budget may also wish to consider alternatives such as the Aster 3 Pro (£175), Sage 3 Pro (£220) or Voyager 3 Exp (£300), all of which offer capable three-person accommodation at lower prices.

Verdict

The Robens Roamer 3 LW is a well-balanced and thoughtfully designed tent that successfully blends lightweight credentials with the weather protection Scandinavian brands are known for. Its tunnel design delivers good wind resistance, the SilPoly flysheet avoids many of the drawbacks associated with other fabrics, and the generous porch adds a welcome dose of practicality.

There are compromises. The sleeping compartment feels quite narrow for three adults, and the 2,000mm flysheet rating is slightly disappointing given the asking price. At £450, this is also a purchase that deserves careful consideration rather than an impulse buy.

Nevertheless, there is a lot to like here. The Roamer 3 LW feels equally at home on multi-day wild camping adventures as it does on conventional campsite trips, offering a versatile blend of low weight, solid weather performance and useful living space. It may not be perfect, but it gets an awful lot right.

Want a tent for two? Take a look at our list of the best two-person tents for lighter options.

About the author

James Forrest is a prolific peak bagger and long-distance walker who’s one of the most high-profile outdoor writers in the UK. James is based on the edge of the Lake District so when he isn’t off on his latest crazy adventure or challenge, he’s walking in his local fells. James reviews every type of outdoor kit for LFTO and is a real authority on everything you need for wild camping and packing light for a multi-day walk.

Rookie campers may think that sleeping mats are all pretty much the same, but in fact they vary enormously. From simple foam rollout mats to highly engineered insulated options for trekking in winter, sleeping mats are as varied in style and price as coats, tents and boots.

Arguably, your sleeping mat is one of the most important things to get right in your camping kit. Before you start getting into portable coffee makers and foldable solar panels, your sleep setup comes first, and a good mat is as important as a good sleeping bag. It immensely improves your comfort and insulates your sleeping body from the cold ground.

At this point, let's just quickly differentiate between sleeping mats and camping mattresses. We class sleeping mats as the lightweight, packable options that you'll take with you on a multi-day backpacking trip, or use as part of a lightweight setup.

Camping mattresses, meanwhile, are the thicker, bulkier options that are more suited to car or family camping. They can deliver more comfort, but you'd struggle to fit many of them inside of your backpacking rucksack.

When buying a sleeping mat, you need to consider your body, your sleeping habits, and of course, your budget. Like every area of outdoor gear, the ceiling for both price and quality is staggeringly high.

But luckily, there are some very respectable mats with reasonable prices out there. You just need a group of dedicated campers to try them all out and let you know what's what. And that's where we come in.

Jump to: How we test | Best sleeping mat reviews | Comparison table | Buying advice

Best sleeping mats at a glance

Best sleeping mat for all-round use: Nemo Eclipse All-Season

Best value sleeping mat: Robens Lightcore UL 3.1R

Highly recommended: Sea to Summit Ether Light XR

Best sleeping mat for ultralight camping: Nemo Tensor Elite

Best for winter conditions: Nemo Tensor Extreme Conditions

Best for luxurious comfort: Therm-a-Rest Neoloft

Editor's note: This group test was last updated on 13 July 2026, when we added three new options tested by James Forrest (the Robens Lightcore UL, Highlander Nap-Pak Arctic and Exped Ultra 6.5R) and one tested by Evie Nichols (the Nemo Eclipse).

How we tested

Our team is constantly taking to the trail, either for easy wild camping adventures or mad mountain bivvy expeditions. All of these outings demand the use of lightweight sleeping mats, so the ones we test always receive a huge dose of real-world use in order for us to reach our verdicts.

Those recommended here were mainly tested by Ben Weeks, James Forrest and Evie Nichols. Ben is our former gear editor and has well over 10 years of kit testing experience. James has climbed every mountain in the UK and Ireland, and is a prolific wild camper. Evie is our chief female tester, and has hiked, climbed and cycled in over 26 countries across Europe and beyond.

When testing each sleeping mat, we focused on four key criteria. Comfort was a top priority – we looked at how well each mat contributed to a good night’s sleep. We also considered weight and portability, durability and value for money. Alongside that, we also analysed each mat's warmth – did it perform in the environment it was designed for?

Curious as to how we get products in for review? Read more about how we test here.

The best sleeping mats for backpacking reviewed:

Table: Best sleeping mats compared

What to look for in a sleeping mat

A good sleeping mat is essential for a comfortable night’s sleep in the great outdoors. Whether you're a casual campsite tourist, a hardcore wild camper or a long-distance thru-hiker, choosing the right mat can make a huge difference. This guide will help you understand the key factors to consider when purchasing a camping sleeping mat.

Type

Mats fall into one of three categories:

Foam mats are lightweight, cheaper and weather-resistant, but provide minimum cushioning and are bulky to carry. They are not very thick and, in terms of comfort, they are far inferior to inflatable mats. But their real benefit is that they are effectively indestructible.

While an inflatable mat can easily be punctured, a foam mat is utterly bombproof – hence they are often favoured by long-distance hikers who need reliable, robust kit that will last for months on trail.

Self-inflating mats contain foam that expands and pulls in air when the valve is opened, thus self-inflating. This foam traps air, providing insulation and cushioning.

They come in various shapes and sizes to balance insulation, packability and comfort. Pros include minimal inflation effort, lightweight designs and an excellent warmth-to-weight ratio.

However, they tend to be heavier, bulkier, pricier and less cushioned than regular inflatable mats, and can be prone to punctures—though they are easily repaired. You perhaps need to take the term “self-inflating” with a pinch of salt too.

They don’t always inflate particularly quickly or fully, and may require manual topping up.

Inflatable air-filled mats are like compact air beds for adventurers. Generally-speaking, they are the highest quality and most premium option for wild campers, offering the best balance between comfort, weight and all-round performance.

Inflatable air-filled mats require manual inflation, usually by blowing into the valve with your mouth or using a “pump sack” (a bag-like tool which fills with air, attaches to the valve and then inflates the mat).

Compared to self-inflating mats, regular inflatable air-filled mats are lighter, more packable, thicker and more comfortable, particularly because the firmness of your mat can be fine-tuned to your preference. However unless they have some kind of insulation inside, they can be cold.

Consequently, many mats feature insulation such as down or reflective materials to increase warmth. Other cons of inflatable air-filled mats include the time and effort required to inflate them, and the inherent risk of punctures.

R-value

R-value is a measure of thermal resistance; the higher the R-value, the warmer the mat. As of 2020, a new industry standard was adopted by most brands to standardise the measurement of R-value – the ASTM FF3340-18 R-value standard.

What is a good R-value? It all depends on the weather conditions and temperatures you’ll be camping in. To generalise, an R-value of 1-2 is considered suitable for summer camping in warmer weather, 2-4 is tailored for three-season use from spring to autumn, and 4-6+ is designed for colder weather, with higher values suitable for sub-zero camping.

Weight

A sleeping mat will spend more time being carried in a pack than being slept on, so lighter is better, but toughness can diminish with weight, so there's a balance to be found.

We’d consider a weight of 400g-600g (including accessories such as storage bag and pump sack) as a good target to aim for. 400g or under would be classed as ultralight; 600g+ is starting to get a little heavy, perhaps.

Mat size, shape, length and thickness

Mats from reputable brands often come in different lengths and widths, meaning you can choose one that best suits your body shape. Most campers will be fine with the regular size, but taller or plus-sized campers may prefer a long version, wide version or long-wide version. Anyone particularly short in height may also be able to save weight by selecting a ¾-length mat.

In terms of shape, mats tend to come in two main designs: rectangular or mummy. Rectangular mats provide a bigger overall sleeping surface area, adding versatility and comfort for those who toss and turn at night – but they are usually heavier and bulkier. Most wild campers, therefore, tend to opt for a mummy-style mat which is tapered towards the foot end to provide a better balance between weight and comfort.

Not all mats come with the same thickness when inflated. The thicker a mat, the more comfortable, warm and insulating it will be; but it’ll be also be a bit heavier and bulkier.

Remember to check a mat’s inflated thickness before purchasing. Side-sleepers will tend to benefit most from a thicker mat, which will help prevent the sleeping surface collapsing inwards under your body weight.

Sleeping surface design

Above anything else, this might be the most important factor in terms of sleeping mat comfort. It’s a very personal, subjective thing too – will you prefer the feel of vertical baffles or horizontal ones, or will a quilted, textured surface suit you better?

Therefore, it’s always best to try before you buy in a shop, if you can. Horizontal baffles, which run at 90-degrees to the mat length, are billed as providing a stable sleeping surface with good weight distribution.

Vertical baffles, which run parallel to the mat length, create long air channels and, according to some, work better for side sleepers. Alternatively some campers favour a quilted surface, which has a contoured, grid-like texture rather than baffles. But, ultimately, it all comes down to personal preference.

Packed size

Mats with smaller packed sizes are easier to fit into a rucksack along with your other camping gear. Warmer mats tend to be bulkier, so really compact mats are best saved for summer.

Durability and materials

The type, cut and thickness of the materials used in a sleeping mat will affect how durable, tough and sturdy it is in the long-term. Nylon and polyester are common – and it’s also worth checking the denier rating of the materials used. The higher the denier, the more rugged it’ll be.

Repairability

Self-inflating and inflatable mats become unusable if punctured, so usually come with some kind of repair kit. Foam mats are far more resilient and continue to offer insulation even when wet.

Inflation, deflation, pump sacks and valves

Some old school sleeping mats are inflated by mouth, like a balloon, meaning you literally have to place your lips over the inflation valve and blow in.

But this method is largely out-dated now, partly for hygiene reasons and partly because this approach adds moisture to the inside of the mat, which can cause internal damage and deterioration over time.

These days most mats come with a “pump sack” – a bespoke bag with an integrated hose and nozzle that is used to inflate your mat. The pump sack looks a little like a dry bag or sleeping bag storage bag, but has a specialised nozzle at its base.

This nozzle attaches to the valve of your sleeping mat. The pump sack then fills with air, either by gently blowing into it from a distance or angling it towards the wind so that it fills up naturally. You can then close the sack and roll or compress it downwards, thus forcing air through the nozzle to inflate your sleeping mat. It’s an efficient, convenient system.

In terms of the inflation-deflation valves on your sleeping mat, it’s best to opt for a mat with a high-tech, modern valve. These valves have a clever design, usually with two caps layered over one hole. When you open the first cap, the valve is one-way only, meaning no air can flow outwards, but air can flow inwards.

This ensures you can efficiently inflate the mat without any risk of deflation or leakage via air flowing outwards. After your camp, opening both caps will enable the mat to deflate. Some mats also have an additional micro-adjustment system, which enables you to fine-tune the air pressure to your preference.

See our list of the best camping mattresses for thicker, comfier options that are more suited to car camping, using at basecamp or furnishing your family tent.

About the authors

Ben Weeks has been with Trail for over 10 years and is our main point of contact for a lot of our gear reviews. As well as being a hugely talented writer and photographer, Ben is also a qualified Mountain Leader and climbing instructor.

Along with walking, scrambling and wild camping, he loves gnarly Scottish winter routes so is a master at putting cold weather kit through its paces.

James Forrest is an experienced gear tester and widely respected outdoor journalist. Among his many accomplishments, James climbed all 1,001 mountains in the UK and Ireland in just two years, camping wild for over 100 nights during the challenge.

The way we enjoy the outdoors has changed dramatically over the past few decades. Hillwalking, trail running and cycling are no longer niche pursuits reserved for a handful of dedicated enthusiasts armed with paper maps and well-worn guidebooks. Today, outdoor adventure is more accessible, more sociable and - in many ways - more connected than ever before. We’re living in the digital world now – adventure is no longer analogue.

For lots of people, a day on the trails isn't simply about reaching a summit or ticking off miles. It's about sharing experiences with friends, documenting memorable feats, optimising their athletic performance, discovering new routes or tracking progress towards fitness goals. Whether you're chasing a Strava segment, training for an ultramarathon, building a collection of epic adventure videography, capturing content for Instagram Reels or simply looking for fresh ways to explore the natural world, technology increasingly plays a role in how we experience the outdoors.

Of course, the challenge has always been finding tech that enhances the experience rather than distracting from it. Most outdoor enthusiasts don't want to spend their day staring at screens or fumbling with devices when they could be immersed in majesty of the mountains. Or, in other words, people want “gear that enhances, rather than interrupts, their outdoor experience”.

That's where the new Oakley Meta range – including the sporty, wraparound Oakley Meta Vanguard and the lifestyle-focused Oakley Meta HSTN – enter the conversation. Combining Oakley's proven performance eyewear with advanced Meta AI guidance, hands-free POV (point-of-view) content capture, immersive open-ear audio and activity tracking integration, these AI glasses have been designed to keep adventurers focused on the trail ahead while unlocking entirely new ways to record, share and enhance their experiences.

The result is a product that aims to blend seamlessly into outdoor life, helping you stay connected when you want to be while preserving the freedom, escapism and sense of adventure that draws so many of us outside in the first place.

Oakley Meta believes these sunglasses are a revolutionary category of outdoor gear that blends iconic Oakley performance with AI-powered utility. Here’s why the brand is so convinced these sunglasses are a game-changing innovation.

5 reasons Oakley Meta Sunglasses could revolutionise your outdoor adventures

1. Capture every adventure completely hands-free

Anyone who has tried to film a trail run, mountain bike descent or technical scramble knows the challenge of balancing the experience itself with documenting it. Traditional action cameras often require chest mounts, helmet mounts or stopping regularly to adjust settings.

Oakley Meta sunglasses simplify the process considerably. Using an integrated 12MP ultra-wide camera capable of capturing 3K video, users can record high-quality point-of-view footage directly from their eyewear. Better still, recording can be activated through simple voice commands using "Hey Meta", allowing athletes and adventurers to keep their hands free and their attention fixed firmly on the terrain ahead.

Whether you're cresting Blencathra’s Sharp Edge at sunset, trail running in Snowdonia at dawn, or simply capturing memorable moments from the West Highland Way, the ability to record naturally from your own perspective creates a more immersive and authentic record of the experience.

2. Real-time Garmin and Strava integration

Performance tracking has become a huge part of modern outdoor culture. From trail runners chasing personal bests to cyclists analysing elevation gain and hikers tracking long-distance challenges, data now plays a central role in how many people approach adventure.

The Oakley Meta Vanguard takes this concept a step further through integration with Garmin and Strava, allowing key performance metrics to be accessed without reaching for a watch or smartphone. Information such as pace, distance and elevation can be delivered through the glasses while you're on the move: simply ask questions such as “Hey Meta, how am I doing?”

For endurance athletes, this hands-free approach can help maintain rhythm and momentum, reducing the need to constantly check devices while still keeping important training information readily available. It's a subtle but potentially significant evolution in how athletes interact with performance data during activity.

3. Meta AI adds practical trailside assistance

Artificial intelligence has become one of the biggest technology stories of recent years, but Oakley Meta seeks to apply AI in ways that are genuinely useful for outdoor enthusiasts.

Using voice commands through the built-in Meta AI system, wearers can ask questions and receive information without stopping to pull out a phone. That could mean learning more about a landmark, checking local weather conditions (e.g. wind speeds, rain forecasts or tidal timings) or finding out information about nearby routes.

Importantly, the interaction remains hands-free throughout. The emphasis is on keeping users engaged with their surroundings while providing access to useful information when required.

The experience is powered through the free Meta AI app, which is required to unlock the full functionality of the Oakley Meta ecosystem.

4. Open-ear audio designed for outdoor use

Listening to music, podcasts or navigation prompts outdoors often involves a compromise. Traditional earbuds can isolate users from their environment, potentially reducing awareness of other trail users, traffic, wildlife or changing weather conditions.

Oakley Meta approaches audio differently through integrated open-ear speakers built into the frames. This allows users to hear audio content while remaining aware of the world around them, a particularly important consideration for runners, cyclists and hikers.

The system has also been engineered with outdoor performance in mind. Wind noise reduction technology helps maintain audio clarity and call quality, even at speeds approaching 30mph. Whether you're taking a phone call on a bike ride, listening to Spotify during a run or catching up on a podcast during a long hike, the experience is designed to remain clear without compromising situational awareness.

5. Oakley's proven lens technology meets smart functionality

For all the advanced technology packed into the frames, Oakley Meta remains first and foremost a pair of performance sunglasses.

That's where Oakley's extensive expertise in sports eyewear becomes particularly important. Prizm™ lens technology helps optimise contrast and visibility across a wide range of outdoor conditions, helping wearers better distinguish terrain features and changing trail surfaces.

Both Oakley Meta HSTN and Vanguard can also feature Prizm™ Transitions lenses, which automatically adapt to changing light conditions throughout the day. For anyone spending hours outdoors, where weather and lighting can change rapidly, this adaptability helps reduce the need to swap eyewear or compromise on visibility.

The end result is a product that combines advanced smart functionality with the optical performance that outdoor athletes already expect from premium Oakley eyewear.

Product spotlight: 2 of the best sunglasses in the Oakley Meta range

Rooftop tents come in all shapes and sizes, but the one thing most have in common is that they’re perfect for two people. That’s certainly what we’ve found while testing models for our guide to the best roof tents.

Then, a few years ago, the TentBox Lite XL came along, with space for up to four adults – if you don’t mind a tight squeeze – and we thought we’d seen the upper limit in terms of size and space for this unique type of camping. We were wrong.

RoofBunk has gone one better with its Explorer Super XL – a soft-shell roof tent so cavernous when fully deployed that it could just about sleep five adults, or a family of six (two adults, four kids).

It’s an interesting concept to go so large for a roof tent, since the original appeal for many people was the fact that this type of camping was quick and simple. Two people, with a tent that could fit almost any vehicle with roof bars, capable of travelling fairly light and turning road trips into fun camping adventures.

But RoofBunk is offering something very different with this model – a family camping experience without the hassle of rigging up a gigantic tent when you hit the campsite. We’ve been fascinated by this tent since we first heard about it, so we were delighted to get our hands on it this spring.

So far, we’ve used it for solo adventures and full-on family camping epics – here’s our full review…

How we tested

I used the RoofBunk Explorer Super XL for a couple of months after getting it fitted to my Dacia Bigster Extreme in early spring. I’ve got the Bigster on long-term test and it’s a perfect vehicle for this tent, because it’s a large and – crucially – long SUV that can handle the meaty dimensions of a rooftop tent this big.

We drove to RoofBunk HQ near Nottingham and took advantage of their free fitting service. I’m glad we did because it’s a big tent that weighs over 70kg, and as well as ensuring it was securely fitted, we got a great demo on how to use it from RoofBunk owner Pete.

I then used it on a solo overnight campout in the Chilterns, a dad-and-lads trip to the Lake District (one adult, two kids), and a family camping weekend in Yorkshire over the first May Bank Holiday (two adults, two kids). So by the time our testing was over, we’d given it a proper workout, using almost the full range of available bodies to stuff into it.

Exactly how big is this thing?

Very big. The photos in this article hopefully help bring the scale to life, but here are the headline dimensions:

• Closed size: 225cm (L) x 120cm (W) x 30cm (H)

• Opened size (including canopy): 310cm (L) x 225cm (W) x 130cm (H)

• Sleeping area: 240cm (L) x 225cm (W) x 130cm (H)

All of that makes it the largest roof tent we’ve tested by some distance – and the largest currently available in the UK.

It also comes with a 2.3m telescopic ladder, which gives you a sense of just how tall and substantial the overall setup feels once deployed.

Build quality and weather-resistance

We’ve tested a lot of roof tents over the past few years with varying levels of build quality, but we’re pleased to report the RoofBunk Explorer Super XL is right up there with market leaders like TentBox for this soft-shell model.

The main tent uses a 320gsm ripstop polycotton canvas with a 3,000mm hydrostatic head. On top of that, you get a 600D Oxford polyester rainfly with a 5,000mm hydrostatic head. This stacks up very similarly to the TentBox Lite XL in terms of stats, and basically means you won’t be getting wet while you sleep.

We’ve never used the Explorer Super XL without the attached rainfly and probably wouldn’t unless it was seriously hot, so the protection here feels excellent. The travel cover feels really robust and heavy-duty too, made from a 1,200D PVC material that fits securely over the tent when it’s packed away and is held in place by a zip and Velcro straps.

The structural frame is made from 25mm aluminium tubes, with all zips, loops and attachment points throughout the tent feeling well built and reliable. So all in all, a really solid package in terms of weatherproofing and materials.

Comfort and liveability

This is where the RoofBunk Explorer Super XL is simply unmatched compared to any other roof tent we’ve used. This thing is massive, so it’s incredibly generous in terms of living space, and the comfort levels are off the chart.

The mattress fills the entire interior of the tent and is made from 6cm memory foam (the same as the TentBox Lite XL). For anyone used to sleeping on a camping mattress when they camp, this is a serious upgrade. It feels far more like sleeping in a bed at home than sleeping in a tent, which for us has always been one of the big USPs of roof tents.

In terms of liveability, the first time I used it was by myself and the difference in internal space was immediately obvious. Even with my overnight bags inside the tent with me, it still felt like I was sleeping in a king-size hotel bed on my own.

Fast-forward a couple of weeks to a camping trip in the Lake District with my two boys (aged nine and six), and that extra bit of space really came into its own. Again, we had big bags in the tent with us, as well as extra layers and camping blankets (it dropped close to freezing overnight), and the Explorer Super XL still felt incredibly spacious.

I’m not sure I’d want to go as high as two adults and four kids in terms of total sleepers, so the real test came in May when the four of us spent two nights in it, camping near the Yorkshire coast. I was worried it might feel quite cramped for the full family, but not in the slightest. We all slept really well on both nights, never felt like we were piled on top of each other, and still had plenty of space for a few bags around us.

One feature we all really like is the large awning/canopy that RoofBunk have added to this tent. Rather than just a small panel of fabric propped up above the main entrance, you get a big covered area that completely shelters you while getting in and out. It’s also large enough for two people to sit underneath on camping chairs. The only catch is that it adds an extra stage to pitching the tent, but we’ll come to that below.

We’ve also used the additional Thermal Insulation Pod during testing, which is an optional add-on at £235. This is a soft, padded layer of insulation that clips easily into the inside of the tent and tucks under the mattress, so the whole sleeping area is insulated. It basically creates a snug bedroom inside the outer shell of the tent. This is a great addition if you like a cosy setup, trapping body heat and potentially adding up to 10°C of extra warmth.

Overall, the liveability is excellent and the comfort levels are right up there. You get enough headroom for adults to sit or kneel inside, so although it’ll never match a large, ground-pitched family tent where you can walk around upright, it does an impressive job for something that lives on top of your car.

Ease of pitching

As the old saying goes: if something seems too good to be true, it usually is. Because with all of the extra benefits you get with a roof tent as big and roomy as the RoofBunk Explorer Super XL, there have to be a couple of drawbacks. And for us, the first one is pitching speed.

I should start by saying this is still a lot quicker to pitch than a ground-based tent (like one of these family tents), but compared to other roof tents we’ve used, there are a few extra steps that add a small amount of time to the overall deployment.

Like most soft-shell roof tents, you start by detaching the outer cover, unbuckling a few straps, then extending the ladder and using that almost as a lever to unfold the tent. So far, so simple, because within a couple of minutes, you’ve got the basic structure ready to go.

Then come the slightly more fiddly bits. The oversized canopy mentioned above sags around the main entrance when you first unfold everything, so you need to get underneath and attach a large U-shaped bar to the inside of the awning to hold it in place. You then use another telescopic bar to lock it into position and keep the whole structure feeling solid.

Then it’s a case of going around the outside of the tent and attaching the porch and window poles to give the Explorer Super XL its full shape, which again is very straightforward but does take a bit of time. We’ve pitched it three times now and got quicker on each occasion – with the most recent effort taking around 10 minutes, now we’ve got used to the correct sequence.

There are also three guy rope attachment points on the fold-out section of the tent, which we’ve used on all of our trips. I once had an eye-opening experience when a soft-shell roof tent snapped itself shut in a strong gust, so I’ve always used them since – even when no wind is forecast. This only takes another minute or two if you’re familiar with guy lines.

Then, of course, you need to take it all down again before you leave. Using the Thermal Insulation Pod has probably made this slightly tougher for us, because that extra layer of material means you have to work harder to pack everything away.

But essentially, you just do everything in reverse order: remove the guy lines, then the poles, make sure everything is zipped up and secured, then push the ladder up to close it on top of the car. Then it’s just a case of using the straps to cinch it down tight before zipping up the cover to make it fully secure. Again, we’d say around 10-15 minutes to get the job done properly.

One thing we like to do is keep sleeping bags in there, rolled out flat, so they’re ready as soon as you open the tent again – and it saves a bit of space in the boot of the car (here's our pick of the best kids sleeping bags, if you're in need of some).

Portability and compatibility

One thing the RoofBunk Explorer Super XL definitely isn’t is portable.

The installation process involved a mini crane to lift it onto the roof of our SUV – and it’s not a job I’d want to attempt without one. At 72kg, that’s a lot of weight to manoeuvre into place, and you could cause serious damage to your car (or yourself) if you make a mistake.

It takes a while to install properly, too – probably somewhere between 30 and 60 minutes to get everything aligned, tightened and fully secured. So unless you’re very confident, we’d suggest making the trip to RoofBunk HQ to have it fitted by an expert.

Once it’s on, we’d recommend keeping it there for the whole camping season. Not just because it’s a fiddle to remove and refit, but also because you’ll need a decent amount of storage space. It will take up a significant chunk of a garage.

In terms of compatibility, this isn’t a roof tent that will suit every vehicle. When closed, it measures 225x120cm (for comparison, the TentBox Lite XL is 183cm x 120cm), so its sheer size makes it unsuitable for anything smaller than a large SUV or campervan. You’ll also need to check your vehicle’s roof load capacity carefully to ensure it can handle this kind of weight.

I regularly drive a Peugeot 3008, and the Explorer Super XL feels too big for it. The Dacia Bigster is a much better fit. In fact, it feels like a perfect option for a campervan – something you could keep mounted year-round to significantly boost your sleeping capacity.

What’s it like driving with a roof tent this big?

Noisy. I often have extra accessories fastened to the outside of my car – ranging from roof tents, roof boxes, bike racks and the occasional paddleboard – but I’ve never known one to make quite as much of a racket as the Explorer Super XL.

When you’re driving below 50mph, you won’t even know it’s up there, apart from maybe when braking suddenly and becoming aware of that extra weight. But I’ve found that as soon as I edge up towards 60mph, I can really hear the wind whipping around and underneath it. Especially on the motorway.

I should say that I don’t think that’s down to poor design; it’s purely the size and bulk of using a tent this big. It also doesn’t help that my Dacia Bigster has a sunroof, which means the extra noise is amplified because the roof isn’t a single solid panel. But it’s something you simply have to get used to if you’re planning to keep the tent on your car for extended periods.

The big question I get asked by everyone who sees it is: what impact does it have on fuel consumption?

My honest answer is that I’m not totally sure. I didn’t notice a dramatic drop in MPG during my recent drive up to the Lake District, but on the return journey there was a slight decrease (no more than a few decimal points) – although that may have been down to stronger winds on the M6.

I think you have to accept that, yes, you will probably see a small drop in fuel economy. The Explorer XL weighs roughly the same as having another adult passenger in the car, and aerodynamically your vehicle simply can’t be as efficient with something this large mounted on the roof. But in my experience, the difference has been minimal.

Our favourite features

Beyond everything already mentioned, there are plenty of smaller details that make this tent feel like a genuinely premium purchase – one that should serve you well for many years.

There are mosquito nets on all windows, doors and skylights, four internal storage pockets, and two large boot bags that hang either side of the ladder so you can stash footwear outside before climbing in or out.

There’s also a USB-powered strip light fitted to the ceiling of the tent, although we obscured ours during testing by installing the Thermal Insulation Pod. If you do decide to invest in this tent, we’d strongly recommend spending the extra on the insulation. It transforms the sleeping area from a single-wall tent into something that feels much more like a cosy bedroom, adding a seriously premium touch.

This is the kind of product you’ll hopefully use for many years, so spending a little extra to maximise comfort feels like a worthwhile investment. In fact, we’ll probably keep using the Insulation Pod through summer as well.

And as mentioned earlier, that extended entrance canopy is a standout feature. Having the ladder fully covered while getting in and out is a real bonus, and the additional sheltered space outside proves invaluable on predictably wet camping weekends.

Value for money and competition

In my opinion, there’s a big difference between something costing a lot of money and being overpriced. The RoofBunk Explorer Super XL unquestionably costs a lot at £1,750 – but when you look at the roof tent market as a whole, that doesn’t make it excessive.

For context, it’s almost £250 cheaper than the TentBox Lite XL (£1,999), despite offering very similar specifications. In fact, the Explorer Super XL arguably gives you more for your money, thanks to its slightly larger footprint, the extended canopy and thoughtful additions like the included boot bags.

You could argue it doesn’t feel quite as slick or as polished as models from brands like TentBox or Thule, but that ultimately comes down to personal preference. Overall, this represents strong value for a roof tent of this size, shape and quality.

Verdict

The RoofBunk Explorer Super XL is a tricky tent to score because it’s so unique. If it were the same size and shape as something like the TentBox Lite XL, it would be hard to recommend it as a better alternative on anything other than value alone.

But that’s the key point.

The Super XL’s entire appeal is that it’s bigger and different. RoofBunk has created something genuinely original here and, while it might not be the most compact, smoothest or slickest roof tent on the market, it offers something few others do: truly generous space.

If you’re a committed roof‑tenting family, we reckon this is the tent for you. For those who prioritise space over sleekness, the Explorer Super XL stands in a class of its own.

About the author

Oli Reed is the editor of Live for the Outdoors, a lifelong hiker and camper, and father to two young boys who would go camping every weekend if they got their wish. They’ve been camping in roof tents together for five years and are showing no signs of slowing down yet!